You are on page 1of 248

Al SRRPV-NFM-900

Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

NATOPS FLIGHT MANUAL


NAVY MODEL
RQ-2A
PIONEER
UNMANNED AERIAL VEHICLE

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT C - Distribution authorized to U.S.


Government agencies and their contractors to protect publications re-
quired for official use or for administrative or operational purposes
only, determined on 1 July 1999. Other requests for this document
shall be referred to Commanding Officer, Naval Air Technical Data and
Engineering Service Command, Naval Air Station North island, P.O.
Box 357031, Building 90 Distribution, San Diego, CA 921357031.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE - For unclassified, limited documents,
destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or
reconstruction of the document.

ISSUED BY AUTHORITY OF THE CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS


AND UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDER,
NAVAL AIR SYSTEMS COMMAND

0801LP0294660
I (Reverse Blank) 1 DECEMBER 99
NATEC ELECTRONIC MANUAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY


CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS
2000 NAVY PENTAGON
I !
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20350-2000

December, 1999

LETTER OF PROMULGATION

1. The Naval Air Training and Operating Procedures Standardization (NATOPS) Program is a pos-
itive approach toward improving combat readiness and achieving a substantial reduction in the air-
craft mishap rate. Standardization, based on professional knowledge and experience, provides the
basis for development of an efficient and sound operational procedure. The standardization program
is not planned to stifle individual initiative, but rather to aid the commanding officer in increasing the
units combat potential without reducing command prestige or responsibility.

2. This manual standardizes ground and flight procedures but does not include tactical doctrine.
Compliance with the stipulated manual requirements and procedures is mandatory except as autho-
rized herein. In order to remain effective, NATOPS must be dynamic and stimulate rather than sup-
press individual thinking. Since aviation is a continuing, progressive profession, it is both desirable
and necessary that new ideas and new techniques be expeditiously evaluated and incorporated if
proven to be sound. To this end, commanding officers of aviation units are authorized to modify pro-
cedures contained herein, in accordance with the waiver provisions established by OPNAVINST
3710.7, for the purpose of assessing new ideas prior to initiating recommendations for permanent
changes. This manual is prepared and kept current by the users in order to achieve maximum readi-
ness and safety in the most efficient and economical manner. Should conflict exist between the train-
ing and operating procedures found in this manual and those found in other publications, this manual
will govern.

3. Checklists and other pertinent extracts from this publication necessary to normal operations and
training should be made and carried for use in naval aircraft,

Director, Air Warfare

3 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL


Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

NATOPS Flight Manual


Navy Model RQ-2A

CONTENTS

Page
No.

PART I -THE PIONEER SYSTEM

CHAPTER 1 -GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.1 THE UNMANNED AERIAL VEHICLE UAV (PIONEER) .................. l-l


1.1.1 General. ............................................. l-l
1.1.2 Crew Required .......................................... l-l
1.1.3 Mission Capability ........................................ 1- 1
1.1.4 Principal Dimensions. ...................................... 1- 1
1.15 Performance ........................................... 1- 1
1.1.6 Weights .............................................. l-1
1.1.7 Launch and Recovery ...................................... l- 1

CHAPTER 2 - THE AIR VEHICLE

2.1 UNMANNED AERIAL VEHICLE (UAV) ........................... 2-1


2.1.1 UAV Airframe. ......................................... 2-l
2.1.2 UAV Electrical System ..................................... 24
2.1.3 UAV Electronic System. ..................................... 2-7
2.1.4 Communications. ....................................... 2-10

CHAPTER 3 -THE GROUND CONTROL STATION (GCS) AND THE TRACKING AND
COMMUNICATIONS UNIT (TCU) - -

3.0 GROUND CONTROL SYSTEM ................................ 3-l

3.1 GROUND CONTROL STATION (GCS) ............................ 3-l


3.1.1 Electrical Power. ......................................... 3- 1
3.1.2 Power Distribution ........................................ 3- 1
3.1.3 System Monitor and Processor (SMP) .............................. 3-l
3.1.4 Pilot Control Bay (PBY) ..................................... 3-2
3.1.5 Tracking Bay (TBY). ...................................... 3-l 5
3.1.6 Observer Bay (OBY) ...................................... 3-19

3.2 TRACKING AND COMMUNICATION UNIT (TCU) .................... 3-28


3.2.1 Communication and Tracking Subsystem (CTS) ....................... 3-29
3.2.2 Communications Control Box (CCB) ............................. 3-29
3.2.3 Microprocessor Controlled Auto-Tracking Unit (MCAT) ................... 3-29
3.2.4 Encoder/Decoder Unit (EDC) ................................. 3-29
3.2.5 C-Band Receiver ........................................ 3-29
3.2.6 Antenna System. ........................................ 3-29

5 ORIGINAL
AlSRRPV-NFM-OOO

Page
No.

CHAPTER 4 -THE PORTABLE CONTROL STATION (PCS)

4.1 PORTABLE CONTROL STATION (PCS). .......................... 4-l


4.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION. .................................. 4-2
4.2.1 Flight Command/Control Subsystem. .............................. 4-2
4.2.2 Communication Subsystem. ................................... 4-2
4.2.3 Power Supply Subsystem. .................................... 4-2
4.3 PAYLOAD CONTROL ..................................... 4-2

CHAPTER 5 - THE PAYLOADS

5.1 STABILIZED RECONNAISSANCE PAYLOAD FOR DAYLIGHT


OPERATION (MKD-200). ................................... 5-l
5.1.1 General. ............................................. 5-l
5.1.2 Mission Capabilities ....................................... 5- 1
5.1.3 Operational Control Modes. ................................... 5- 1
5.1.4 Operation Procedures ...................................... 5-2
5.1.5 Automatic Payload Functions .................................. 5-3
5.2 STABILIZED RECONNAISSANCE PAYLOAD FOR DAY/NIGHT
OPERATION (MKD-400) ................................... 5-3
5.2.1 General. ............................................. 5-3
5.2.2 Mission Capabilities ....................................... 54
5.2.3 Operational Control Modes ................................... 5-5
5.2.4 Operation Procedures ...................................... 5-6
5.2.5 Displays ............................................. 5-8
5.2.6 Payload Electronic Box (PEB) .................................. 5-8
5.2.7 FLIR Electronic Box (FEB) ................................... 5-8

CHAPTER 6 -THE REMOTE RECEIVING STATION (RRS)


6.1 THE REMOTE RECEIVING STATION (RRS) ........................ 6-l
6.1.1 Purpose and Use ......................................... 6-1
6.1.2 General Description ....................................... 6- 1
6.2 SITE SELECTION AND DEPLOYMENT ........................... 6-2
6.3 RRS SETUP ........................................... 6-3
6.3.1 TUASe~p ............................................ 6-3
6.3.2 Main Unit Setup ......................................... 6-4
6.3.3 RRSStartup...........................................6 -4
6.4 MISSION PROCEDURES. ................................... 6-4
6.4.1 Standby Mode .......................................... 6-4
6.4.2 Operation Mode ......................................... 6-4

CHAPTER 7 - SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

7.1 OPERATING LIMITATIONS. ................................. 7- 1


7.1.1 Introduction ........................................... 7-l

ORIGINAL 6
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

Page
No.

7.1.2 Engine Limitations ........................................ 7- 1


7.1.3 Roll and Pitch and Yaw Limitations ............................... 7-l
7.1.4 Airspeed Limitations. ...................................... 7-2
7.1.5 Maneuvering Load Factors. ................................... 7-2
7.1.6 Altitude Envelope ........................................ 7-2
7.1.7 Maximum Weight ........................................ 7-2
7.1.8 Wind Limitations (Takeoff & Landings). ............................ 7-2
7.1.9 Prohibited Maneuvers ...................................... 7-2
7.1.10 Autopilot Limitations ...................................... 7-2

7.2 GCS-2000 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3


7.3 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS RANGE
LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.4 UPLINWDOWNLINK FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

PART ii - INDOCTRINATION

CHAPTER 8 - INDOCTRINATION PROCEDURES

8.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-l


8.2 TRAINING SYLLABUS .................................... 8-l
8.2.1 Initial Training (DUTC) ..................................... 8- 1
8.2.2 Unit Training. .......................................... 8-l

8.3 DESIGNATION AND DESIGNATING AUIHORITY. .................... 8-l


8.3.1 Designation. ........................................... 8-l
8.3.2 Designating Authority ...................................... 8-l

8.4 QUALlFlCATlONS ....................................... 8-l


8.4.1 External Pilot (EP) ........................................ 8-l
8.4.2 Internal Pilot (IP) ......................................... 8-l
8.4.3 Payload Operator (PO) ...................................... 8- 1
8.4.4 Internal Operator (IO) ...................................... 8- 1
8.4.5 Mission Commander (MC). ................................... 8-l
8.4.6 Crew Requirements ....................................... 8- 1
8.4.7 Currency ............................................. 8-2
8.4.8 NATOPS Evaluations ...................................... 8-2

PART iii - NORMAL PROCEDURES

CHAPTER 9 - FLIGHT PREPARATION

9.1 MISSION PLANNING ..................................... 9-1


9.1.1 Introduction ........................................... 9-l
9.1.2 Factors Affecting UAV Lift Capability ............................. 9- 1
9.1.3 Weight and Balance ....................................... 9-l
9.1.4 Mission Planning. ........................................ 9-l
9.1.5 Fuel Planning .......................................... 9-2

7 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

Page
No.

9.1.6 Equipment List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2


9.2 BRIEFING/DEBRIEFING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2.1 Briefing..............................................9-2
9.2.2 Briefing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2.3 Debriefing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

CHAPTER 10 - SHORE-BASED PROCEDURES

10.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................... 10-l

10.2 SCHEDULING ......................................... 10-l


10.3 LINE OPERATIONS. ..................................... 10-l
10.3.1 Movement. ........................................... lo- 1
10.3.2 Ground Operations ....................................... 1O-l
10.4 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE ................................... 10-3
10.5 PREFLIGHT INSPECTION .................................. 10-3
10.5.1 TCU Preflight Inspection .................................... 1O-3
10.5.2 GCS Preflight Inspection .................................... 10-3
10.5.3 PIONEER Preflight Inspection ................................. 10-7
10.6 RAT0 PRESTART CHECKLIST .............................. lo-10
10.7 STARTING ENGINE. .................................... 10-l 1
10.8 ENGINE SHUTDOWN. ................................... lo-12
10.9 PRE-TAXI CHECKS ..................................... lo-12
10.10 PRE-TAKEOFF/LAUNCH PROCEDURES ......................... lo- 13

10.11 TAKEOFF/LAUNCH CHECKLIST ............................. lo-14


10.12 AFTER TAKEOFF ...................................... lo-15
10.12.1 CLIMB OUT ......................................... lo-15
10.12.2 Control Checks ........................................ 1O-l 5
10.13 DISHLOCK. ......................................... lo-15
10.14 CLIMB. ............................................ lo-16
10.15 DESCENT. .......................................... lo-16

10.16 LANDING. .......................................... lo-17


10.17 POST LANDING ....................................... lo-17

10.18 DUALUAV OPERATIONS ................................. lo-17


10.18.1 Dual Ops Procedures ..................................... lo-17
10.18.2 Dual OPS / On Station Turn Over. .............................. lo-18
IO. 18.3 Dual OPS / Descent & Landing. ............................... lo-19
10.19 UAV REACQUISITION ................................... lo-20

ORIGINAL 8
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

Page
No.

10.20 POST FLIGHT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1O-20


10.21 NIGHT OPERATIONS .................................... 10-20
10.21.1 Chemlighting Runway. .................................... 1O-20
10.21.2 HandSignals .......................................... 1O-20
10.21.3 Recovery - Landing of UAV ................................. 10-21

10.22 PRESETS.. ......................................... 10-21


10.22.1 Logic and Use of Menus. ................................... 10-21
10.22.2 Pilot Bay Presets. ....................................... IO-21
10.22.3 Pilot Control Table - Other Functions ............................ 1O-26
10.22.4 Tracking Bay Presets ..................................... lo-28
10.22.5 Observer Bay Presets ..................................... 1O-29
10.22.6 Other Observers Control Modes ............................... 10-30

10.23 FUNCTIONAL CHECK FLIGHTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

CHAPTER 11 -SHiPBOARDPROCEDURES

11.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................... 1l-l

11.2 SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS ................................. 1l-2


11.2.1 Navigation Data System .................................... 1l-2
11.2.2 Antenna Elevation ....................................... 1l-5
11.2.3 Antenna Azimuth ........................................ 1l-6
11.2.4 Antenna Switching ....................................... 11-6
11.2.5 RF System. ........................................... II-6
11.2.6 PCS...............................................ll- 6
11.3 SPARS III. ........................................... 1l-6

11.4 UAV FLIGHT DECK OPERATIONS ............................. 1l-7


11.4.1 Organization .......................................... 1l-7

11.5 UAV PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES .............................. 1l-8


11.5.1 TCU PREFLIGHT INSPECTION ............................... 1l-8
11.5.2 GCS ELECTRICAL PANELS ................................. 1l-9
11.5.3 INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM ............................ 11-9
11.5.4 GCS PBY ELECTRICAL PANELS .............................. 1l-9
11.5.5 PCS INTEGRITY CHECKLIST. ............................... 1l-9
11.5.6 PILOT BAY .......................................... 1l-9
11.5.7 OBSERVER BAY. ...................................... 1l-l 1
11.5.8 TRACKINGBAY ....................................... 11-11
11.5.9 UAV Preflight/Engine Turn Procedures ........................... 1l-12
11.5.10 Preflight Briefing ....................................... 1l-12
11.5.11 Recovery Net ......................................... 1I-12
11.5.12 Flight Quarters for UAV Operations ............................. 1l-13

11.6 UAV FLIGHT DECK LAUNCH PROCEDURES ...................... 1l-13

11.7 DECK STATUS CRITERIA/AUTHORITY ......................... 1I-14


11.7.1 GREEN DECK (launch or recovery of UAVs) ........................ 1I-14

9 ORIGINAL
AlSRRPV-NFM-000

Page
No.

11.7.2 RED DECK .......................................... 1l-14


11.7.3 AMBER DECK ........................................ 1l-14
11.8 UAV INFLIGHT PROCEDURES .............................. 1l-14
11.8.1 UAV Control ......................................... 1l-14
11.8.2 Securing Flight Quarters. ................................... 1l-14
11.9 UAV FLIGHT OPERATIONS WITHIN VISUAL RANGE OF SHIP. ........... 1 1- 15
11.9.1 UAV Operation Above 1000 fi MSL. ............................ 1l-15
11.9.2 UAV Operations Below 1000 ft MSL. ............................ 1l-15

11.10 PRACTICE/SIMULATED UAV RECOVERY PROCEDURES .............. 11-l 5

11.11 UAV FLIGHT DECK RECOVERY PROCEDURES .................... 1l-15

11.12 FLIGHT DECKCRASH PROCEDURES .......................... 11-16


11.12.1 A Problem Exists and a Crash Is Likely. ........................... 1l-16
11.12.2 ACrashontheFlightDeck. ................................. 11-16
11.12.3 Crash and Salvage Scene Leader ............................... 1l-16
11.12.4 UAV Mishap Reporting. ................................... 1l-16

11.13 UAV POSTFLIGHTPROCEDURES ............................ 11-16

11.14 UAV/AVGAS FUELING AND DEFUELING PROCEDURES. .............. 1l-17


11.14.1 AVGAS Storage Bladder ................................... 1l-l 7
11.14.2 AVGAS Storage Bladder Jettison Procedures. ........................ 1 1- 17
11.14.3 UAV Fueling/Def%eling. ................................... 1l-17
11.14.4 AVGAS Bladder Fueling/Defueling ............................. 1l- 18
11.15 OBSERVATION OF UAV OPERATIONS ......................... 1l-18
11.16 MISSION COMMANDER CHECKLIST (SHIPBOARD). ................. 11-18
11.17 CREW CHIEF PRE-TAKEOFF CHECKLIST (SHIPBOARD) ............... 1l-19
11.18 INTERNAL PILOT PRE-TAKEOFF CHECKLIST (SHIPBOARD) ............ 1l-19

11.19 PRESETS (SHIPBOARD) .................................. 1l-20


11.20 OOD CHECKLIST FOR UAV OPERATIONS (SHIPBOARD). .............. 1l-22
11.21 PRIFLY CHECKLISTS (SHIPBOARD) ........................... 1l-23
11.21.1 PRIFLY UAV Pre-launch Checklist ............................. 1l-23
11.21.2 PRIFLY UAV Launch Checklist ............................... 1l-24
11.21.3 PRIFLY UAV Pre-Recovery Checklist ............................ 1l-24
11.21.4 PRIFLY UAV Recovery/Post Recovery Checklist ...................... 1l-24
11.22 CIC UAV CHECKLIST. ................................... 1l-25

11.23 RAT0 MISFIRE PROCEDURES. .............................. 1l-25

11.24 UAV WATER RECOVERY PROCEDURES ........................ 1l-25


11.24.1 UAV Mission Commander .................................. 1l-25
11.24.2 OOD..............................................11-2 5
11.24.3 Master-At-Arms Division ................................... 1l-25

ORIGINAL 20
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

Page
No.

11.24.4 UAV Crew Chief ....................................... 1l-25


11.24.5 BoatCrew. .......................................... 11-25
11.24.6 B&ACraneDeckCrew ................................... 11-26
11.24.7 Ship Lookouts ......................................... 1l-26

PART IV - FLIGHT CHARACTERISTICS

CHAPTER 12 - FLIGHT CHARACTERISTICS

12.1 TAXI~G............................................12- 1
12.2 TAKEOFF ........................................... 12-l
12.2.1 Rolling Takeoff. ........................................ 12- 1
12.2.2 Crosswind Takeoff ....................................... 12- 1
12.3 CLIMB AND CRUISE. .................................... 12-l
12.3.1 Climb Procedures ........................................ 12-l
12.3.2 Maneuvering .......................................... 12-2
12.3.3 Stall Recovery. ......................................... 12-2
12.3.4 Changing Flight Modes. .................................... 12-2
12.3.5 Autopilot Disconnect (DISCO) Flight ............................. 12-2
12.4 LANDING ........................................... 12-2
12.4.1 Normal Lauding. ........................................ 12-2
12.4.2 Crosswind Landing ....................................... 12-2
12.4.3 Autopilot Disconnect (DISCO) Landing ............................ 12-3

PARTV-EMERGENCYPROCEDURES

CHAPTER 13 - EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

13.1 GROUND EMERGENCIES .................................. 13-l


13.1.1 FIRE ON DECK ........................................ 13-I
13.1.2 ENG FAILS TO CUT ON COMMAND. ........................... 13-l
13.1.3 POWER FAILURE (CONTROL STATIONS). ........................ 13-2
13.2 LAUNCH AND RECOVERY EMERGENCIES ....................... 13-2
13.2.1 RAT0 MISFIRE ........................................ 13-2
13.2.2 PNEUMATIC LAUNCHER FAILURE ............................ 13-3
13.2.3 ROLLING TAKEOFF ABORT ................................ 13-3
13.2.4 HUNG RAT0 BOTTLE .................................... 13-3
13.2.5 LOSS OF VISUAL CONTACT ................................ 13-3
13.2.6 ENGINE CUT (EP AT THE CONTROLS) .......................... 13-4
13.3 IN-FLIGHT ENGINE EMERGENCIES ............................ 134
13.3.1 ENGINE CUT (IP AT THE CONTROLS). .......................... 13-4
13.3.2 ENG~ETEMP ......................................... 13-4
13.3.3 STUCK THROTTLE ..................................... 13-5
13.3.4 HIGH IDLE (ABOVE 4800 RPM) WITH MIN THROTTLE. ................ 13-5
13.3.5 HIGH FUEL CONSUMPTION ................................ 13-5

If ORIGINAL
Al SRRPV-NFM-000

Page
No.

13.4 ELECTRICAL EMERGENCIES. ............................... 13-6


13.4.1 GENERATOR FAILURE. ................................... 13-6
13.4.2 BATTERY FAILURE. ..................................... 13-7

13.5.1 NO REPORT .......................................... 13-8


13.5.2 DUAL UPLINK FAILURE. .................................. 13-8
13.5.3 SINGLE UPLINK FAILURE ................................. 13-9
13.5.4 UAV FAILURE TO RESPOND (GCS LOCKUP). ...................... 13-9
13.5.5 EMERGENCY CONTROL STATION TRANSFER ..................... 13-9
13.5.6 PROG FAIL LIGHT ILLUMINATED (-30 CONFIGURED NVC). ............. 13-9

13.6 FLIGHT CONTROL EMERGENCIES. ........................... 13-10


13.6.1 FLIGHT CONTROL MALFUNCTION. ........................... 13-10
13.6.2 UAV OSCILIATIONWNTRL BOX FAILURE (ACFT WITHIN AUTOPILOT LIMITS) .... 13-l 1

PART Vi - CONTROL/FLIGHT MODES

CHAPTER 14 - CONTROL/FLIGHT MODES

14.1 PILOT CONTROL MODES .................................. 14-l


14.1.1 Test Mode. ........................................... 14-l
14.1.2 Preset Mode. .......................................... 14-2
14.1.3 Calibration Mode ....................................... 14-18
14.1.4 Failure Display Mode ..................................... 14-18
14.1.5 Multifunction Mode. ..................................... 14-18
14.1.6 Target Altitude Updating Mode. ............................... 14-21
14.1.7 Camera Guide Updating Mode ................................ 14-2 1
14.1.8 Nav Programmer Updating Mode .............................. 14-2 1
14.1.9 Return Home Updating Mode. ................................ 14-2 1
14.1.10 Nav-to-Coordinate Mode ................................... 14-2 1

14.2 FLIGHT MODES ....................................... 14-22


14.2.1 Position Stick-Manual Flight Mode (STICKS) ...................... 14-22
14.2.2 Autopilot Disengage (Bypass) - Manual Emergency Flight Control DISCO. ...... 14-22
14.2.3 Knob Flight Mode. ...................................... 14-22
14.2.4 Combination Flight-Manual (position stick) and Knobs ................... 14-22
14.2.5 Nav to Coordinate Flight Mode ................................ 14-22
14.2.6 Camera Guide Flight Mode .................................. 14-22
14.2.7 UAV Logic Flight Modes ................................... 14-23

PART Vii - PERFORMANCE DATA

CHAPTER 15 - PERFORMANCE DATA

15.1 STANDARD DATA ...................................... 15-l


15.1.1 Crosswind Components. .................................... 15- 1
15.1.2 Ambient Temperature vs. Altitude ............................... 15-2
15.1.3 Line-of-sight Altitude Calculations. .............................. 15-3

15.2 TAKEOFF DATA ....................................... 15-5


15.2.1 Takeoff Ground Run Distance Charts ............................. 15-5

ORIGINAL 12
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

Page
No.

15.3 CLIMB DATA ......................................... 15-9


15.3.1 Time to Climb. ......................................... 15-9
15.3.2 Distance Covered in Climb .................................. 15-10
15.3.3 Fuel Consumption in Climb .................................. 15-l 1

15.4 CRUISE DATA. ....................................... 15-12


15.4.1 Fuel Consumption in Cruise 173 kg. ............................. 15-12
15.4.2 Fuel Consumption in Cruise 191 kg. ............................. 15-13
15.4.3 Fuel Consumption in Cruise 200 kg. ............................. 15-14

15.5 EMERGENCY DATA .................................... 15-l 5


15.5.1 Stall Speeds .......................................... 15-15

23 ORIGINAL
Al-SRRPV-NFM-OOO

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Page
No.

CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Figure 1- 1. Pioneer Unmanned Aerial Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-2

CHAPTER 2 -THE AIR VEHICLE

Figure 2-1. Nose Landing Gear ....................................... 2-2

Figure 2-2. Arresting Hook. ........................................ 2-2

Figure 2-3. Wing Section .......................................... 2-3

Figure 2-4. UAV Electrical System. .................................... 2-5

Figure 2-5. Flight Control Sensors ..................................... 2-9

Figure 2-6. UAV Sensor Location ..................................... 2-9

Figure 2-7. UAV Communications .................................... 2-10

Figure 2-8. UAV Communications System ................................ 2-l 1

CHAPTER 3 -THE GROUND CONTROL STATION (GCS) AND THE TRACKING AND
COMMUNICATIONS UNIT (TCU)

Figure 3-1. GCS-S280 Shelter ....................................... 3-l

Figure 3-2. Pilot Control Bay (PBY) .................................... 3-2

Figure 3-3. Pilot Display Panel (PDP) ................................... 3-2

Figure 3-4. Warning Lights Panel. ..................................... 3-3

Figure 3-5. Warning Lights Table ..................................... 3-4

Figure 3-6. Pilot Control Desk (PCD) ................................... 3-9

Figure 3-7. Pilot Control Table (PCT) ................................... 3-l 3

Figure 3-8. Tracker Control Desk ..................................... 3-16

Figure 3-9. Observer Bay (OBY) ..................................... 3-19

Figure 3-10. Observer Video Control (OVC) ............................... 3-20

Figure 3-l 1. Alphanumeric Information on the OTMP .......................... 3-20

Figure 3-12. Graphic Display Field .................................... 3-22

Figure 3-13. VTR SONY EVO-9850 ................................... 3-23

Figure 3- 14. Observer Control Desk (OCD). ............................... 3-25

ORIGINAL I4
Page
No.

Figure 3-l 5. Observer Control Table ................................... 3-27

Figure3-16. TCU ............................................. 3-29

Figure 3-17. Communication and Tracking Subsystem, Block Diagram ................. 3-30

CHAPTER 4 -THE PORTABLE CONTROL STATION (PCS)

Figure 4-1. Portable Control Station (PCS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-l

CHAPTER 5 -THE PAYLdADS

Figure 5-l. MKD-200 Day Payload. .................................... 5-2

Figure 5-2. MKD-400 FLIR Payload .................................... 5-4

Figure 5-3. FLIR Reticules ......................................... 5-7

Figure 5-4. FLIR Alphanumeric Data. ................................... 5-8

CHAPTER 6 -THE REMOTE RECEIVING STATION (RRS)

Figure 6-1. Remote Receiving Station ................................... 6-l

Figure 6-2. RRS Main Unit Assembly ................................... 6-2

Figure 6-3. RRS Tracking Unit Assembly, Setup. ............................. 6-3

CHAPTER 7 - SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

Figure 7- 1. Launch Hazard Zones. ..................................... 7-3

Figure 7-2. Noise Hazard Zones ...................................... 74

CHAPTER 8 - INDOCTRINATION PROCEDURES

Figure 8-l. External Pilot Currency Chart, 60-day Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

CHAPTER 10 - SHORE-BASED PROCEDURES

Figure 1O-l. Pioneer RPV Exterior Inspection. .............................. 1O-7

Figure 1O-2. Commonly Used Test Points ................................ lo-27

Figure 10-3. Pioneer UAV FCF Checklist ................................ lo-34

CHAPTER 11 - SHIPBOARD PROCEDURES

Figure 1l-l. LPD4 Class UAV Installation. ............................... 1l-l

Figure 1l-2. Shipboard Pioneer Arrestment and Recovery System (SPARS) III Installation ...... 1l-7

Figure 1l-3. CIC UAV Operations Brief Sheet ............................. 1l-26

15 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

Page
No.

CHAPTER 12 - FLIGHT CHARACTERISTICS

Figure 12- 1. Typical Landing Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

CHAPTER 15 - PERFORMANCE DATA

Figure 15-l. Crosswind Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-l


Figure 15-2. Ambient Temperature vs. Altitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Figure 15-3. Line-of-sight Altitude Calculations ............................. 15-3

Figure 15-4. Pioneer Takeoff Distances .................................. 15-5

Figure 15-5. Takeoff Ground Run Distance (Weight = 420 lbs) ..................... 15-6

Figure 15-6. Takeoff Ground Run Distance (Weight = 440 lbs) ..................... 15-7

Figure 15-7. Takeoff Ground Run Distance (Weight = 460 lbs) ..................... 15-8

Figure 15-8. Time to Climb ........................................ 15-9

Figure 15-9. Distance Covered in Climb. ................................ 15-10

Figure 15-10. Fuel Consumption in Climb. ............................... 15-l 1

Figure 15-11. Fuel Consumption in Cruise 173 kg. ........................... 15-12

Figure 15-12. Fuel Consumption in Cruise 191 kg. ........................... 15-13

Figure 15-13. Fuel Consumption in Cruise 200 kg. ........................... 15-14

Figure 15-14. Stall Speeds ........................................ 15-15

16 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

RECORD OF CHANGES

Change No. and Date Crateof Entry Page Count Verified


of Change by (Signature)

I7 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL


Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

INTERIM CHANGE SUMMARY

The following Interim Changes have been canceled or previously incorporated in this manual:

INTERIM
CHANGE REMARKS/PURPOSE
NUMBER(S)

The following Interim Changes have been incorporated in this Change/Revision:

INTERIM
CHANGE REMARKS/PURPOSE
NUMBER(S)

interim changes outstanding - To be maintained by the custodian of this manual:

REMARKS/PURPOSE

19 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL


RAAUZYUW RUENAAA0606 0082014-UUUU--RUENCGU.
ZNR UUUUU
R 082014Z JAN 01 ZYB
FM CNO WASHINGTON DC//N789J//
TO ALL UAV COMMANDS
INFO RUCTPOH/NAVOPMEDINST PENSACOLA FL//06//
RHMFIUU/NAVOPMEDINST PENSACOLA FL//06//
BT
UNCLAS SECTION 01 OF 02
MSGID/GENADMIN/CNO N789J3//
SUBJ/INTERIM CHANGES TO PIONEER RQ-2A UAV NATOPS FLIGHT PUBLICATIONS
//
REF/A/DOC/NAVAIR/YMD:19991201//
REF/B/DOC/NAVAIR/YMD:19991201//
REF/C/MSG/CNO/081820ZSEP2000//
REF/D/MSG/CNO/231754ZOCT2000//
NARR/REF A IS NAVAIR A1-SRRPV-NFM-000 (PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV NATOPS
FLIGHT MANUAL (NFM). REF B IS NAVAIR A1-SRRPV-NFM-500 PIONEER
(RQ-2A) UAV NATOPS PILOTS POCKET CHECKLIST (PCL). REF C IS INTERIM
CHANGE (IC) 2 TO NA A1-SRRPV-NFM-500 (REF B). REF D IS IC 3 TO
A1-SRRPV-NFM-500 (REF B).//
RMKS/1. THIS IS IC NUMBER 3 TO REF A (PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV NFM), AND
IC NUMBER 4 TO REF B (PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV PCL).
2. SUMMARY. THIS IC MSG CORRECTS TITLE OF FLIGHT IDLE RPM LOW
EMERGENCY PROCEDURE IN REF B, AND CHANGES NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES
IN REFS A AND B TO REDUCE THE EFFECTS OF THERMAL STRESS ON THE ENGINE
AND TO MINIMIZE THE OCCURRENCE OF BIG-END-BEARING ENGINE SEIZURES AND
LOSS OF THE AIRCRAFT, WHICH HAS USUALLY OCCURRED DURING THE FIRST
TEN MINUTES OF A FLIGHT.
3. CHANGE REF A (PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV NFM), AS FOLLOWS:
A. CHAPTER 9, PAGE 9-3, PARAGRAPH 9.2.2 BRIEFING GUIDE, ITEM 3.D
INFLIGHT EMERGENCIES:
(1) DELETE: NA
(2) ADD (INSERT) TWO SUBITEMS:
"(1) ENGINE FAILURE
(2) FLIGHT CONTROL MALFUNCTIONS"
B. CHAPTER 10, PAGE 10-12, PARAGRAPH 10.7 STARTING ENGINE, AFTER
STEP 19:
(1) DELETE: N/A
(2) ADD (INSERT):
ENGINE OPERATION AT CONTINUOUS GROUND IDLE RPM SHOULD
BE LIMITED TO 5 MINUTES, AFTER WHICH ENGINE SPEED
SHOULD BE COMMANDED TO APPROX 6000 RPM FOR 10 SECONDS
BEFORE GRADUALLY RETARDING THE THROTTLE TO IDLE RPM
OVER A 5 TO 10 SECOND PERIOD. IF GROUND IDLE TIME
EXCEEDS 5 MINUTES, CYCLE THE ENGINE TO 6000 RPM AS
DESCRIBED ABOVE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. TOTAL GROUND
IDLE TIME SHOULD BE MINIMIZED SINCE PROLONGED ENGINE
OPERATION AT LOW IDLE SPEEDS PLACES UNDUE THERMAL
STRESS ON THE CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY.
WARNING
FAILURE TO MAKE GRADUAL (5 TO 10 SECOND DURATION)
THROTTLE REDUCTIONS FOLLOWING ENGINE RUN-UPS DURING
EXTENDED GROUND IDLE OPERATION CAN RESULT IN BIG-END
BEARING FAILURE AND ENGINE SEIZURE. AT NO TIME SHOULD
THE ENGINE THROTTLE BE ABRUPTLY REDUCED. ALL ENGINE
THROTTLE DECELERATIONS SHOULD BE PERFORMED GRADUALLY.
_______________________________________________________________________
CNO 082014Z JAN01 Page 1 of 3 NA A1-SRRPV-NFM-000 IC 3
NA A1-SRRPV-NFM-500 IC 4
C. CHAPTER 10, PAGE 10-14, PARAGRAPH 10.11 TAKEOFF/LAUNCH:
(1) DELETE: N/A
(2) ADD (INSERT) NEW STEPS JUST PRIOR TO STEP 2:
2. THROTTLE -- 6000 RPM FOR 10 SECONDS (EP)
3. THROTTLE -- GRADUALLY TO IDLE, RPM 3200-3500 (EP/IP)
4. CHT -- LESS THAN 190 DEGREES C (IP)
(3) RENUMBER OLD STEPS 2 THROUGH 12 AS NEW STEPS 5 THROUGH 15,
RESPECTIVELY.
(4) ADD (INSERT) AFTER NEW STEP 12, (THROTTLE -- MAX ABOVE 6700):
WARNING
FAILURE TO MAKE GRADUAL THROTTLE REDUCTIONS DURING
TAKEOFF/LAUNCH CAN RESULT IN BIG-END BEARING
FAILURE AND ENGINE SEIZURE.
D. CHAPTER 10, PAGE 10-15, PARAGRAPH 10.12.1 CLIMB OUT:
(1) DELETE: N/A
(2) ADD (INSERT) NEW STEPS AFTER STEP 1:
2. LEVEL AT 70 KIAS -- ESTABLISH (EP)
3. CHT -- STABLE FOR AT LEAST 2 MINUTES (IP)
(3) RENUMBER OLD STEPS 2 THROUGH 9 AS NEW STEPS 4 THROUGH 11,
RESPECTIVELY.
(4) ADD (INSERT) WARNING AFTER NEW STEP 10 (STATION TRANSFER --
AS REQ):
WARNING
FAILURE TO GRADUALLY REDUCE THROTTLE MAY RESULT IN
ENGINE SEIZURE (BIG-END BEARING FAILURE), ESPECIALLY
AFTER PROLONGED OPERATION AT GROUND IDLE. MOST OF
THESE ENGINE FAILURES HAVE OCCURRED WITHIN THE FIRST 10
MINUTES AFTER TAKEOFF.
4. CHANGE REF B (PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV PCL), AS FOLLOWS:
A. PAGE 25, FLIGHT IDLE RPM LOW (ADDED BY IC 3 (REF D)), IN EMERGENCY
PROCEDURE TITLE:
(1) DELETE: "(BELOW 3500 RPM)"
(2) ADD "(BELOW 3800 RPM)" SO TITLE READS:
FLIGHT IDLE LOW RPM (BELOW 3800 RPM)
B. PAGE 90, STARTING ENGINE CHECKLIST:
(1) DELETE: N/A
(2) ADD (INSERT) PRIOR TO STEP 1:
ENGINE OPERATION AT CONTINUOUS GROUND IDLE RPM SHOULD
BE LIMITED TO 5 MINUTES, AFTER WHICH ENGINE SPEED
SHOULD BE COMMANDED TO APPROX 6000 RPM FOR 10 SECONDS
BEFORE GRADUALLY RETARDING THE THROTTLE TO IDLE RPM
OVER A 5 TO 10 SECOND PERIOD. IF GROUND IDLE TIME
EXCEEDS 5 MINUTES, CYCLE THE ENGINE TO 6000 RPM AS
DESCRIBED ABOVE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.
(3) ADD (INSERT) AFTER STEP 19 (THROTTLE -- IDLE):
WARNING
FAILURE TO MAKE GRADUAL (5 TO 10 SECOND DURATION)
THROTTLE REDUCTIONS FOLLOWING ENGINE RUN-UPS DURING
EXTENDED GROUND IDLE OPERATION CAN RESULT IN BIG-END
BEARING FAILURE AND ENGINE SEIZURE. AT NO TIME SHOULD
THE ENGINE THROTTLE BE ABRUPTLY REDUCED. ALL ENGINE
THROTTLE DECELERATIONS SHOULD BE PERFORMED GRADUALLY.
C. PAGE 94, TAKEOFF/LAUNCH CHECKLIST, JUST PRIOR TO STEP 2:
(1) DELETE: NA
(2) ADD (INSERT) NEW STEPS:
2. THROTTLE -- 6000 RPM FOR 10 SECONDS (EP)
3. IDLE RPM (3200-3500) -- CHECK (EP/IP)
_______________________________________________________________________
CNO 082014Z JAN01 Page 2 of 3 NA A1-SRRPV-NFM-000 IC 3
NA A1-SRRPV-NFM-500 IC 4
4. CHT (LESS THAN 190 C DEGREES) -- CHECK (IP)
(3) RENUMBER OLD STEPS 2 THROUGH 12 AS NEW STEPS 5 THROUGH 15,
RESPECTIVELY.
(4) ADD (INSERT) NEW WARNING AFTER NEW STEP 12:
WARNING
FAILURE TO MAKE GRADUAL THROTTLE REDUCTIONS DURING
TAKEOFF/LAUNCH CAN RESULT IN BIG-END BEARING
FAILURE AND ENGINE SEIZURE.
D. PAGE 95, CLIMB OUT CHECKLIST (WITH IC 2 (REF C) INCORPORATED),
AFTER STEP 1:
(1) DELETE: N/A
(2) ADD (INSERT) NEW STEPS AFTER STEP 1:
2. LEVEL AT 70 KIAS -- ESTABLISH (EP)
3. CHT -- STABLE FOR AT LEAST 2 MINUTES (IP)
(3) RENUMBER OLD STEPS 2 THROUGH 9 AS NEW STEPS 4 THROUGH 11,
RESPECTIVELY.
(4) ADD (INSERT) WARNING AFTER NEW STEP 10 (STATION TRANSFER --
AS REQ):
WARNING
FAILURE TO GRADUALLY REDUCE THROTTLE MAY RESULT IN
ENGINE SEIZURE (BIG-END BEARING FAILURE), ESPECIALLY
AFTER PROLONGED OPERATION AT GROUND IDLE. MOST OF
THESE ENGINE FAILURES HAVE OCCURRED WITHIN THE FIRST 10
MINUTES AFTER TAKEOFF.
5. VC-6 DET PAX POC IS PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV NATOPS PROGRAM MANAGER LT
KENNETH PORTER, DSN 342-8374 OR COMM 301-862-8374, EMAIL PORTERKA@
NAVAIR.NAVY.MIL. NAVAIR POC IS LCDR DEAN PETERS, UAV CLASS DESK,
DSN 757-5822 OR COMM (301)757-5822, EMAIL PETERSGD@NAVAIR.NAVY.MIL./
//
BT

_______________________________________________________________________
CNO 082014Z JAN01 Page 3 of 3 NA A1-SRRPV-NFM-000 IC 3
NA A1-SRRPV-NFM-500 IC 4
RAAUZYUW RUENAAA0221 2971718-UUUU--RUENNSN.
ZNR UUUUU
R 231754Z OCT 00 ZYB
FM CNO WASHINGTON DC//N889J//
TO ALL UAV COMMANDS
INFO RUCTPOH/NAVOPMEDINST PENSACOLA FL//06//
BT
UNCLAS
MSGID/GENADMIN/N889J//
SUBJ/INTERIM CHANGES TO PIONEER UAV NATOPS FLIGHT PUBLICATIONS//
REF/A/DOC/NAVAIR/YMD:19991201//
REF/B/DOC/NAVAIR/YMD:19991201//
NARR/REF A IS NAVAIR A1-SRRPV-NFM-000 ((RQ-2A) PIONEER UAV NATOPS
FLIGHT MANUAL (NFM). REF B IS NAVAIR A1-SRRPV-NFM-500 (RQ-2A)
PIONEER UAV NATOPS PILOTS POCKET CHECKLIST (PCL).//
RMKS/1. THIS IS IC NUMBER 2 TO REF A (PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV NFM), AND
IC NUMBER 3 TO REF B (PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV PCL).
2. SUMMARY. THIS IC MSG ADDS AN EMERGENCY PROCEDURE FOR A LOW
FLIGHT IDLE RPM CONDITION, TO BE FOLLOWED WHEN ENGINE RPM DROPS
BELOW 3800 RPM AND PRECLUDE TERMINATION OF THE MISSION AND POSSIBLE
LOSS OF THE UAV.
3. CHANGE REF A (PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV NFM), CHAPTER 13, PAGE 13-6,
AFTER PARAGRAPH 13.3.5:
A. DELETE: N/A
B. ADD (INSERT) NEW EMERGENCY PROCEDURE PARAGRAPH, WITH THE FIRST
FOUR STEPS AS MEMORY ITEMS:
13.3.6 FLIGHT IDLE RPM LOW (BELOW 3800 RPM)
*1. STICK THROTTLE -- SELECT (IP/EP)
*2. THROTTLE -- INCREASE TO WOT (IP/EP)
CAUTION
THROTTLE INCREASE TO WOT SHOULD BE GRADUAL. A SUDDEN
THROTTLE INCREASE WILL MOST LIKELY STALL THE ENGINE.
AVOID ABRUPT THROTTLE MOVEMENTS.
*3. RPM ADJUST -- MAINTAIN ABOVE 5000 RPM (IP/EP)
IF ENGINE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THROTTLE INCREASES:
*4. THROTTLE -- GRADUALLY CYCLE BETWEEN 1/2 THROTTLE AND WOT
(IP/EP)
CAUTION
ABRUPT THROTTLE MOVEMENTS MAY CAUSE ENGINE TO STALL.
5. ELECTRICAL LOAD -- MINIMIZE AS NECESSARY (IP)
NOTE
EXCESSIVE ELECTRICAL LOAD ON THE GENERATOR WILL REDUCE
ENGINE SPEED AND POTENTIALLY CAUSE ENGINE STOPPAGE.
6. LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE (ALL).
4. CHANGE REF B (PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV PCL), PAGE PG 25, AFTER HIGH
FUEL CONSUMPTION EMERGENCY PROCEDURE:
A. DELETE: N/A
B. ADD (INSERT) NEW EMERGENCY PROCEDURE, WITH THE FIRST FOUR STEPS
AS MEMORY ITEMS:
FLIGHT IDLE RPM LOW (BELOW 3500 RPM)
*1. STICK THROTTLE -- SELECT (IP/EP)
*2. THROTTLE -- INCREASE TO WOT (IP/EP)
CAUTION
THROTTLE INCREASE TO WOT SHOULD BE GRADUAL. A SUDDEN
THROTTLE INCREASE WILL MOST LIKELY STALL THE ENGINE.
AVOID ABRUPT THROTTLE MOVEMENTS.
*3. RPM ADJUST -- MAINTAIN ABOVE 5000 RPM (IP/EP)
_______________________________________________________________________
CNO 231754Z OCT00 Page 1 of 2 NA A1-SRRPV-NFM-000 IC 2
NA A1-SRRPV-NFM-500 IC 3
IF ENGINE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THROTTLE INCREASES:
*4. THROTTLE -- GRADUALLY CYCLE BETWEEN 1/2 THROTTLE AND WOT
(IP/EP)
CAUTION
ABRUPT THROTTLE MOVEMENTS MAY CAUSE ENGINE TO STALL.
5. ELECTRICAL LOAD -- MINIMIZE AS NECESSARY (IP)
NOTE
EXCESSIVE ELECTRICAL LOAD ON THE GENERATOR WILL REDUCE
ENGINE SPEED AND POTENTIALLY CAUSE ENGINE STOPPAGE.
6. LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE (ALL)
5. VC-6 DET PAX POC IS PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV NATOPS PROGRAM LT KENNETH
PORTER, DSN 342-8374 OR COMM 301-862-8374, EMAIL PORTERKM@NAVAIR.NAVY.
MIL. //
BT

_______________________________________________________________________
CNO 231754Z OCT00 Page 2 of 2 NA A1-SRRPV-NFM-000 IC 2
NA A1-SRRPV-NFM-500 IC 3
PAAUZYUW RUENAAA4634 1681750-UUUU--RUENNSN.
ZNR UUUUU
P R 161740Z JUN 00 ZYB
FM CNO WASHINGTON DC//N889//
TO ALL UAV COMMANDS
INFO RUCTPOH/NAVOPMEDINST PENSACOLA FL//06//
RUDJABF/NAVWARCOL NEWPORT RI//213//
BT
UNCLAS //N03711//
MSGID/GENADMIN/N889//
SUBJ/INTERIM CHANGES TO PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV NATOPS FLIGHT
/PUBLICATIONS//
REF/A/DOC/NAVAIR/01DEC99//
REF/B/DOC/NAVAIR/01DEC99//
REF/C/LTR/VC-6/14SEP99//
NARR/ REF A IS NAVAIR A1-SRRPV-NFM-000 (PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV NATOPS
FLIGHT MANUAL (NFM)). REF B IS NAVAIR A1-SRRPV-NFM-500 (PIONEER
(RQ-2A) UAV NATOPS POCKET CHECKLIST (PCL)). REF C IS VC-6 LTR 3711
SER 00/0411 OF 14SEP99; SUBJ:URGENT CHANGE RECOMMENDATION TO PIONEER
NATOPS FLIGHT PUBLICATIONS.//
RMKS/1. THIS IS INTERIM CHANGE NUMBER 1 TO REF A (PIONEER (RQ-2A)
UAV NFM), AND INTERIM CHANGE NUMBER 1 TO REF B (PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV
PCL).
2. SUMMARY. ADDS 12DS PAYLOAD INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES INTO REF A
NFM AND REF B PCL.
3. CHANGE REF A (PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV NFM), AS RECOMENDED IN REF C
ENCL (1).
4. CHANGE REF B (PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV PCL), AS RECOMENDED IN REF C
ENCL (2). THE INTERIM CHANGE SUMMARY PAGE IS MISSING IN REF B, BUT
IS BEING PREPARED AND, WHEN AVAILABLE, WILL BE INSERTED INTO THE COPY
OF REF B POSTED ON THE NATEC SITE FOR LOCAL REPRODUCTION AND
INCORPORATION INTO REF B PAPER COPIES.
5. REFS A AND B ARE POSTED ON THE NATEC WEB SITE, WWW.NATEC.NAVY.MIL.
REF C WAS DISTRIBUTED TO PIONEER (RQ-2A) UAV UNITS AND RELATED NATOPS
ADVISORY GROUP MEMBERS. IF REF C REQUIRED, CONTACT VC-6 NATOPS
PROGRAM MANAGER, LCDR BILL GALLAGHER, AT DSN 342-3512 EXTN 8219, COMM
(301)862-8219, FAX (301)862-8090, OR EMAIL GALLAGHERWP@NAVAIR.NAVY.
MIL.//
BT

_______________________________________________________________________
CNO 161740Z JUN00 Page 1 of 1 A1-SRRPV-NFM-000 IC 1
A1-SRRPV-NFM-500 IC 1
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

LIST OF ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS


A COHU. Name of camera control manufacturer.

WC. Aircraft. COMNAVAIRLANT. Commander Naval Air Forces,


U.S. Atlantic Fleet.
AAA. Anti-Aircraft Artillery.
COMNAVAIRPAC. Commander Naval Air Forces,
AC. Alternating Current. U.S. Pacific Fleet.

ADB. Aircraft Discrepancy Book. CONUS. Continental United States.

AGL. Above Ground Level. CPA. Central Processing Assembly.

AH. Amp Hours. CRT. Cathode Ray Tube.

APE. Autopilot. CTS. Communications and Tracking Sub-system.

ATA. Airport Trafftc Area. D

ATU. Airspeed Transducer Unit. DASC. Direct Air Support Center.

AUX. Auxiliary. DC. Direct Current.

6 DNL. Downlink.

BDA. Battle Damage Assessment. DOD. Department of Defense.

BEU. Battery Emergency Unit. DUTC. Department of Defense UAV Training Center

BITE. Built-in-Test Equipment. E

BPU. Barometric Pressure Unit. EDC. Encoder/Decoder.

C EDU. Encoder/Decoder Unit.

C3. Command, Control, and Communications. El. Engineering Investigation.

CAS. Close Air Support. ELOS. Electronic Line-of sight.

CBX. Co-pilot Box. EO. Electra Optic.

CBY. Communications Bay. EOD. Explosive Ordnance Disposal.

CCB. Configuration Control Board. EP. External Pilot.

CDL Collateral Duty Inspector. EPS. Electrical Power Supply.

CFA. Cognizant Field Activity. ERC. Engine RPM/Cut-off.

CHT. Cylinder Head Temperature. ESS. Essential Bus.

CO. Commanding Offtcer. ETC. Engine Thermocouple.

21 ORIGINAL
ETH. Engine Thermocouple Harness. IFF. Identification Friend or Foe.

F IMA. Intermediate Maintenance Activity.

FAA. Federal Aviation Administration. IP. Internal Pilot.

FAC. Forward Air Controller. IPB. Illustrated Parts Breakdown.

FAR. Federal Aviation Regulations. IR. Infrared.

FCS. Flight Control System. K

FEB. FLIR Electronic Box. KHZ. Kilohertz.

FEBA. Forward Edge Battle Area. L

FLECOMPRON. Fleet Composite Squadron. LCU. Light Control Unit.

FLIP. Flight Information Publication. LHA. Amphibious Assault Ship.

FLIR. Forward Looking Infrared. LPD. Amphibious Transport Dock.

FM. Frequency Modulation. LRU. Line Replaceable Unit.

FMC. Full Mission Capable. LST. Landing Ship Tank.

FOV. Field of View. All

FVU. Flux Valve Unit. MAF. Maintenance Action Form.

G MAGTF. Marine Air Ground Task Force.

GCS. Ground Control Station. MC. Mission Commander.

GEN. Generator Electrical Unit. MCAS. Marine Corps Air Station.

GHZ. Giga Hertz. MCAT. Micro Processor Controlled Auto-Tracking


Unit.
GMT, Greenwich Mean Time.
MDA. Minimum Descent Altitude.
GPS. Global Positioning System.
MHZ. Megahertz.
H
MKD-200. Day Video Camera.
HAA. Height Above Airport.
MKD-400. IR Sensor.
HF. High Frequency.
MMF. Mobile Maintenance Facility.
HMMVVV. Highly Mobile, Multi-purpose Wheeled
Vehicle. MOA. Military Operating Area.

I MOCA. Minimum Obstacle Clearance Altitude.

IAS Indicated Air Speed. MOS. Military Occupational Specialty.

ICP. Inventory Control Point. MRC. Maintenance Requirements Card.

ORIGINAL 22
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

MS. Milliseconds. PDP. Pilot Display Panel.

MSL. Mean Sea Level. PEB. Payload Electronic Box.

MUA. Main Unit Assembly. PLE. Prudent Limit of Endurance.

N PLP. Plotter Panel.

NAF. Naval Air Facility. PMC. Partial Mission Capable (M)-Maintenance,


(S)-SUPPlY.
NAVAIRSYSCOM. Naval Air Systems Command.
PO. Payload Operator.
NCC. Navigation Circuit Card.
PSA. Power Supply Assembly.
NESS. Non-Essential Bus.
PSU. Power Supply Unit.
NGF. Naval Guntire.
PTMP. Pilot Television Monitor Panel.
NMC. Not Mission Capable (M)-Maintenance,
(S)-SUPPlY. Q

NOTAM. Notice to Airmen. QA. Quality Assurance.

NVC. Navigation Card. QAR. Quality Assurance Representative.

NWS. Nose Wheel Steering. QDR. Quality Deficiency Report.

0 R

OBY. Observer Bay. RATO. Rocket Assisted Take Off.

OCD. Observer Control Desk. RC. Radio Controlled.

OCT. Observer Control Table. REU. Regulator Electrical Unit.

OTMP. Observer Television Monitor Panel. RF. Radio Frequency.

ovc. Observer Video Control. RFI. Ready For Issue.

P RGU. Rate Gyro Unit.

PBX. Pilot (IP) Control Box. RH. Return Home.

PBY. Pilot Control Bay. RPV. Remotely Piloted Vehicle.

PCD. Pilot Control Desk. RRS. Remote Receiving Station.

PCL. Pocket Check List. RSO. Range Safety Offtcer.

PCS. Portable Control Station. RSTA. Reconnaissance, Surveillance, Target Acqui-


sition.
PCT. Pilot Control Table.
RTB. Return to Base.
PCU. Power Supply Unit.

PDOP. Positional Dilution of Precision.

23 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

S U

SAL. Servo Aileron Left. UAV. Unmanned Aerial Vehicle.

SAR. Servo Aileron Right. UHF. Ultra-High Frequency.

SAR. Search and Rescue. UPL. Uplink.

SBX. Student Control Box. UTM. Universal Transverse Mercator.

SEP. Shelter Electrical Power. V

SEU. Servo Elevator Unit. VC. Fleet Composite Squadron.

SFCP. Shore Fire Control Party. VFR. Visual Flight Rules.

SMP. System Monitor and Processor. VGU. Vertical Gyro Unit.

SNR. Signal-to-Noise Ratio. VHF. Very High Frequency.

SPISP. Spread Spectrum. VIDSIMAF. Visual Information Display System/


Maintenance Action Form.
SPARS. Shipboard Pioneer Arresting Recovery Sys-
tem. VMC. Visual Meteorological Conditions.

SR. Short Range. VP.P. Volts Peak to Peak.

SRU. Servo Rudder Assembly. VSI. Vertical Speed Indicator.

SSA. Single Step Advance. VTR. Video Tape Recorder.

SWU. Servo Wheel Unit.

STU. Servo Throttle Unit.


T

TAC(A). Tactical Air Controller (Airborne).

TACAIR. Tactical Aircraft.

TACRON. Tactical Air Traffic Control Squadron.

TBY. Tracking Bay.

TCD. Tracker Control Desk.

TCU. Tracking and Communications Unit.

TM. Telemetry Data.

TPDR. Technical Publication Deficiency Report.

TUA. Tracking Unit Assembly.

ORIGINAL 24
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

PREFACE

SCOPE

The NATOPS flight manual is issued by the author- NAVAIR Al-SRRPV-GCS-520; PIONEER Re-
ity of the Chief of Naval Operations and under the direc- motely Piloted Vehicle (RPV) System Ground Con-
tion of Commander, Naval Air Systems Command in trol Station Illustrated Parts Breakdown
conjunction with the naval air training and operating
procedures standardization (NATOPS) program. This NAVAIR Al SRRPV-PCS-700; PIONEER Re-
manual contains information on all Pioneer systems, motely Piloted Vehicle (RPV) System Portable Con-
performance data, and operating procedures required trol System (PCS-2000) S-250 Shelter Configuration
for safe and effective operations. However, it is not a Operation Manual
substitute for sound judgment. Compound emergen-
cies, available facilities, adverse weather or terrain, or NAVAIR A 1SRRPV-PCS-7 10; PIONEER Re-
considerations affecting the lives and property of others motely Piloted Vehicle (RPV) System Portable Con-
may require modification of the procedures contained trol System (PCS-2000) S-250 Shelter Configuration
herein. Read this manual from cover to cover. Its your Organizational Maintenance Manual with Illustrated
responsibility to have a complete knowledge of its Parts Breakdown
contents.
NAVAIR A 1SRRPV-LAU-800; PIONEER Re-
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS motely Piloted Vehicle (RPV) System Launcher Op-
eration and Organizational Maintenance with
The following applicable publications complement Illustrated Parts Breakdown
this manual:
NAVAIR A 1-SRRPV-RATO-820; PIONEER Re-
Al-RQ2A-NFM-900 Aircrew Pocket Checklist motely Piloted Vehicle (RPV) Rocket Assisted
Takeoff (RATO) Launcher System Operation and
NAVAIR A 1-SRRPV-SDM-000; PIONEER RlV Organizational Maintenance Manual with Illustrated
System Description Manual Parts Breakdown

NAVAIR A 1-SRRPV-OPS- 100; PIONEER Re- NAVAIR Al -SRRPV-SRP-850; Stabilized Recon-


motely Piloted Vehicle (RPV) System RPV Opera- naissance Payload (MKD 200) Operation and Main-
tion Manual tenance with Illustrated Parts Breakdown

NAVAIR Al -SRRPV-MMI-200; PIONEER Re- NAVAIR A 1SRRPV-SRP-860; Stabilized Recon-


motely Piloted Vehicle (RPV) System RPV Organi- naissance Payload for Day/Night Operation
zational Maintenance with Illustrated Parts (MKD-400) Operation and Maintenance with Illus-
Breakdown trated Parts Breakdown

NAVAIR A 1SRRPV-EWD-300; PIONEER RPV NAVAIR A 1-SRRPV-RRS-900; PIONEER Re-


Electrical Wiring Diagrams motely Piloted Vehicle (RPV) System Remote Re-
ceiving Station (RRS) Operation and Organizational
NAVAIR Al SRRPV-WAB-400; PIONEER RPV Maintenance Manual with Illustrated Parts
Weight and Balance Manual Breakdown

NAVAIR A 1-SRRPV-GCS-500; PIONEER Re- NAVAIR A 1-SRRPV-GSE-960; PIONEER Re-


motely Piloted Vehicle (RPV) System Ground Con- motely Piloted Vehicle (RPV) System Ground Sup-
trol Station (GCS-2000) Operation Manual port Equipment Catalog

NAVAIR A 1-SRRPV-GCS-5 10; PIONEER Re- NAVAIR A I-SRRPV-SSM-970; PIONEER Re-


motely Piloted Vehicle (RPV) System Ground Con- motely Piloted Vehicle (RPV) System Supplemental
trol Station (GCS-2000) Maintenance Manual Manual for the Shipboard Short Range Remotely Pi-
loted Vehicle (SR-RPV)

25 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

HOW TO GET COPIES CHANGE RECOMMENDATIONS

One-Time Orders Recommended changes to this manual or other


NATOPS publications may be submitted by anyone in
If this publication is needed on a one-time basis accordance with the current OPNAVINST 3710.7.
(without future updates), order it from stock by sending
an electronic DD 1348 requisition in accordance with Routine change recommendations are submitted di-
NAVSUP Publication 2002 on NAVSUP Publication rectly to the model manager on OPNAV 37 1O/6 (4-90)
600 (Naval Library) CD-ROM disk. shown on the next page. The addressof the model man-
ager of this unmanned aerial vehicle is:
Automatic Distribution (With Updates)
COMMANDING OFFICER
This publication and changes to it are automatically FLEET COMPOSITE SQUADRON SIX
sent of activities that are established on the Automatic 1224 POCAHONTAS STREET
Distribution Requirements List (ADRL) maintained by NAS NORFOLK, VIRGINIA 235 1l-24 14
Naval Air Technical Services Facility OIJAVAIRTECH-
SERVRAC), Philadelphia, PA. If there is a continuing Change recommendations of an URGENT nature
need for this publication, each activitys Central Tech- (safety of flight, etc.) should be submitted directly to the
nical Publication Librarian must send a revised ADRL NATOPS advisory group member in the chain of com-
report on floppy disk to NAVAIRTECHSERVRAC. If mand by priority message.
an activity does not have a library, then send a letter to
the Commanding Officer, NAVAIRTECHSERVRAC, YOUR RESPONSIBILITY
Attn: Code 25 1,700 Robbins Avenue, Philadelphia, PA
19111 requesting assignment of a distribution account NATOPS flight manuals are kept current through an
number (if necessary) and automatic mailing of future active manual change program. Any corrections, addi-
issues of the publication needed. tions, or constructive suggestions for improvement of
its content should be submitted by routine or urgent
Note change recommendation, as appropriate, at once.

The ADRL floppy disk can be used only to NATOPS FLIGHT MANUAL INTERIM
place an activity on the mailing list for auto- CHANGES
matic distribution of future issues ofthe pub-
lications. It cannot be used to make one-time Flight manual interim changes are changes or cor-
orders of publications from current stock. rections to the NATOPS flight manuals promulgated by
To get publications from stock, see One- CNO or NAVAIRSYSCOM. Interim changes are is-
Time Orders above. sued either as printed pages or as a naval message. The
interim change summary page is provided as a record of
Once established on automatic distribution for this all interim changes. Upon receipt of a change or revi-
or any other NAVAIR technical publication, an activity sion, the custodian of the manual should check the up-
must submit an ADRL report on floppy disk at least dated interim change summary to ascertain that all
once every 12 months to update or confirm their auto- outstanding interim changes have been either incorpo-
matic distribution requirements. rated or canceled; those not incorporated shall be re-
corded as outstanding in the section provided.
Note
CHANGE SYMBOLS
Activities not submitting an ADRL report on
floppy disk for more than 12 months may be Revised text is indicated by a black vertical line in ei-
dropped from distribution of all NAVAIR ther margin of the page, adjacent to the affected text,
technical publications. like the one printed next to this paragraph. The change
symbol identifies the addition of new information, a
UPDATING THE MANUAL changed procedure, the correction of an error, or a re-
phrasing of material. I
To ensure that the manual contains the latest proce-
dures and information, NATOPS review conferences
are held in accordance with the current OPNAVINST
3710.7.

ORIGINAL 26
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES WORDING

The following definitions apply to WARNINGS, The concept of word usage and intended meaning
CAUTIONS, and Notes found throughout the which has been adhered to in preparing this Manual is as
manual. follows:

Shall has been used only when application of a pro-


cedure is mandatory.
[ WARNING 1
Should has been used only when application of a
procedure is recommended.
An operating procedure, practice, or condi-
tion, etc., which may result in injury or death May and need not have been used only when ap-
if not carefully observed or followed. plication of a procedure is optional.

Will has been used only to indicate futurity, never


to indicate any degree of requirement for application
of a procedure.

An operating procedure, practice, or condi-


tion, etc., which may result in damage to
equipment if not carefully observed or
followed.

Note

An operating procedure, practice, or condi-


tion, etc., that is essential to emphasize.

27 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

NATOPQ-TACTICAL CHANGE RECOMMENDATION


OPNAV 3710/6 (4-90) S/N 0107-LF-009-7900 DATE

TO BE FILLED IN BY ORIGINATOR AND FORWARDED TO MODEL MANAGER

FROM (Originator) Unit

TO (Model Manager) Unit

Complete Name of Manual/Checklist Revision Date Change Date Section/Chapter Page Paragraph

Recommendation (be specific)

q CHECK IF CONTINUED ON BACK

Justification

Signature Rank Title

Address of Unit or Command


-- ---- -
TO BE FILLED IN BY MODEL MANAGER (Return to Originator)

FROM DATE

TO

REFERENCE
(a) Your Change Recommendation Dated

Your change recommendation dated is acknowledged. It will be held for action of

[7 the review conference planned for to be held at

Your change recommendation is reclassified URGENT and forwarded for approval to

by my DTG
cl

ISI MODEL MANAGER AIRCRAFT

ORIGINAL 28
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

PART 1

The Pioneer System

Chapter l-General Description

Chapter 2-The Air Vehicle

Chapter 3-The Ground Control Station (GCS) and Tracking and


Communication Unit (TCU)

Chapter 4-The Portable Control Station

Chapter 5-The Payloads

Chapter 6-The Remote Receiving Station (RRS)

Chapter 7-System Limitations

29 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL


Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

CHAPTER 1

General Description

1.1 THE UNMANNED AERIAL VEHICLE UAV (PIONEER)


2. Artillery Targeting

3. Control of Air Support


1.1.1 General. The Pioneer UAV surveillance sys-
tem consists ofan Unmanned Aerial Vehicle (UAV) that 4. Battle Damage Assessment
is either controlled by a control station or is pro-
grammed to fly independently under control of its auto- 5. Search and Rescue.
pilot. The miniature, fixed, high-wing aircraft is used
for reconnaissance, surveillance, target acquisition, fire 1.1.4 Principal Dimensions
support adjustment, and battle damage assessment.
Driven by a pusher propeller, the aircraft relays video Wingspan .................................................. .16.9 feet
and/or telemetry information from its payload to the Length ........................................................ .14.0 feet
Ground Control Station (GCS) and/or Portable Control Height ........................................................... .3.3 feet
Station (PCS) in real time. More than one control station
may be used to either increasethe UAVs effective range 1.1.5 Performance
or to control more than one UAV. The Ground Control
Station (GCS-2000) is contained in either an S-250 Service ceiling.. .......................................... .12,000 fi
shelter or an S-280 shelter. When installed aboard ship, Maximum altitude ...................................... .15,000 A
the GCS is housed in a mobile maintenance facility Max endurance.................................................. .5 I-us
(MMF). The PCS, which does not require a shelter, is Maxrange.. ................................................... .185km
housed in an S-250 shelter. Engine ........................................................ .26 hpwr
Fuel ................................. ..AVGA S (94- 100 Octane)
1.1.2 Crew Required. The GCS-2000 in the S-250 Cruise speed.................................................... .65 kts
shelter configuration or the MMF when aboard ship, is Max speed ..................................................... .I 10 kts
manned by a crew of three: a Mission Commander, an
Internal Pilot, and a Payload Operator. The GCS-2000 1.1.6 Weights
in the S-280 shelter is manned by a crew of four: a Mis-
sion Commander, an Internal Pilot, a Payload Operator, UAV (empty) ...................................... .276 lb/l 25 kg
and an Intelligence Analyst to operate the Intel Bay. In Payload (max) ......................................... .75 lb/34 kg
either configuration an External Pilot is required to fly Fuel (full tank). ........................................ .67 lb/30 kg
the aircraft during takeoffs and recoveries. Max Takeoff ....................................... .452 lb/205 kg

1.1.3 Mission Capability. The Pioneer UAV sys- 1.1.7 Launch and Recovery
tem performs a wide variety of reconnaissance, intelli-
gence, and special missions. Strategic or tactically vital Rolling takeoff (min) ................................ 2 10 meters
data may be obtained cost-effectively by exploiting the Pneumatic launch ...................................... .2 1 meters
UAVs low radar cross section, low IR signature, and re- Rocket Assisted Takeoff (RATO). .......................... .O
mote control versatility. Arrested recovery.. .................................. .130 meters
(short field) .......................................... ..70 meters
Typical real time missions performed by Pioneer Shipboard Net Recovery.. ........................................ .
include:

1. Battlefield Reconnaissance and Observation

l-l ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

I4 WINGSPAN .I
I 16.9 FT I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I I
I <.I I
I I. I
I

.
LENGTH
14.0 FT

Figure 1- 1. Pioneer Unmanned Aerial Vehicle

ORIGINAL l-2
CHAPTER 2

The Air Vehicle

2.1 UNMANNED AERIAL VEHICLE (UAV) Airspeed Transducer Unit (ATU), and the Barometric
Pressure Unit (BPU). The white nose position light is
The UAV is a remote or independently self-controlled installed on the lower side of the nose cover.
high wing light air vehicle. The air vehicle is divided
into 5 subsystems: Front Compartment (Electronics and Payload Com-
partments) (stations -390 to 741). This compartment
1. Airframe contains the Central Processing Assembly (CPA),
Servo Wheel Unit (SWU), the C-band receiver, the RF
2. Electrical System head, the 28-volt/l5+olt converter, the stabilized plat-
form with its control unit(s), the Identification Friend or
3. Electronic System Foe (IFF) transponder unit and strobe light power sup-
ply (installed on the underside of the main access
4. Payload cover), the C-band and IFF transponder antennas (at-
tached to the top side of the main access cover), acceler-
5. Communications. ometers, and a circular opening on the underside of the
compartment permitting installation of the payload. A
2.1.1 UAV Airframe white flashing strobe light, located on the main cover, is
used to facilitate tracking the UAV by helicopter or light
2.1.1.1 Fuselage. The electronic and navigation plane.
units, power unit and servos, etc., are housed in various
compartments in the fuselage. The payload is housed in 2.1 .l .1.2 Mid Section. This section consists of one
the UAVs mid section and is covered with a transparent compartment (stations 741 to 1143) occupied by the
canopy. The fuselage is of fiberglass construction with fuel tank. A fuel drain valve is located at the bottom of
four bulkheads located at stations -390, 741, 1142, and the compartment. Four wing-attaching brackets are on
1553. (Stations are identified by distance, in millime- the upper part of the compartment. On each side of the
ters, fore (minus) and aft (plus) as measured from the compartment, a cable cover protects the wiring path be-
center of gravity.) The fuselage skin is made of fiber- tween the fore and after sections.
glass, except for the main access panel, which is made
of a composite material (honeycomb/fiberglass), and 2.1 .I .I .3 Rear Section. Rear Compartment (sta-
the nose cover, which is made of KYDEX. The propul- tions 1141 to 1553). This section houses the vertical
sion unit is mounted on the rear fuselage bulkhead (sta- gyro unit (VGU), the yaw rate gyro unit (RGU), the
tion 1553) and drives a pusher-type propeller. There are electric fuel pump and filter, the electronic power sup-
two hinged engine cowlings with quick-release fasten- ply (EPS), the C-band diplexer (DCU), the C-band
ers. These are perforated and coated with fiberglass. power unit (PCU), and its associated 28V/12V con-
The fuselage is divided into the following: verter, the video transmitter, engine trap counter, and
the UHF receiver. The side panels provide accessto the
1. Fore section units.

2. Mid section Engine Compartment (station 1553). This section


and the fire wall house the engine thermocouple and
3. Rear section. harness (ETC and ETH), the engine RPM cutoff (ERC),
the servo throttle unit (STU), and the engine buildup.
2.1 .l .l .l Fore Section. Nose Compartment (sta- On the right panel of the engine compartment, accessis
tion -390). This compartment houses the nose steering provided through a spring-loaded cover (door) to input
mechanism, the Light Control Unit (LCU), the heated air to the engine before startup in cold weather.

2-I ORIGINAL
AI -SRRPV-NFM-000

2.1 .I .2 Landing and Launcher Gear. The land-


ing gear consists of a non-retractable tricycle gear with a
steerable nosewheel and an arresting hook. The pneu-
matic launcher gear is made up of four catapult guides
and a belt catch-release mechanism. RAT0 launching
brackets are provided on the arresting hook mounting
bracket and on the belly plate in the atI of the aircraft
near the fuel vent.

2.1 .1.2.1 Nose Landing Gear (Figure 2-l). The


Nose Landing Gear consists of a fork, upper arm, and
two tension springs and wheel assembly. The wheel is - _
...._
rubber-rimmed and steered by an arm connected to a
steering rod and controlled by the wheel servo mecha-
nism housed in the fuselage fore section. The springs al-
low the landing gear to be retracted and extended and to *
better absorb landing shocks. Two rubber cushions, in- Forward
stalled under the upper arm, stop the foldable part of the
landing gear (the lower arm) when the retraction over-
runs its stroke (172.5 mm maximum). ,/ .:
2. ,.

Figure 2-2. Arresting Hook

2.1 .1.4 Wings and Tail Section

2.1.1.4.1 Wing Description (Figure 2-3). E a c h


wing has two parts, a right and left half, which are at-
tached to the upper side of the fuselage with four clevis
pins passing through four lugs on the wings underside.
The overall wing span is 16.9 ft. Two tubes with clevis
assemblies on the ends run the length of each wing. The
wings are connected together by pins inserted in the
clevis assemblies. Electrical servo actuated ailerons are
installed near the wingtip of each wing and are con-
nected to the servo actuators via collapsible linkage.
The linkage is designed to collapse whenever a force
greater than 34 lb is applied perpendicular to the aile-
rons normal travel. This design is used to lessen the
leverage that can be exerted on the servos during net
landings. Access panels are located on the end ribs in
Figure 2-1. Nose Landing Gear each wing to allow accessto the aileron actuators and on
the underside of the right wing for access to the flux
valve.
2.1 .1.3 UAV Arresting Hook (Figure 2-2). When
the UAV lands on a runway, a rear-pointing hook helps The aluminum tubes carry all of the load acting on the
bring it to a halt after touchdown by engaging an arrest- wings. The fiberglass or KEVLAR ribs maintain the
ing cable. The hook bracket is attached to the underside aerodynamic profile of the wings and the skin protects
of the fuselage and is fastened to the main landing gear the wing inner parts from humidity and damage. An alu-
beam. minum bracket, with plug receptacles for the electrical
connection from fuselage to wing, is located on the

ORIGINAL 2-2
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

E
L WING

I
I

I
I I

I
I

I
I

I
Lll R WING

I
I I I I

AILERON AILERON
WING TO FUSELAGE
CONNECTIONS

I I I I

AILERON SERVO FVA ii : : 1; AILERON SERVO

BOlTOM VIEW
Figure 2-3. Wing Section

trailing edge of the wing. Position lights are located on surface. The left tube carries a single electrical cable for
the wing tips, green on the right wing and red on the left the left elevator and rudder servo-actuators.
wing. Clear Plexiglas strips in front of each light focus
part of the lights energy forward for increased night 2.1 .1.4.3 Horizontal Stabilizer and Elevator.
visibility. The wingtip covers are designed to minimize The tail configuration has dual elevators. The horizontal
edge turbulence. Leading edge lights are located on the stabilizer is connected to both vertical stabilizers with
left and right edges of the wing for use during night lug bolts that fit into brackets on the stabilizers. The hor-
operations. izontal stabilizer is made of fiberglass bonded onto
polyurethane foam. Elevators are connected to the sta-
2.1 .I .4.2 Tail. The tail section consists of two booms bilizer and are made of balsa wood coated with dope.
made of 7.62 cm diameter KEVLAR or aluminum tub- The elevators are electrically servo actuated and are
ing 202 cm long, and the vertical/horizontal stabilizers. connected to the servo actuator via collapsible linkage.
The right tube houses two electric cables; one controls The linkage is designed to collapse whenever a force
the right elevator and rudder servo actuators and the greater than 34 lb is applied perpendicular to the eleva-
other is for the UHF antenna located on the right rudder tors normal travel. This design is used to lessen the

23 ORIGINAL
AI -SRRPV-NFM-000

leverage that can be exerted on the servos during net magnet that is an integral part of the flywheel. The tim-
landings. Access panels are located on the top of the ing is tixed because there are no wearing parts.
horizontal stabilizer to allow access to the elevator
servo actuators. 2.1.1.6.4 Engine Build-Up. The engine suspen-
sion, alternator coupling, and cooling and exhaust sys-
2.1 .I .4.4 Vertical Stabilizers and Rudders. The tems are briefly described as follows:
vertical stabilizers are made of fiberglass bonded onto
polyurethane foam. The rudders, mounted in the trailing 1. Suspension.An end-bell mounting adapter is sup-
edge of the left and right vertical stabilizers, are made of ported on three shock mounts using a dynafocal
balsa wood coated with dope. The rudders are electri- arrangement that provides center of gravity sup-
cally servo actuated and connected to servo actuators port. The engine is mounted on an adapter plate,
via collapsible linkage. The linkage is designed to col- which is also a back cover for the crankcase. On
lapse whenever a force greater than 34 lb is applied per- the other side of the adapter plate, an end-bell is
pendicular to the rudders normal travel. This design is provided for the mounting of the alternator.
used to lessen the leverage that can be exerted on the
servo during net landings. An access panel on the out- 2. Generator Coupling. A flexible coupling,
board side of each vertical stabilizer allows accessto the WOODS type, 3JE generator drive is used. It al-
rudder servo actuator. lows quick installation and removal of the genera-
tor and protects the generator from shock loads
2.1.1.5 Fuel System. The fuel system consists of a through the crankshaft.
fuel tank, a fuel level sensor, fuel filter, fuel pump, and
drain valve fuel tank check valve. The fuel is a 50: 1 mix- 3. Exhaust. Diffused type exhaust ducts that im-
ture of 100 octane LoLead AVGAS and natural petro- prove scavenging of the cylinder are used. This
leum-based high quality 2-stroke oil, BIA certified for improves clearing of the exhaust gases and helps
TC-W. A fuel filling opening to the integral tank is lo- the fresh air charge enter the combustion chamber.
cated on the cover of the fuselage at the wing root.
2.1.2 UAV Electrical System (Figure 2-4)
The 42-liter capacity fuel tank is built into the fuse-
lage mid section. It is integrally sealed, includes a fuel 2.1.2.1 Generator and Regulator. The Generator
level sensor and drain valve, and has connections to Electrical Unit (GEU) is the primary source ofelectrical
vent, supply, and refuel systems. power. It is installed on the engine and supplies 3-phase
ac voltage in delta-configuration. This is rectified by a
2.1.1.6 Powerplant. The UAV engine is a horizon- 3-phase bridge in the EPS and 28 Vdc is fed to the 28V
tally opposed twin-cylinder, crankcase-scavenged, buses. The generator voltage is regulated by the regula-
two-stroke engine. Both cylinders are fired simulta- tor electrical unit (REU). This low-temperature unit
neously by a magneto ignition system. monitors the rectified voltage and changes the field cur-
rent of the generator accordingly. This allows the volt-
2.1 .I .6.1 Carburetors and Fuel Intake System. age of the supply bus to remain fixed and be
The fuel intake system consists of two carburetors independent of engine speedor changes in the electrical
mounted on the crankcase with the manifold. The car- load. The fixed voltage is maintained above 3000 x-pm.
buretor uses a metering diaphragm to control the incom- Below this, the voltage decreasesand the battery sup-
ing fuel (rather than a float) for all position operation. plies input to the bus. The maximum power output of the
The carburetor also has a diaphragm fuel pump operated generator is 800 watts.
by the cyclic variation in crankcase pressure. The piston
timed port in each cylinder directs the cool incoming 2.1.2.2 Battery System. The Battery Emergency
charge under the hot exhaust port, improving piston life Unit (BEU) is used as an emergency electrical supply
and reliability. system. When the generator does not supply the correct
output (after a fault or drop in engine speed below the
2.1 .I .6.2 Propeller and Generator. A two-blade, minimum value - including engine shutoff), the bat-
29-inch-diameter pusher propeller is mounted on one tery supplies voltage to the essential bus.
end of the engine crankshaft. On the opposite end, an al-
ternator is directly coupled. Two battery packs connected in parallel are used.
Each pack consists of 24 Ni-Cd (SAFT UR126377)
2.1.1.6.3 Ignition. The UAV engine has a magneto cells. The batteries are rated at 2 AH each and do not re-
ignition system that senses a triggering signal from a quire special maintenance. The 24-battery pack cells
should be kept fully charged at 35V. The battery packs

ORIGINAL 2-4
AI -SRRPV-NFMdOO

UAV
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM

ELECTRICAL CHARGE
GENERATOR BATTERY POWER PLANT
POWER SUPPLY
FEW WU) CONTROL
WS)
r-

El REGULATOR
WW

CPA 4 b PAYLOAD

COMMUNICA-
SENSORS 4 pJF--k
TIONS

LIGHT
SERVOS 4 b CONTROL mt-
ww

Figure 2-4. UAV Electrical System

are kept charged during flight by the battery charger. 2.1.2.4 Electrical Power Supply (EPS)
The packs are covered with a special insulating winter
cover as a protection against extremely low tempera- 2.1.2.4.1 EPS Description. The EPS is located in
tures, or with a summer cover for moderate and high the rear section of the UAV fuselage and provides the
temperatures. following functions:

2.1.2.3 Battery Charger. The charger insures that 1. Converts voltage received from power supply
the battery remains fully charged throughout flight, de- sources to various voltages required by electrical
spite regular discharges and leaks. It is a switching type, loads
synchronized with the converters, and supplies a fixed
current. It cuts in when battery voltage drops to 32.4 2. Distributes and divides the supply on the supply
Vdc, and disconnects when voltage reaches 35 Vdc. If buses and protects the output from short-circuits,
the battery is disconnected by placing its switch to OFF, and inputs from overvoltage/undervoltage.
the charger is also disconnected. If the charger is unable
to supply the required current (with 28V at the input), it 3. Transfers external commands and reports to CPA
signals a failure through the BITE system with BATT
FAIL light. The battery charger is on the non-essential 4. Uses self test system to monitor status and internal
bus. operations within EPS.

2-5 ORIGINAL
Al-SRRPV-NFM-OOO

2.1.2.4.2 EPS Components. The EPS is made up via separatechannels. The engine cutoff circuit operates
of the following main circuits: according to commands received from the ENG CUT
bit in the UPL but requires that the aircraft navigation
1. Rectification Bridge. The two 3-phasediode recti- lights be on before the command can operate the ERC
fication bridges are connected to the 28V ESS and engine cut circuitry. The aircraft light command closes a
28V NESS supply buses. They rectify the 3-phase relay in the engine trap and the ENG CUT bit is trans-
ac voltage from the generator and isolate the ESS ferred to the ERC. The engine trap also counts the num-
from the NESS bus so that the battery cannot feed ber of ENG CUT commands received.
the NESS bus.
2.1.2.6 ENG ON/OFF Safety Switch. This func-
2. Battery Switching Unit. When the generator is tion (ON or OFF) can also be carried out by the ENG
functional, the battery switching unit enables the ON/OFF safety switch located near the external power
battery to be charged to a voltage greater than that connector on the engine bay let? panel. When in OFF,
of the 28V ESS bus. If the generator fails, the bat- the magneto supply is stopped and even if the UPL
tery switching unit connects the battery to the sup- RUN/CUTOFF bit switch is at RUN, the engine status
ply bus without voltage interruption. During the remains at OFF. This is a safety switch that prevents the
time between the voltage drop and the relay clo- accidental startup of the engine when the UAV is under-
sure, the bus is fed by the battery via the series going maintenance or ground tests. When the switch is
voltage regulator. in the ON position, the ignition system is controlled by
the UPL.
3. Converters. The converters change the source
voltage (28 Vdc) to other voltages required by the 2.1.2.7 Light Control Unit (LCU). The LCU is lo-
UAV: *15 Vdc and +5 Vdc. Each voltage type has cated in the fore section of the fuselage behind the ATU
two converters connected in parallel. While one and BPU. It is used to control the five position lights.
converter is operating, the second is on standby. The LCU receives two input commands from the light
Each converter is isolated and cannot affect the control circuit in the CPA Buffer card. The first com-
bus. Each converter provides voltage regulation, mand causes the lights to illuminate with low intensity,
current limiting, short protection, and overvoltage and 350 ms later, they are lit with maximum intensity.
protection.
2.1.2.7.1 Navigation/Landing Lights. The five
4. Regulator Electrical Unit (REU). The REU has a navigation/landing lights are positioned as follows: two
300-ohm resistor connected between the battery (amber) on the tail assembly, right and left vertical stabi-
and the REU to transfer the starting field current lizers, one (green) on the right wingtip, one (red) on the
from the battery to the generator. left wingtip, and one (white) on the nose cover.

5. BITE. The BITE self-check subsystem monitors 2.1.2.7.2 Strobe Light. The strobe light is a flashing
test points throughout the power supply system. white light on top of the UAV main cover. The strobe
These points are addressed through coded com- light is used for tracking of the UAV by sight from heli-
mands to the BITE exchange in the CPAs AUX copter or light plane. The strobe light is turned on and
module. This arrangement simplifies and shortens off using a relay located in the rear compartment, which
troubleshooting procedures controlled from the is activated by logic in the EPS. The EPS is commanded
GCS. Display data is in scaled format and values via uplink from the GCS or PCS. The strobe/IFF is on
must be multiplied by eight to determine actual the non-essential bus.
voltages.
2.1.2.8 Engine Thermocouple (ETC). The ETC
2.1.2.5 Engine RPM/Cutoff (ERC) Unit. TheERC measures the engine cylinder-head temperature. Its
unit, located in the engine bay, comprises an engine rpm thermocouple probe is located under one of the engine
counter (tachometer), an engine failure warning circuit, spark plugs. The thermocouple probe consists of two
and an engine cutoff circuit. The tachometer converts metal strips (nickel and constantin) and is a standard re-
the pulses received from the magneto to a dc voltage us- sistance-temperature thermocouple. It is installed on the
ing a frequency-to-voltage converter. The ENG CUT hotter cylinder from temperature readings made during
failure warning outputs 5 Vdc when the ERC unit re- runup on the test stand. Two signals are sent to the GCS:
ceives pulses from the magneto, and 0 Vdc when no
pulses are received. The relays that cut off the engine are 1. UAV Engine Temperature. An analog signal of
activated by +28 Vdc. The tachometer circuit and the range +O.17 Vdc to +5 Vdc, relative to the temper-
engine failure circuit outputs are transmitted to the GCS ature range 10C to 320C.

ORIGINAL 2-6
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

2. Engine Warning (Low or High Temperature). circuits for the Altitude and Speed Control (throttle and
Control station software monitors DNL to elevators) Loops, Fuel Sensor Circuit, and Servo test
illuminate ENG TEMP light when CHT < 100C points. APE 2 Card contains circuits for the Direc-
or 2 230C. tion/Roll and Yaws Rate (ailerons and rudders) Loops,
the Autopilot Critical Failure Control circuit, and the
2.1.3 UAV Electronic System. The UAV electronic regulators for the gyro and sensor supplies. The Com-
system consists of the Central Processing Assembly pass Card includes circuits used to calibrate the flux
(CPA), UAV sensors, and UAV servos. The system pro- valve inclination vector angle, essential to maintain
vides control of the UAV during flight operations. UAV correct heading relative to north after banking or
rolling. It also processes and filters all the analog input
2.1.3.1 Central Processing Assembly (CPA). STICK mode command signals, which input the APE
The CPA supervises the UAV control and communica- control loops (Aileron, Elevator, Rudder, and Throttle).
tions system. It is located in the fuselage mid-section. In addition, the Compass card filters the BYPASS sig-
The CPA performs the following functions: nals to the relevant servos and contains a 9-bit altitude
logic circuit.
1. Decodes command signals received from the GCS
on either of the two uplink channels (Primary, 2.1.3.1.3 Navigation Module. The NavigationMod-
Secondary) at one of the UAV receivers, C-Band ule consists of one circuit card (NVC) which provides
receiver or UHF receiver. The CPA decodes sig- automatic navigation for the UAV. The NVC uses a
nals received via the test cable during ground tests Global Positioning System (GPS) onboard the UAV to
or maintenance. The UAV is connected by cable obtain positional fixes from GPS satellites. The NVC is
to the GCS TEST connector. a microprocessor-based design, which is programmable
by the pilot to fly to specific waypoints. The NVC basi-
2. Encodes the UAV status reports and data (teleme- cally checks its programmed waypoints to determine
try) signals for transmission to the GCS on the where it is ordered to fly to, then checks the GPS for its
downlink channel from the UAV C-Band trans- present location, and then calculates how to fly from its
mitter. It also encodes status signals sent by cable present location to the ordered waypoint. When GPS is
via the test cable during ground tests. not installed or invalid GPS data is received, the NVC
uses Dead Reckoning (DR) to calculate how to fly its
3. Controls and coordinates the UAV flight mode se- programmed route of flight.
lection and mission.
2.1.3.1.4 Return Home (RH) & Memory Module.
4. Controls units and subsystems of the UAV includ- This consists of one card (RI-I and Logic). The RH cir-
ing sensors, servos, communication units, Electri- cuit includes a memory into which flight parameters are
cal Power Supply (EPS), and Payload Electronic loaded before or during flight, a digital-to-analog con-
Box (PEB). * verter, and various counters and clocks used to time the
UAV return flight legs. RH is used when there is a com-
The CPA consists of seven modules: EDU, autopilot, munications loss in both uplink channels and when the
navigation, return home & memory, logic, auxiliary, TO-LAND/F LIGHT switch in the GCS is on FLIGHT.
and buffer.
2.1.3.1.5 Logic Module. The logic circuit super-
2.1.3.1.1 Encoder/Decoder Unit (EDU) Module. vises the communications and control of the UAV and
This comprises a decoder card, an encoder card, and two flight mode selection (RH DELAY, RI-I, GLIDE, BEA-
bit synchronizer cards. All communications to and from CON, TRANSPONDER, and BYPASS modes).
the CPA pass through this module via the Decoder and
Encoder. 2.1.3.1.6 Auxiliary (AUX) Module. This consists
of one card, AUX. It includes the BITE exchange sys-
2.1.3.1.2 Autopilot (APE) Module. The APE com- tem and output buffers.
prises three cards: APE1 Card, APE2 Card, and Com-
pass Card. The UAV flight control system is handled by 2.1.3.1.7 Buffer Module. This consists of one card.
the Autopilot module, which controls the UAV by input- All input/output signals to and from the CPA that need
ting flight parameters measured by the sensors into con- buffering pass through this card, including all camera,
trol loop circuits. The signals are compared with the sensor calibration, and compass calibration signals.
input command signals, and the resulting error (differ-
ence) signal is used to activate the flight surface and
throttle servos accordingly. APE 1 Card contains

2-7 ORIGINAL
Al SRRPV-NFM-000

2.1.3.2 Flight Control System (FCS) Sensors 2.1.3.3 Flight Control System (FCS) Servos.
(Figures 2-5 and 2-6). Five sensors are used in the The UAVs flight control surfaces, nosewheel, and
UAV to measure parameters used in controlling the throttle are controlled by two rudder servos, two eleva-
UAV flight. Signals from the sensorsinput the FCS con- tor servos, two aileron servos, one throttle servo, and
trol loops and any changes in measurement cause the one servo wheel unit. The servos form part of the flight
servo actuators to adjust the flight surfaces or throttle control loop. With the exception of the throttle servo, all
according to commands from the autopilot. servos are interchangeable. A command signal and a
signal from the sensor(s) are sent to the autopilot control
2.1.3.2.1 Barometric Pressure Unit (BPU). The loop. Differences between the desired and the actual
BPU measures the static pressure and sends signals to flight parameter result in movement of control surface,
the altitude control loop of the Autopilot module in the throttle, or nosewheel.
UAV CPA. BPU input is from the static pressureports in
the UAV nose. The range of measurement is from - 1,500 2.1.3.3.1 R and L Servo Rudder Units. A rudder
to 20,000 f?and a voltage signal of -5 to +5 Vdc is output servo is located in a compartment on the upper portion
to the autopilot. of each vertical stabilizer. The rudder servo receives
signals from the autopilot yaw (heading) control loop
2.1.3.2.2 Airspeed Transducer Unit (ATU). The and provides a control surface range of movement of
ATU measuresthe UAVs indicated airspeed. The ATU k20.
is located in the nose compartment of the UAV and
mounted on special shock mount rubbers to minimize 2.1.3.3.2 R and L Servo Elevator Units. An ele-
vibration. It receives signals from the static air pressure vator servo is located in a compartment on each side of
ports and the pitot tube located in the center of the UAV the tails horizontal stabilizer. It controls the movement
nose. Indicated airspeed is calculated by taking the dif- of the elevator on receipt of signals from the autopilot
ference between the dynamic and static pressures. A and forms part of the pitch (speed) control loop. The ele-
voltage signal in the range of -5 to +5 Vdc, correspond- vator range of movement is &20.
ing to an airspeed range of 0 to 150 kt, is sent to the Au-
topilot module of the CPA. 2.1.3.3.3 R and L Servo Aileron. The right and
left aileron servos are located in compartments near the
2.1.3.2.3 Flux Valve Unit (FVU). The FVU indi- right and left wing tips. They are used to control the roll
cates the directional heading of the UAV relative to (and heading) of the UAV, and are part of the autopilot
magnetic north. It functions as a magnetic compass and roll control loop. The servos are activated by signals re-
also compensates for movement and changes along the ceived from the autopilot. The aileron range of move-
horizontal and longitudinal axes of the UAV during ment is ~L20.
flight. The FW is located in the mid section of the right
wings undersurface and consists of a compass and elec- 2.1.3.3.4 Servo Throttle Unit. The throttle servo is
tronic unit. located in the engine bay on the engine dynafocal sus-
pension. Input signals come from the autopilot. The
2.1.3.2.4 Vertical Gyro Unit (VGU). The VGU servo throttle regulates the flow of fuel to the carbure-
senses the UAV roll and pitch and is used to maintain tors. The Servo Throttle Unit motor is connected to the
UAV stability during flight. Roll and pitch signals in the throttle via the tbrottle arm, cable and linkage rod.
range of -5 to +5 Vdc, corresponding to f60 pitch and These levers/linkages open or close the throttle accord-
+_90roll, are transmitted to the Autopilot module of the ing to the autopilot signal, and increase or decrease the
CPA. The VGU consists of a gyro, transducers, an ac fuel flow to the carburetors, affecting the engine speed
motor, and amplifiers, and is located in the rear com- and climb rate ofthe UAV. The servo shaft has a range of
partment ofthe UAV It requires up to 10 minutes (max.) l 40. The servo operates on -5 Vdc (idle speed) to +5
to reach operating RPM. Vdc (wide-open throttle) and is supplied by +28 Vdc.

2.1.3.2.5 Rate Gyro Unit (RGU). The RGU mea- Autopilot commands to the throttle servo may dam-
sures the rate of change of yaw (direction) of the UAV age the throttle servo at high throttle settings. The thmttlo
and is used to reduce the natural drift of the UAV about servo-motors current limits may be exceeded during
its vertical axis. If either the Vertical Gyro Unit or auto- flights in altitude hold mode whenever the command
pilot is damaged, the UAV is controlled manually by the voltage to the throttle servo exceeds 0.6 volts (test point
pilot flight box, employing the RGU measurements. (TP) 309 equals 0.2 ). The throttle linearization circuit
amplifies the servos command voltage changes at high
throttle settings. Flight-testing has shown that throttle
servo command voltages vary as much as 2 to 3 volts

ORIGINAL 2-8
Al-SRRPV-NFM-000

FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM SEN


SORS

r-

BAROMETRIC
PRESSURE UNIT FLUX VALVE UNIT
RATE GYRO UNIT
(BW WJ)
. ALTITUDE . UAV HEADING WW
RELATIVE TO aCHANGE OF YAW
MAGNETIC NORTH ENABLES STABLE
FLIGHT IN CROSSWIND
CONDITIONS
*ESSENTIAL WHEN
AUTOPILOTNGU FAIL
AIRSPEED
TRANSDUCER VERTICAL GYRO UNIT
W-W (VW
l AIRSPEED lUAV ROLL AND PITCH
*MAINTAINS STABILITY
Figure 2-5. Flight Control Sensors

VGLI

ACCELEROMETER

STATIC HOLE BANK

Figure 2-6. UAV Sensor Location

2-9
ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

C-BE

1 GCS/PCS 1
ATC
C-SAND
. DISH/HORN
TRANSMITTER
OR
C-BAND OMNI
TRANSMITTER
------_
UHF
-TRANSMITTER
------_
C-BAND
b RECEIVER

Figure 2-7. UAV Communications

peak-to-peak at up to 7 Hz. This flight condition ex- 2.1.3.3.5 Servo Wheel Unit. The Servo Wheel
ceeds the servo-motors current limit. Unit is located in the front-end bulkhead in the mid sec-
tion of the UAV fuselage. Its outputs are +5 Vdc to the
When altitude hold mode is used, the following pro- nosewheel servo at the same time as the rudder servo is
cedures shall be followed: operated. The nosewheel range of movement is ~t12.

1. TP 309 shall be monitored for 15 seconds during 2.1.4 Communications (Figures 2-7 and 2-8).
level off for cruise or following airspeedincrease. The UAVs communicate with the GCS by radio via the
uplink and downlink channels. Downlink communica-
2. If TP 309 is greater than 0.2, reduce airspeed tions are in the C-band frequency range. Each UAV
and/or altitude so that TP is 0.2 or less; or sends its subsystem status reports and video and/or te-
lemetry data to the GCS via the downlink channel. Each
3. Use stick throttle to continue mission. UAV transmits at a different frequency, which is set on
the ground before the flight. Commands to the UAV are
sent uplink on two channels, a primary and a secondary.
Primary channel (UPL1) communications are in the
C-band frequency range. Secondary channel (UPL2)
communications are in the UHF range and are used only
if the primary channel fails.
Operations in Altitude Hold Mode to include
Programmer and Camera Guide Modes One antennais used for both the uplink and downlink
when TP 309 is greater than 0.2 may cause C-band channels, and a diplexer unit is used to separate
damage to servo throttle unit. This condition the UPL reception channel from the DNL transmission
may lead to a stuck throttle and subsequent
loss of air vehicle.

ORIGINAL 2-10
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

UHF ANTENNA

C-BAND
OMNV
DIRECTIONAL VIDEO/TM
ANTENNA TRANSMll-rER

RF HEAD._

IFF ANTENNA. COMM SWITCH


-.

.,, FREQUENCY 3,
:,, SELECT ,
:, SWITCH
,,,
\
IFF TRANSPONDER RECEIVER UHF RECEIVER (RUU)
WJ)

Figure 2-8. UAV Communications System

channel. The diplexer also isolates and protects the re- downlink command that might interfere with mainte-
ceivers from the high power output of the transmitter. nance actions.

Video and/or telemetry data, as well as UAV status is 2.1.4.1 IFF Transponder. The IFF transponder is
transmitted on the DNL channel, as well as UAV status installed on the UAV under the main cover with the an-
reports. The UAV-to-GCS range is calculated by timing tenna mounted on top of the main cover. The IFF tran-
the delay between transmitted and received signals sponder, when interrogated by Air Trafftc Control
from the GCS to the UAV. The range calculation cir- ground radar, transmits an identification code. The IFF
cuits are located in the GCS-2000 Communication transmits a four-digit identification code (Mode 3) and
Shelter or in the PCS. altitude information (Mode C).

The COMM switch, located on the left side of the When interrogated, the IFF transponder responds
UAV fuselage, removes all 28 Vdc power from the with a code that is set by using the four numbered (0
communication equipment of the UAV. This enables through 7) switches on the front of the IFF transponder.
maintenance to be performed on the UAV without the This code is set when the IFF is installed before takeoff
UAV receiving an uplink command or transmitting a and cannot be changed in flight. The codes 0000, 1200,
7500, 7600, 7700, and 7777 are not to be used at any
time.

2-11 ORIGINAL
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

Power to the IFF transponder and the strobe light 2.1.4.6 Encoder/Decoder (EDU). The EDU re-
power supply is controlled by a relay mounted in the ceives data from the UAV receivers and relays com-
rear compartment. This relay is energized by an uplink mands or reports data to the UAV transmitter. It consists
command from the GCS/PCS through the encoder/de- of two main modules: the encoder and decoder. The en-
coder unit of the CPA. Once through the encoder/de- coder receives reports from the UAV monitoring sys-
coder, the uplink bit is routed to the EPS logic circuits tems and flight controls and formats them. The encoder
where the relay is energized to enable 28 Vdc to be sup- then passesthe data to the C-band transmitter for trans-
plied to the IFF and the strobe light power supply. The mission to the control station. The decoder receives
IFF is on the non-essential bus. uplink data from the C-band receiver and decodes it for
the various command flight functions.
2.1.4.2 C-Band Diplexer (DCU). The diplexer al-
lows simultaneous transmission (downlink) and recep- Video signals received from the payload are routed to
tion (uplink channel 1) on the same antenna. It contains the C-band transmitter. These signals do not pass
two filters, one to suppress spurious emissions for the through the EDU but are piggy-backed on the encoder
transmitter on the receiver frequency and one to sup- signals and transmitted. The video signal requires no
press signals for the receiver on the transmitter fre- decoder and can be received by any unit possessinga re-
quency. The diplexer thus prevents mutual interference ceiver capable of accepting the frequency of the UAV
as well as receiver desensitization due to leakage of en- transmission.
ergy from the transmitter.
2.1.4.7 C-Band Transmitter. The C-band transmit-
2.1.4.3 C-Band Receiver. The C-Band Receiver is ter receives video from the camera payload and sends it
on the non-essential bus. The C-band receiver consists on the main carrier signal. If the transmitter (Item #lo)
of two modules, the SP/SP receiver and the RF head. is commanded off during a step, + on in this Item com-
The SP/SP receiver is controlled by three signals, which mands the UAV transmitter to beacon mode (8 seconds
determine the operations/mode of the receiver. The on, 8 seconds off). If Item #lO is + on, this Item has no
three control signals are: effect. If a failure occurs on the UAV with Items # 10 and
#l 1 - off, the UAV transmitter will come on in Beacon
1. LONG/SHORT, for wide band long or short se- mode. Telemetry data information is sent on the
quence sub-carrier signal at 7.5 MHz. A frequency select switch
(located under the hinged cover holding the PCU as-
2. SECURE/CLEAR, for wide or narrow band fre- sembly) determines the transmitter frequency. The
quency transmitter can be tuned in 5 MHz steps over the band
from 4,800 to 4,900 MHz.
3. COMMAND/LOCK, indicates where the decoder
is locked in the uplink channel. 2.1.4.8 C-Band Power Amplifier. The amplifier
boosts the signal level from +20 to +40 db. A driver
2.1.4.4 UHF Receiver. The UHF receiver receives boosts the RF input signal to the level required by the
uplink (secondary) signals from the GCS in parallel power amplifier. The fully amplified signal then passes
with the C-band uplink (primary). The UHF uplink is through a low pass filter and isolator (to absorb the re-
used if a problem arises with the C-band (primary) flected power). The amplifier houses the ON/OFF and
uplink. LOW/HIGH functions. When in LOW position (LOW
POWER), the output is 2.4~ for testing on the ground or
2.1.4.5 UHF Antenna. This is a wide-band dipole for short-range testing.
antenna used for UHF reception on the secondary
uplink channel. The antenna is located on the outer sur-
face of the right vertical stabilizer.

ORIGINAL 2-12
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

CHAPTER 3

The Ground Control Station (GCS) and


The Tracking and Communications
Unit (TCU)
3.0 GROUND CONTROL SYSTEM divided into six subsystems: System Monitor and Pro-
cessor (SMP), pilots control bay, tracker/plotter bay,
The Ground Control System (GCS-2000) is a small, payload/observers bay, intelligence bay, and mission
modular, highly transportable control station for the PI-
ONEER UAV system. In the land-based configuration,
the GCS-2000 is installed in two shelters. The Control
Shelter (GCS) is contained in an S-250 or S-280 type
shelter and includes the UAV Pilot Control Bay,
Tracker Bay, and Observer Bay. The Communications
Shelter (TCU) is contained in an S-250 type shelter, and
includes the Communication, Tracking, and Antenna
systems and the Navigational Data System. The S-280
GCS has additional room for a mission commander, in-
telligence bay, dual air conditioners, a redesigned
AC/DC control panel, and an upgraded intercom sys-
tem. The use of two shelters provides protection for the
PIONEER UAV system operating crew (pilot and ob-
server) without detracting from the system communica-
tion range. GCS shipboard operations are conducted
from a mobile maintenance facility (MMF) with the Figure 3-l. GCSS280 Shelter
TCU antenna mounted on a ships mast.

3.1 GROUND CONTROL STATION (GCS) commander station, which also contains the electrical
(FIGURE 3-1) power supply and distribution panel.

3.1.1 Electrical Power. GCS electrical power is 3.1.3 System Monitor and Processor (SMP).
supplied by an external power source providing The SMP acts as the central computer for the GCS. It is
3-phase/l0 kW power (110 Vat/60 Hz). A pack of eight made up of seven computer cards that provide for the
batteries ( 12 Vdc/l 00 Amps each) are connected to pro- operation of the GCS. The SMP controls communica-
vide 24Vacl200 Amps emergency power. The ship- tions within the GCS, the GCS operating and applica-
board configuration replaces the pack of eight batteries tion modes, and power supply warning messages. The
with an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to provide SMP also performs on-line self tests and diagnostic re-
emergency power. ports up to card level, system preflight tests on the UAV
and GCS, preflight interactive tests, calibration tests of
3.1.2 Power Distribution. 110 Vat from the gener- the GCS, set up of the preflight conditions (preset
ator is provided to the pilot and observer bays for moni- mode), and loading of return home and navigation
tor operation, air conditioning, illumination system, and programs.
the power supply (HPS-2000). The HPS-2000 is a 3-
phase voltage rectifier that supplies high current 28 Vdc
for distribution to the GCS subsystems. The GCS is

3-1 ORIGINAL
3.1.4 Pilot Control Bay (PBY) (Figure 3-2).
This is the station from which the internal pilot controls
UAV flight operations. The PBY consists of Pilot Dis-
play Panel (PDP). Pilot Control Desk (PCD), Pilot Con-
trol Table (PCT), and Pilots TV Monitor Panel PILOT TV MONITOR PANEL
(PTMP).

3.1.4.1 Pilot Display Panel (PDP) (Figure


3-3). The PDP is a vertical panel that displays UAV PILOT DISPLAY PANEL
flight data, system data, time data, and warnings. It is
made up of the following gauges, lights, and caution in-
dicators (UAV report indicates signal is transmitted
from the UAV). PILOT CONTROL DESK

3.1.4.1.1 UAV Flight Data


PILOT CONTROL PANEL
1. RANGE KM. Digital readout of UAV-to-Station
slant range in kilometers.

2. TRACKING AZIMUTH / RPV HEADING. Indi-


cator 1 indicates the azimuth of the tracking an-
PILOT POWER DISTRIBUTION
tenna, relative to local grid north. The other
indicator indicates the longitudinal axis direction
of the UAV, relative to magnetic north (UAV re-
port)* Figure 3-2. Pilot Control Bay (PBY)

3 4 7 6 9 10

Figure 3-3. Pilot Display Panel (PDP)

ORIGINAL 3-2
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

3. ATTITUDE. Artificial horizon indicates UAV rectly, or when no program is loaded after the
pitch and roll angles (in degrees) from information UAV is switched on (UAV report).
provided by the UAV Vertical Gyro Unit (VGU)
(UAV report). 2. RI-I FAIL. (Return Home Failure)

4. INDICATED AIRSPEED. Shows indicated air-


speed in knots using information from Airspeed WARNINGS
Transducer Unit (ATU). (UAV report).

5. ALTITUDE (analog and digital). UAV altitude


above sea level or above the field level in accor-
dance with selector position (UAV report, cor-
rected in station).

6. SEA LEVEL/FIELD LEVEL. Selects the readout


on the analog and digital displays ofUAV altitude,
either above ground level (AGL) or above mean
sea level (MSL).

7. RATE OF TURN. Reads reported yaw rate


(degkec) from UAV rate gyro unit (RGU) (UAV
report).

8. RATE OF CLIMB/VERTICAL SPEED INDI-


CATOR (VSI). Reads UAV rate of climb/descent
in feet per minute (UAV report).

3.1.4.1.2 UAV System Data

9. ENGINE RPM. Reads engine speed in revolu-


tions per minute (LJAV report).

10. ENGINE TEMPERATURE. Engine cylinder


head temperature (C) (UAV report from the en-
gine thermocouple unit).

11. FUEL. Indicates fuel quantity in liters (TJAV re-


POr-0. Figure 34. Warning Lights Panel
12. BUS VOLTAGE. Shows Essential Bus (ESS)
voltage (UAV report).
a. Lamp Blinking: Failure detected in the station
3.1.4.1.3 Time Data calculations and RI-I updating.

13. LOCAL TIME SET. Digital readout for local (1) RI-I calculated time is greater than 2:39H
time. Push-button to set local time. (max RI-I time).

14. MISSION TIME SET. Digital readout for mission (2) RI-I calculated distance is greater than 200
time. Push-button to reset and start mission time. km. (max RI-I distance).

3.1.4.1.4 Warnings (Figures 3-4 and 3-5) (3) UAV cannot return home due to available
flight/meteorological data.
1. PROG FAIL. Indicates memory circuit malfunc-
tion in flight programmer. Illuminates when (4) Wind calculation has not been updated
power supply to the system is interrupted (may during last 30 min.
erase program), when program is loaded incor-

33 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

L-i:, q&r 3 1. INCORRECTLY LOADED DATA OR NO DATA 1. MISSION COMPUTER + YES.


- <:*i 465 t ~I IN RPV PROGRAMMER. 2. NVC BYPASS...CYCLE YES - NO.
,^*-i <;?f&pc : J
- , I I/X
, I I .+ 2. MISSION COMPUTER SET TO - NO. 3. CHECK/RELOAD RPV PROGRAMMER.
I J vi$%,*L
15-r
I 6,:+ * FAILURE DETECTED IN STATION CALCULA- PRESS FAIL CHECK.
I L
TIONS AND RH UPDATING.
,; B&g ,;&.- 1. PWR SUPPLY INTERRUPTED. CHECK PWR SUPPLY, RELOAD RH DATA.
~~~~ 2. INCORRECTLY LOADED RH DATA.

CONTROL ENG. TEMP IAW ENGINE LIMITATIONS


(7.1.2).

1 . BATT. VOLTAGE <32V WITH NO GEN FAIL. 1. EXECUTE BATTERY FAILURE EMERGENCY
2. GEN FAIL & BATT <25V. PROCEDURE.
3. BATT VOLTAGE UNBALANCED. 2. WITH A GEN FAIL LIGHT, EXECUTE GENERATOR
FAIL EMERGENCY PROCEDURE.

~~,~,
,$yea 1. INOPERATIVE BATTERY CHARGER. LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICAL.
**+LI+-
p\x- :, 2. INOPERATIVE CONVERTER.
L I ,t?$% 3. BATTERY SWITCHING CIRCUIT, +I5 VDC I + 5
* ~~~~~~~ VDC BUSES OUT OF TOLERANCE.

I(_ g:*:i.: EXECUTE GENERATOR FAIL EMERGENCY PROCE-


, ,z..,. 1. MECHANICAL FAILURE.
L - ...&;yJ,,;;,
&,*d.t ;,,,
$ :_ .1,2 :y I, 2. PHASE IMBALANCE. DURE.
.::~:-,fj&gJ I 3. OVER VOLTAGE/UNDER VOLTAGE.

1. CHECK ENGINE RPM INDICATOR.


2. EXECUTE ENGINE CUT EMERGENCY
PROCEDURE.
1. INCREASE IAS.
2. CHECK IAS GAUGElEDC DNL.
3. ADJUST PRESET.
r-- ~

F ALTITUDE IS BELOW PRESET. 1. CHECK ALTlMETERSlEDC DNL.


2. CLIMB AS DESIRED.
I 3. ADJUST PRESET.

i-_i!l LOWFUELFUEL1sBELOWPRESET. 1. CHECK FUEL GAUGElEDC DNL


2. RTB AS NECESSARY.
3. ADJUST PRESET.
/ : -a:ii PILOT BOX DISCONNECTED OR INOPERATIVE. CHECK IF BOX IS CONNECTED.
)* CO-PILOT BOX DISCONNECTED OR CHECK IF BOX IS CONNECTED.

INITIATE RECORD MODE, IF DESIRED.


PRESS FAIL CHECK ON PCT TO DETERMINE MAL-
FUNCTION.
PRESS FAIL CHECK ON PCT TO DETERMINE MAL-
FUNCTION.
DESELECT TEST MODE.

Figure 3-5. Warning Lights Table (Sheet 1 of 3)

ORIGINAL 34
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

1. WAIT TO ENSURE TRUE EMERGENCY.


2. PRI XMTR ON HIGH.
3. ATTEMPT CLIMB OR HEADING CHANGE AND
VERIFY.
4. IF WARNING PERSISTS LAND ASAP.
r:?;.::
LWI<... ADDR RECEIVED BY PRIMARY RCVR 1. ENSURE PRIM XMTR ON HIGH.
. .. .il i
.;;;,.._. ::
INCORRECT OR NOT RECEIVED. 2. GCS FAIL, PWR FAIL AND LOW PWR LAMPS OFF.
3. ANT TRACKING AND ELEVATION LOCKED.
4. CORRECT UAV ADDRESS.
5. IF WARNING PERSISTS LAND ASAP.
UAV REPORTS LOSS OF PRIM UPLINK 1. ENSURE PRIM XMTR ON HIGH.
COMMANDS. 2. GCS FAIL, PWR FAIL AND LOW PWR LAMPS OFF.
3. ATTEMPT CLIMB OR HEADING CHANGE AND
VERIFY.
4. IF WARNING PERSISTS LAND ASAP.

,i && UPLINK ON UAV SEC RCVR LOW OR NO 1. WAIT TO ENSURE TRUE EMERGENCY.
2 ~;,,&~ I RECEPTION. 2. SEC XMTR ON HIGH.
3. ATTEMPT CLIMB OR HEADING CHANGE AND
VERIFY.
4. IF WARNING PERSISTS LAND ASAP.
K :-:;;#if!!!f ADDR RECEIVED BY SECONDARY RECEIVER 1. ENSURE PRIM XMTR ON HIGH.
iibds
$-
-7&k INCORRECT OR NOT RECEIVED. 2. GCS FAIL, PWR FAIL AND LOW PWR LAMPS OFF.
: 3. CORRECT UAV ADDRESS.
ws I 4. IF WARNING PERSISTS LAND ASAP.
1. ENSURE SEC XMTR ON HIGH.
2. GCS FAIL, PWR FAIL AND LOW PWR LAMPS OFF.
3. ATTEMPT CLIMB OR HEADING CHANGE AND
VERIFY.
4. IF WARNING PERSISTS LAND ASAP.
*gy
<-
1. LOSS OF RECEPTION FROM UAV 1. VERIFY NVC BYPASS +YES.
*$$y~I 1

r apx, TRANSMITTER. 2. UAV XMTR PUSH-BUTTON ON AND HIGH PWR.


$:& 2. FAULT IN TCU RECEIVER ANTENNA. 3. ANT TRACKING AND ELEVATION LOCKED.
4. RECYCLE, CORRECT ADDRESS.
5. RPV ANT - OMNI.
6. RCVR FAIL LAMP OFF.
7. CHECK TCU FOR CBY FAIL.
8. RECORD LAST UAV POSIT., ALT., RANGE, HDG.
iI-
, 1. UAV FLYING WITH LOSS OF BOTH UPLINKS. 1. ENSURE PRIM & SEC XMTRS ON HIGH.
2. GCS FAIL, PWR FAIL & LOW PWR LAMPS OFF.
3. CHECK ADDRESS AND ANTENNA LOCK.
4. FOLLOW UAV TO RH COORDINATES.
>
5 -1 1. UAV FLYING WITH LOSS OF BOTH UPLINKS. 1. PRIM 8 SEC. XMTRS ON HIGH.
I
2. GCS FAIL, PWR FAIL & LOW PWR LAMPS OFF.
3. ENSURE CORRECT ADDRESS.
4. RECORD LAST UAV POSIT., ALT., RANGE, AND

Figure 3-5. Warning Lights Table (Sheet 2 of 3)

3-5 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

@!$%j;~ ALTITUDE, AIRSPEED, HEADING UPLINK AND ENSURE ENGINE RPM IS ABOVE 3500 RPM. IF
$@ &P,,$
+y@,,;,
>*,sa,lj7 DOWNLINK DIFFER IN VALUE. ABOVE 3500 RPM ENTER STICK MODES ONE AT A
TIME IN THE FOLLOWING ORDER:
AIRSPEED ABNORMAL
IAS READY PUSH-BUTTON OUT.
PITCH ANGLE:
2-3 LEVEL
5-IO CLIMB
-5-0 DESCENT.
LAND ASAP.
ALTITUDE ABNORMAL
ALT-READY OUT.
ENGINE RPM SET TO 6000 RPM.
CHECK ALTITUDE ON TV MONITOR.
START DESCENT.
LAND ASAP.
HEADING ABNORMAL
ROLL-READY PRESS.
ROLL ANGLE 0.
IF NEEDED, ROLL-READY OFF
TO MAINTAIN CONTROL.
CAMERA TO PILOTS WINDOW.
USE PLOTTER TO NAVIGATE.
LAND ASAP.
1. RATE OF ROLL GREATER THAN 120 1. CHECK THE FOLLOWING INSTRUMENTS FOR
3 DEGREES I SECOND, OR RATE OF PITCH ABNORMAL INDICATIONS.
~~~~ GREATER THAN 45 DEGREES I SECOND. A. ATTITUDE INDICATOR
2 2. POWER INTERRUPTION TO AUTOPILOT. B. RATE OF TURN
x I-
C. RATE OF CLIMB
2. IF INDICATIONS ARE ABNORMAL, EXECUTE
FLIGHT CONTROL MALFUNCTION EMERGENCY
PROCEDURE.
3. IF INDICATIONS ARE NORMAL, VERIFY A-PLT
FAIL LIGHT EXTINGUISHES WITHIN 15
SECONDS.
Note: It is normal for the A-PLT Fail light to illuminate for
15 seconds when the payload platform is selected ON.

Figure 3-5. Warning Lights Table (Sheet 3 of 3)

ORIGINAL 3-6
Al SRRPV-NFM-000

(5) RI-I calculation has not been performed 7. ENG CUT. Lights when engine RPM drops below
during last 3 min. approximately 500 rpm (UAV report).

(6) RI-I data has not been updated during the 8. LOW IAS. Lights when UAV reported airspeed is
first minute of flight in Programmed below the LOW IAS level preset by the pilot. The
Mode. warning is triggered by station logic. The LOW
IAS preset limits the lowest airspeed that can be
b. Lamp remains lit: UAV reports malfunction in set by the AIRSPEED knob.
Return Home data memory. It lights when
electrical power to the memory is lost (might 9. LOW ALT. Lights when UAV reported altitude
erase RI-I data), when there is malfunction in above sea level is lower than the LOW ALT level
RI-I data loading process, or when electrical preset by the pilot. The warning is triggered by sta-
power is applied to UAV and no data is loaded. tion logic. The LOW ALT preset does not limit the
ALTITUDE knob.
3. ENG TEMP. Lights when cylinder-head tempera-
ture (CHT) is c 100C or 2 230C (UAV report). 10. LOW FUEL. Lights when UAV reported fuel
When RPV TX commanded off, light will illumi- level is lower than the LOW FUEL level preset by
nate if CHT > 260C. the pilot. The warning is triggered by station logic.

Note 11. PLT BOX. Lights when PBX failure is detected or


PBX is disconnected.
Comply with Engine Limitations section
7.1.2. 12. COPLT BOX. Lights when CBX failure is de-
tected or CBX is disconnected.
4. BATT FAIL. Lights when one of the following
occurs (UAV report): 13. VTR INACTIVE. Lights when the VTR is not re-
cording.
a. Battery voltages lower than 32v without gen-
erator failure 14. PWR FAIL. Lights when failure is detected in any
unit of the station power supply system.
b. Battery voltages lower than 25~ with a genera-
tor failure 15. GCS FAIL. Lights when a failure is detected in
GCS.
c. Battery voltage unbalance of 0.5~ between
battery packs. 16. TEST MODE. Lights when the test push-button is
selected (TEST MODE push-button lights).
5. EPS FAIL. All circuits in the EPS are redundant While executing TEST MODE the station can not
and the system will automatically switch to a control the UAV.
backup circuit if an output voltage is too high or
low. Switching causes the EPS FAIL light to illu- 17. RPV RCVR/PRIM LINK. Lights when the pri-
minate. Lights when one of the following occurs mary uplink receiver on the UAV reaches low re-
(UAV report): ception level or loses reception (UAV report).

a. Inoperative charger 18. ADDR MODE/PRIM LINK. UAV reports the ad-
dress received in the primary uplink is wrong or no
b. Inoperative converter uplink is being received (UAV report).

c. The supply circuit that should operate when 19. LINK LOSS/PRIM LINK. UAV reports loss of
generator malfunction occurs is inoperative primary uplink commands (decoder is not locked)
(UAV report).
d. Converter protection circuit failure.
20. RPV RCVRSEC LINK. Lights when the second-
6. GEN FAIL. Lights when UAV generator is unable ary uplink receiver on UAV encounters low recep-
to provide adequate power or one of three phases tion level or loses reception (UAV report).
drops below 24v (UAV report).

3-7 ORIGINAL
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

2 1. ADDR MODE/SEC LINK. UAV reports that the 3.1.4.2 Pilot Control Desk (PCD) (Figure 3-6).
addressreceived in the secondary uplink is wrong The PCD is the canted panel located at the pilot control
or when no address is received (UAV report). bay. The controls that are used to control the UAV dur-
ing missions are primarily located here. The UAV com-
22. LINK LOSS/SEC LINK. UAV reports loss of sec- munications control and display are also located here.
ondary uplink commands (decoder is not locked) The switches, buttons, and indicators are as follows:
(UAV report).
1. DISENG/AUTOPLT. Emergency autopilot dis-
23. COMD INHIB. Lights to indicate that the uplink engagement. Pressing push-button lights AUTO-
is being disregarded by the UAV due to the pro- PILOT only. When UAV reports that autopilot has
grammer mode of flight programming. This func- been disengaged, DISENG also lights. Pressagain
tion is no longer used. to cancel the command. DISENG/AUTOPLT
passescontrol to the control box in command. The
24. NO REPORT. Indicates TCU loss of reception STICKCONTR push-button illuminates to indi-
from the UAV C-Band transmitter or a fault in the cate STICK (RATE) control mode.
TCU antenna.
2. MASTER CAUTION. Illuminated push-button.
25. RTN HOME. UAV reports flying with both Lights when one or more warning lamps in the
uplinks lost while FLT-TO/LD switch is in FLT PCD-2000 or PDP-2000 light except REPORT
position. RETURN HOME is performed accord- INHIBIT.
ing to the last data updated by the station.
Pressing and holding the push-button causes the
26. GLIDE. UAV reports flying with both uplinks lost last illuminated warning lamp to flash.
while FLT-TO/LD switch is in TO/LD position.
UAV autopilot maintains 0 pitch, 0 roll, and en- Releasing the push-button turns the lamp (in the
gine idle. MASTER CAUTION push-button) off.

27. A-PLT MAL. UAV reports malfunction during When the warning lamp that triggered MASTER
Hold modes of one or more of the following cir- CAUTION turns off, MASTER CAUTION also
cuits: altitude, airspeed, and heading. UAV com- turns off.
pares uplink commands with sensor reports.
A-PLT MAL illuminates if one of the following 3. FLT-TO/LD. This push-button predetermines the
conditions exists: resulting flight mode during loss of both uplinks
and address.
a. Difference between altitude commanded and
altitude reported is greater than 500 feet and When TO/LD mode is selected and both uplinks
the rate of climb/descent is less than 100 are lost, UAV goes into Glide mode. UAV APE is
feet/minute for more than 10 seconds (UAV pre-programmed to 0 pitch and 0 roll, and en-
report). gine idle. This prevents Return Home from being
performed when communication is lost during
b. Difference between airspeed commanded and taxi, takeoff, and landing phases.
airspeed reported is greater than 5 knots for
more than 16 seconds (UAV report). When in FLT mode and both uplinks are lost, the
UAV performs Return Home according to the last
c. Difference between heading commanded and RI-I data sent to it. FLT is lit with UAV report after
heading reported is greater than 11.5 degrees the push-button is pressed. TO/LD flashes when
for more than 40 seconds (UAV report). the UAV is in the air and exceeds preset minimum
IAS. This reminds the pilot to switch to FLT
28. A-PLT FAIL. Lights to indicate severe failure of mode. Entering programmed flight automatically
the control flight system when the autopilot senses switches to FLT mode. Disengagement of
higher than permitted pitch and roll rates (rate of DISENG/AUTOPLT switch automatically
roll is greater than 120 degrees/second, rate of switches to TO/LD mode.
pitch is greater than 45 degrees/second). The
warning also lights when electrical power to auto- 4. GEN RESET. Used to reconnect generator to
pilot is interrupted. Warning stays on for 15 sec- EPS after overvoltage disconnection. Pressing the
onds (UAV report). push-button lights it for 5 seconds and GEN FAIL

ORIGINAL 3-6
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

1 10 2 3 4 5 6 23 24 25 14 15
\< \. \ \, \> \, I, ! / / /
/ I I I
PILOT CONTRb DESK \ \ \ \ \ I I/

v 16
2 PROGRAMMER CONTROL -, AJiLL

26 MOB CONTROL
IN0 AmsPEED
KNOTS

27

Figure 3-6. Pilot Control Desk (PCD)

warning light goes off 5 seconds later if reset was 7,8, & 9. PROG/CONTR, KNOB/CONTR,
successful. STICK CONTR. One of these three push-buttons
is pressed to select mode of flight, canceling other
5. REPORT INHIBIT. Pressing this push-button modes. Pressing KNOB/CONTR switches the
blocks UAV reports during flight except when UAV to autopilot control with control circuits
A-PLT FAIL or A-PLT MAL warnings are re- (AIRSPEED, ALTITUDE, ROLL, and
ported. Pressing REPORT INHIBIT at time of HEADING) prepared in advance. If one or more
malfunction lights the push-button as a reminder ofthe circuits is not ready, the flight is not fully au-
of the block. Pressing the REPORT INHIBIT tomatic and STICWCONTR push-button lights
push-button a second time providing UAV lis- together with KNOB CONTR. The lower half of
tens, releases the block and extinguishes the the push-button lights when pressed. The upper
light. Any new malfunction activates the UAV half lights (by UAV report) when one or more cir-
transmitter. When UAV transmitter is on, all cuits have been connected in the UAV. Pressing
warnings, including blocked ones, are reported to STICK CONTR lights the push-button and
station. Verifying a malfunction by pressing the switches UAV to manual/position control. The
push-button a second time releases all blocked control box is switched on at this time and the
warnings. PROG CONTR or KNOB CONTR push-buttons
are extinguished. PROG CONTR mode switches
6. ON/LIGHTS. Two-section illuminated push- the UAV to programmed flight. The bottom half
button used to switch on the UAV lights. When se- illuminates when the push-button is pressed. It is
lected at CBX, top half of light illuminates inside necessary to keep the push-button pressed until
GCS. UAV reports that the mode has been engaged (un-
til the upper half is illuminated). At end of pro-
gram UAV switches to KNOB/CONTR if circuit

3-9 ORIGINAL
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

is at READY position. If the KNOB/CONTR cir- other half lights when KNOB/CONTR is
cuit is not at the READY position, UAV switches pressed and the UAV reports that the circuit
to manual/position control. Pressing DISENG has been engaged. Pressing a lit push-button
AUTOPLT also transfers UAV to STICK again causes it to revert to manual (position
CONTR. control of the circuit, manual aileron and rud-
der control).
10. PROGRAMMER CONTROL
c. ALTITUDE, IND AIRSPEED, HEADING,
a. STEP #. Display of the current programmer ROLL. These four knobs determine the re-
step. spective function data for KNOB/CONTR
mode. They are operational when the adjacent
b. REMAINING STEP TIME. Display of Esti- push-button is in READY position and KNOB /
mated Time of Arrival (ETA) at the point to CONTR push-button is pressed.
which the aircraft is flying, once in Program-
mer mode. After arriving at waypoint, step 12 & 13. PLT BOX, COPLT BOX. Only one of these
time displays remaining holding time. push-buttons can be illuminated at a time.
Pressing the extinguished push-button causes the
c. RUN/PAUSE. Deactivated. (RUN light is al- illuminated push-button to extinguish and the se-
ways on and PAUSE is nonfunctional.) lected push-button to illuminate. When the
STICK CONTR push-button is pressed, the box
d. SSA (Single Step Advance). Pressing this whose push-button is illuminated controls the
push-button advances the RPV programmer UAV. Failure or disconnection of a box prevents
(NAV Card) one active step. It is used when it its push-button from being illuminated from the
is necessary to shorten the current flight step. GCS.
The push-button remains illuminated only
when pressed. This action also switches the 14. COMMUNICATION CONTROL
RUN/PAUSE push-button to PAUSE mode.
a. PRIM UPLINK XMTROVERHEAT. Indi-
e. PROG RESET. Pressing this push-button will cates that primary uplink transmitter is over-
back step the RPV programmer (Nav Card) heating in the TCU.
one active step.
b. SEC UPLINK XMTR/OVERHEAT. Indi-
11. KNOB CONTROL cates that secondary uplink transmitter is over-
heating in the TCU.
a. IAS/READY, ALT/READY. These
push-buttons are used to set airspeed and alti- c. RCVR FAIL. Indicates a failure in the station
tude in KNOB CONTR flight mode. When ei- C-Band receiver.
ther of these switches is pressed, only the
READY light is illuminated. To illuminate the d. PRIM UPLINK XMTR/HI RFL PWR. Indi-
other half, KNOB/CONTR is pressed, engag- cates that reflected power in the primary uplink
ing the circuit. When the UAV reports that a transmitter is too high.
circuit has been engaged, the upper halves of
IAS ALT/READY and KNOB/CONTR are il- e. SEC UPLINK XMTRHI RFL PWR. Indi-
luminated and control is passed to the appro- cates that reflected power in the secondary
priate PCD KNOB controller. Pressing an uplink transmitter is too high.
illuminated IAS ALTREADY push-button
causesit to revert to manual (position) control. f. PRIM UPLINK XMTR/LOW PWR. Indicates
ALT/READY off causes manual throttle con- that transmission power in the primary uplink
trol and IAS/READY off causesmanual eleva- is too low.
tor control.
g. SEC UPLINK XMTIULOW PWR. Indicates
b. ROLL/READY, HDG/READY. These that transmission power in the secondary
push-buttons cannot be operated simulta- uplink is too low.
neously. Pressing one push-button lights the
READY half in one and cancels the READY
half on the other push-button (if it was on). The

ORIGINAL 3-10
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

15. RPV # (display). Digital read-out of the number e. REFLECTED POWER TEST. When pressed,
(address) of the UAV whose downlink the station two XMTR PWR meters read reflected power
is receiving. of each transmitter.

16. STATION #/RPV # (thumbwheels). Left f. TRANSMITTER CONTROL SWITCHES.


thumbwheels switch used to set the station address Two switches, one for each transmitter. Each
(eight addresses possible, 0 to 7). Right has the following positions:
thumbwheels switch used to set the address of the
UAV to which the GCS transmits commands (16 (1) STATION XMTR OFF - Transmitter
addressespossible, 0 to 15). Off

17. PRIMARY UPLINK STATION NUMBER DIS- (2) STATION XMTR ON - Transmitter in
PLAY. LED display that indicates the station operation.
number of the station transmitting the C-Band
uplink on which the UAV C-Band receiver is (3) COMD REQUEST - Transmitter oper-
locked (UAV report). ates and requests command of UAV.

18. SECONDARY UPLINK STATION NUMBER Transferring GCS command from one link to
DISPLAY. LED display that indicates the station the other requires that both switches be placed
number of the station transmitting the UHF uplink (and held) in the COMD REQUEST position;
on which the UAV UHF receiver is locked (UAV the switch of the commanding link must be re-
report). leased first (back to XMTR ON) and then the
switch of the link to which control is to be
19. COMMANDING STATION. Split indicator. Left transferred is released.
arrow illuminates when the primary (C-band)
uplink (from the station whose number is dis- 2 1. TEST. Pressing TEST lights all PCD, PCT, and
played in the primary uplink station number.dis- PDP push-buttons and annunciators and moves all
play) controls the UAV. Right arrow illuminates analog indicators to the full-scale position. TEST
when the secondary (UHF) uplink (from the sta- is continuously lit to indicate that electrical power
tion whose number is displayed in the secondary is reaching the bulbs.
uplink station number display) controls the UAV.
22. RPV XMTR
20. COMMUNICATION DISPLAY AND CON-
TROL AREA a. ON. Pressing this push-button commands the
UAV to operate its transmitter and lights the
a. PRIM UPLINK XMTR POWER/SEC lower half of the push-button. The upper half
UPLINK XMTR POWER. Two analog meters (ON) is illuminated when the UAV transmitter
(one for each uplink XMTR) read transmission is activated and reported via DNL to the GCS.
power. Pressing again switches transmitter off.

b. STATION RCVR/SIGNAL STRENGTH. b. HIGH/LOW. Switches between high and low


Analog meter readsthe strength of the signal at UAV transmitter power for C-band transmitter
station receiver. only.

c. PRIM UPLINK XMTR HIGH/LOW. Used to


switch the primary uplink transmitter to high
or low transmission power. 1 WARNING 1

d. SEC UPLINK XMTR HIGH/LOW. Used to


switch the secondary uplink transmitter to high Do not switch the UAV transmitter to high
or low transmission power. Each press power when the UAV is on the ground, ex-
switches between positions (only low trans- cept for a few seconds during preflight
mission power is available from the PCS UHF checks and on takeoff roll, due to RF
uplink transmitter). HAZARD.

3-11 ORIGINAL
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

c. TRANSP. Commands the UAV transmitter to


operate in the TRANSPONDER mode. The
UAV transmits only when correctly addressed
by the uplink. Pressing this push-button
switches off the UAV XMTR push-button. Use of Nav-to-Coordinate mode not au-
TR4NSP is automatically switched off when thorized.
UAV XMTR push-button is switched on.
Warnings and failures are transmitted in this 27. AUTOLAND/GO AROUND. Two-section illu-
mode. minated push-button for entering the automatic
landing procedure. When pressed, the upper sec-
d. RH DELAY. Pressing this push-button causes tion lights. Pressing again sets UAV to go-around
alternating time delays of 2 seconds mode.
(push-button not illuminated) and of approxi-
mately 30 seconds (push-button illuminated)
before UAV commences Return Home mode
(after both uplink channels lost). During the
time delay, UAV maintains last commanded
flight data. With NVC bypass +YES, the RH Use of AUTOLAND mode not autho-
delay is 2 seconds. rized.

e. LONG/SHORT. Pressing this two-position 28. CAM GUIDE. Illuminated push-button for enter-
push-button selects the long or short frequency ing the camera guide flight mode.
span in C-band. Used to lock the SP/SP aircraft
receiver. 3.1.4.3 Pilot Control Table (PCT) (Figure 3-7).
The PCT is the horizontal control panel where the key-
f. SECURE/CLEAR. Pressing this two-position pad and stick controls are located. The keypad is used to
push-button engages/disengagesthe protected enter and change the menu data for the UAV and the
transmission system. stick controls are used to control the UAV in manual
mode. The functions of the various keys, push-buttons,
23. LAUNCHER. Green illuminated indicator. Light and sticks are as follows:
indicates success of series checks of the launch
system mounted on the vehicle. 1. FREQUENCY SELECTION.

24 & 25. LAUNCH. Illuminated push-button for a. DOWNLINK. Thumbwheels. Selects the sta-
launching the UAV. This feature is no longer uti- tion receiving frequency.
lized; however, the software is still functional.
Once activated, pushing this button a second time b. PRIM UPLINK. Thumbwheels. Selects the
will deselect LAUNCH mode. station primary transmitting frequency.

c. SEC UPLINK. Thumbwheels. Selects the sta-


tion secondary transmitting frequency.
1 WARNING 1
2. DATA CONTROL. The following functional
push-buttons are lit when their control mode is se-
Pressing this button will immediately run the lected. They must be pressed again to get out of
throttle servo to max and lock out all other one mode before another mode can be selected.
UPL commands including remote engine
cut. a. TEST MODE. Functional push-button. Se-
lects the TEST control mode.
26. NAV TO COOR. Illuminated push-button for en-
tering the navigation-to-coordinates mode.

ORIGINAL 3-12
Figure 3-7. Pilot Control Table (PCT)
ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFMqOO

k. DATA INPUT KEYBOARD. Numeric key-


board. Used to enter numerical data and to se-
lect control functions.

3. PILOT BOX CONTROL (PBX).


When the station is in TEST mode, the
UAV cannot be controlled by the pilot. a. READY. Command annunciator that illumi-
This push-button is covered to prevent in- nates when the PBX has been selected on the
advertent selection of this mode. PCD (PLT BOX push-button is illuminated).
When illuminated, the PBX is used to control
b. PRESET. Functional push-button. Selects the the UAV if STICK CONTR is selected. If the
PRESET control mode. 13 menus on screen. autopilot is disengaged, STICK CONTR is au-
tomatically selected. The annunciator stays lit
c. CALBR. Functional push-button. Selects the in any flight mode if PBX is selected on the
CALIBRATION control mode. Used mainly PCD.
during inflight calibration of altitude and
warning limits. #1 menu in presets. b. ENGINE ON/OFF. This switch operates only
in STICK CONTR mode. It is used to cut the
d. FAIL CHECK. Functional push-button. Al- engine. UAV lights must be on for engine to
lows display of malfunction warning message cut.
when the PWR FAIL, GCS FAIL, or RI-I FAIL
warning lamps indicate a malfunction. c. AILERON/ELEVATOR STICK. Controls
pitch and roll axes of UAV with following
e. MULTIFUNCTION. Functional push-button. modes:
Selects the Multifunction control modes.
(1) STICK CONTR/Autopilot Engaged -
f. TARGET ALT. Functional push-button. Al- movement of stick commands angles of
lows inflight updating of the target altitude pitch and roll. Keeping stick in position
data. maintains the required angle. Angle limits
are: Pitch: -17 to +20; Roll: 60 left and
g. CAM GUIDE. Functional push-button. Al- right.
lows selection of the Camera Guide flight
mode and establish holding parameters. (2) STICK CONTROL/Autopilot Disen-
gaged (emergency) - movement of stick
h. NPL. Functional push-button. Selects the commands angles of UAV control sur-
NavProgrammer updating control mode. Used faces and results in rate of pitch/bank pro-
mainly during inflight updating of the naviga- portional to the movement. The stick is
tion program data. spring-loaded and returns to neutral when
released.
i. RI-IL. Functional push-button. Selects the Re-
turn Home Updating control mode. Used d. RUDDER/THROTTLE STICK. A sideways
mainly during inflight viewing or updating of movement of this stick commands rudder and
the RI-I parameters. nosewheel movement throughout their travel.
Fore/aft movement changes throttle position
j. NAV TO COOR. Functional push-button. Al- accordingly. Rudder is spring-loaded and cen-
lows selection and updating of the navigation ters itself. Throttle position stays at last setting.
to coordinate mode.
e. ELEV. TRIM, RUDDER TRIM, AILERON
TRIM. Three trim wheels, one for each control
axis, are used to change PBX commands by up
to 10% for a given stick position.

f. CIRCUIT ANNUNCIATORS. Four lights in-


Use of Nav-to-Coordinate mode not au- dicate circuit mode.
thorized.

ORIGINAL 3-14
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

3.1.4.4 Pilots lV Monitor Panel (PTMP). C on- 8. OVER RANGE. Lights to indicate that pen track-
sists of two 9 video monitors each with its associated ing position is outside the grid coordinates entered
picture adjustment controls. The left monitor displays during map orientation and pen continues to plot
pilots data as selected from the PCT. The right hand in UP position. OVER RANGE is extinguished if
monitor displays payload video or digital information the pen returns to the grid coordinates entered dur-
as selected on the observers left-hand video monitor. In ing map orientation.
the shipboard GCS configuration, the right-hand moni-
tor can display GPS/Antenna Interface Box (IBX) digi- 9. OVERFLOW WARNING. Lights to indicate that
tal information as selected on the PCT. tracking data memory is full. Oldest data coordi-
nates will be lost from memory frost.
3.1.5 Tracking Bay (TBY). The TBY performs
both the navigation data display and tracking control 10: RESET. Pressing this push-button shifts between
functions. The TBY consists of the Plotter Panel (PLP) PRESET and DIAGN modes, to bring the pen to
and the Tracker Control Desk (TCD) (Figure 3-8). The park pen (lower left comer of map) and to
PLP houses the plotter mechanical units (the plotting reinitialize the plotter.
area, the arm, and the pen) and electronic units and is
used to plot the path of the UAV flight. The TCD han- 11. PRESET. PRESET enters the initialization data
dles the tracking logic, the bay preflight and diagnostics for the plotter. That data includes:
test, and the real-time plotter calculations. The TCD is
divided into two sections; the Plotter Control Area and - MAP # (number),
the Tracking Control Area. - Four-map reference points (comers),
- TCU coordinates, and
3.1.5.1 Plotter Control Area. This area on the left - TCU altitude.
side of the TCD has the following indicators and func-
tional push-buttons: 12. DIAGN. This push-button is operative only in RE-
SET mode. DIAGN allows the following checks:
1. MAP#. A single-digit display of the map number
(l-9) for which data is inserted or checked (in a. Map Orientation. The pen goes over the four
PRESET or DIAGN mode, respectively), or of the map reference points and the coordinates are
map being used for navigation. displayed in EAST and NORTH displays.

2. EAST, NORTH. These displays express pen coor- b. TCU Coordinates. The pen marks TCU loca-
dinates in UTM. Both displays exhibit six digits tion (if within plotter table dimensions), and
without decimal points. TCU coordinates are displayed in EAST and
NORTH displays.
3. UTMGEOGR. Pressing this push-button shifts
between UTM and geographic method of coordi- c. TCU Altitude. The altitude is displayed in
nates display, and controls the UTMGEOGR in- NORTH display.
dicator accordingly. In PRESET mode, only UTM
position is possible in this configuration. d. Plotter memory.

4. HOLD DISPLAY. Pressing this push-button e. Plotter hardware.


freezes EAST and NORTH displays for 5 seconds
or as long as push-button is pressed. Releasing re- DIAGN is extinguished only at the end of a suc-
sults in display of actual position. cessful check or when another mode is selected. If
a check is unsuccessful, both DIAGN and the ap-
5. TRACK TARGET. Lights up when the TRACK propriate function push-button stay lit.
TARGET push-button in the OCT has been
pressed. The plotter traces the targets course of 13. MAP ORIENT. MAP ORIENTATION
travel instead of tracing the trajectory of the UAV. push-button is operative only in PRESET or
DIAGN modes. After PRESET is engaged, map
6. MARK TARGET. Illuminates to indicate the reference points are entered clockwise starting
MARK TARGET function has been initiated. from lower left comer. Pen movement is con-
trolled for each direction (+Y, -X, -Y, +X) with the
7. DATA LOSS. Lights if range or azimuth data is four an-owed push-buttons. Coordinates of each
lost. reference point are keyed in local grid when the

3-15 ORIGINAL
2 5 2 679 6 39 34 33 36

\ \ \
1 TRACKER CONTROL\DESK I

1
BORE SIGHT ERROR

10 \ / 38
/ 39
17

13

14

15

27

29

30

32

31 28 19 21 24 25 22 20 26 23 16 18 40 42 44 45
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

pen is located at the respective point. These coor- the pen chooses the smallest possible map scale.
dinates are displayed at time of entry. When map AUTO/MAN is operative only in RUN mode.
orientation is completed, automatic check (diag- MAP #display reads the currently referenced map
nostic) is performed. when shifting either manually or automatically.

14. TCU COOR. This push-button is operative only in 22. PEN L/R. Used to select and interchange the right
PRESET or DIAGN mode. When PRESET is en- and left pens. The lamp inside the push-button in-
gaged and TCU COOR is pressedthe station local dicates which pen is in use. In extreme locations,
grid coordinates are entered in &I meter resolu- the changeover between the two pens is automatic,
tion. In DIAGN mode, the station coordinates are according to which pen can trace in that position.
displayed for 5 seconds and the pen marks the sta-
tion location. The push-button lamp extinguishes 23. RUN. This mode is the normal, working mode of
after a successful check. the plotter. RUN is operative in TRACK mode and
extinguished by pressing LOCAL, STOP, or RE-
15. TCU ALT. Engaging TCU ALT push-button in SET push-button.
PRESET mode allows entry of the station (TCU)
altitude (in meters) into plotter memory. In 24. MAP #. A map number between one and nine can
DIAGN mode, push-button displays TCU altitude be entered following a press on MAP # display.
in North LED. The push-button is operative in PRESET, DIAG,
and MAN (Jump) modes.
16. PEN-MOVING PUSH-BUTTONS. Pressing any
of these push-buttons (only with LOCAL 25. PEN UP. When it is unnecessary or undesirable to
push-button engaged) moves the plotter pen in the plot a course on the map, press the PEN UP
marked direction. To move the pen 45, press two push-button to lift the pen off the map. In case of
push-buttons at a time (these push-buttons must DATA LOSS to the plotter, the pen stays down;
not oppose each other). with resumption of data supply, the pen draws a
straight line from last known point to newly re-
17. CONTSTEP. Determines the type of pen move- ported point.
ment. In CONT setting, the pen moves as long as a
pen-moving push-button remains pressed. In 26. STOP. Halts plotting ofthe course on maps but re-
STEP setting, only a single, predetermined move- ception of data continues. Re-engaging RUN
ment (determined by COARSE/FINE mode causes plotting to resume at a fast pace to
push-button) is made regardless of how long a compensate for the delay.
pen-moving push-button is pressed.
27. NUMERICAL KEYBOARD. Use of the key-
18. COARSE/FINE. Each press of this push-button board is possible in the following modes:
switches between its settings. In STEP mode, plot- PRESET, DIAGN, LOCAL, and MAN (JUMP).
ter pen moves in increments of 0.3 mm in After the desired push-button is pressed, MAP #,
COARSE setting and 0.1 mm in FINE setting. MAP ORNT, TCU COOR, or TCU ALT and a
check program number may be entered in numeri-
19. LOCAL. Pen-moving push-buttons can be oper- cal form. After keying a number, the ENTER
ated only when LOCAL push-button is lit. This push-button lights to indicate that the information
mode is operative in RESET, PRESET, and has to be stored.
DIAGN modes. LOCAL is extinguished ifRUN is
engaged (or when RUN associated TRACK 28. ENTER. Transfers information from the keyboard
push-button is engaged). into plotter memory. ENTER is also used to record
plotter pen coordinates in PRESET mode. The
20. TRACK. Pressing TRACK push-button shifts ENTER push-button lamp is lit by pressing any of
plotter to communicate with the GCS software. the keyboard keys, and is extinguished when
Navigation data and other control commands are ENTER is pressed.
sent to the plotter for plotting.
29. CLEAR. Used to clear (zero) inserted numerical
21. MAP JUMP AUTO/MAN. Each press of this data.
push-button switches the method of shifting be-
tween maps in plotter memory. Manual shift is 30. DELETE. Not used.
done by entering map number, In AUTO setting,

3-17
Al -SRRPV-NFM4IOO

3 1. +/-. Not used. 39. MANUAL/TRACK. When the MANUAL


push-button is lit, the antenna is manually con-
32. Decimal Point. trolled. Deflection of the joystick controls the
sideways movement of the antenna at an angular
3.1.5.2 Tracking Control Area. This area on the velocity relative to the rate ofdeflection ofthe joy-
right side of the TCD has the following indicators and stick. When the joystick is in the center position
functional push-buttons: and the MANUAL push-button is lit, the antenna
remains stationary with no drift. When the
33. AZIMUTH DEGREES. Digital readout of azi- TRACK push-button is lit, the antenna is in AU-
muth (in relation to grid north) from station to TOMATIC TRACK mode and tracks the UAV.
UAV in degrees, tenths of a degree, and hun- Moving the joystick manually while the system is
dredths of a degree. This readout summarizes an- in TRACK mode causesa momentary changeover
tenna axis angle and tracking error and is used for to the MANUAL mode; the MANUAL
antenna north alignment process. push-button lights and the TRACK push-button
extinguishes. Releasing the joystick causes the
34. ANT PWR. Comes on whenever antenna motor is system to revert to TRACK mode.
not receiving power either becauseswitch outside
station is off or there is a malfunction in antenna 40. WIDE/NARROW. Functions only in TRACK
power supply. mode. The halves of this push-button determine
the bandwidth sensitivity of the antenna control
35. TRACKER FAIL. Warning lamp lights to indi- system. When the MANUAL push-button is lit,
cate a failure in the tracking system. the WIDE/NARROW push-button is extin-
guished completely. Moving to the TRACK mode
36 TRACK LOSS. Indicator lamp that notifies of a causes the system to begin at the WIDE mode,
loss of tracking. It is operative only when the sys- which lights. Subsequent depressions of the
tem is in TRACK mode. WIDE/NARROW push-button cause the modes
to interchange.
When the SCAN push-button is not lit and loss of
tracking occurs, the antenna stops at that point and 41. SCAN. Determines the action taken by the system
the TRACK LOSS indicator lamp starts blinking. when a loss of tracking occurs.
The system tries to retrack the UAV for 5 seconds,
the antenna remains in the same position, and the 42. PRIM LINK OMNI/DISH. Switches the trans-
TRACK LOSS lamp remains lit. In this situation, mission and reception of the primary UPL and
the operator must track the UAV and perform a DNL channels between the dish and the
RESET to extinguish the lamp. omnidirectional antennas. Moving the
push-button from DISH to OMNI position en-
When the SCAN push-button is lit and a loss of gages the MANUAL mode. The MANUAL
tracking occurs, the TRACK LOSS indicator push-button lights and the TRACK push-button is
lamp starts blinking and the system begins an an- extinguished (if it was lit). When the push-button
gular scan around the point where the tracking was is in OMNI position, the ATC-2000 cannot be
lost. The SCAN push-button starts blinking. If the moved to the TRACK mode. To move to the
system is able to retrack, the TRACK LOSS lamp TRACK mode, this push-button must be in or
extinguishes and the SCAN push-button emits a moved to the DISH mode. The OMNI position
steady light. If the system fails to retrack the UAV compels the BORE SIGHT ERROR meter to read
after 5 seconds, the antenna stops at the point 0 (the middle position).
tracking was lost. TRACK LOSS indicator lamps
light and SCAN push-button stays lit. In this situa- 43. UAV ANT DIROMNI. Command to UAV al-
tion, the operator must intervene. lowing directional or omnidirectional control of
C-Band antenna. The UAV directional antenna
37. BORE SIGHT ERROR. Indicator used to read only works when the GCS/TCU is in the TRACK
tracking antenna angular error and to lock tracking mode. UAV antenna defaults to OMNI when the
antenna on UAV. TCU omni antenna is selected.

38. RECEIVER SIGNAL STRENGTH. Indicates re- 44. CONTROL STICK. Single axis stick used for
ceived signal strength in ground station receiver. manual control of tracking antenna angle. In mid-
dle position, antenna is stationary. Tilting side-

ORIGINAL 3-18
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

ways commands angular velocity proportional to 3.1.6.2 Observer Video Control (OVC) (Figure
stick deflection. Stick can be operated in MAN- 3-10). The OVC is used to select and control video
UAL or TRACK mode. Tilting stick in TRACK graphics. It also includes provisions for auxiliary video
switches mode to MANUAL until stick is re- hookups, VCR activation, and the light pen used during
leased. artillery spotting missions.

45. TEST. Pressing TEST lights all TCD-2000 1. LIGHT PEN. Connector used to engage light pen
push-buttons and annunciators and moves the for artillery adjustment purposes.
pointers in all analog indicators to their full-scale
reading. TEST is continuously lit to indicate that 2. AUX VIDEO. Connector used for the input of an
electrical power is reaching the bulbs. external video signal for display.

3.1.6 Observer Bay (OBY) (Figure 34). The OBY 3. DIMMER. Two knobs used to control the light in-
consists of an observer television monitor panel tensity (DARK to BRIGHT) of the alphanumeric
(OTMP), an observer video control (OVC), a Video displays that appear on the monitors. It may be
Tape Recorder (VTR), an observer control desk (OCD), necessary to adjust the dimmer controls slightly
and an observer control table (OCT). up or down if flashing white lines appear on the
CRT displays. Also used in optical alignment pro-
cedures.
Y --/
l =n[I IJo WOE0 TELEMETRY RECORD 4. VIDEO GRAPHIC ON. Used to switch alpha-
graphic displays on and off. When in off position,
all alpha-graphic data is turned off, except the
line-of-sight vector (18), north vector (20), and
OBSERVER TV MOfWoR PANEL picture center (cross) (17).

5. VIDEO GRAPHIC ALL/PART. Use of this


push-button is possible only when VIDEO
~OBSERVERTROL DESK
GRAPHIC ON push-button is engaged. At this
stage, ALL is lit, indicating that all alphanumeric
OBSERVER CONTROL TABLE ! information is displayed. Pressing the push-button
switches to PART (partial display of information).
Figure 3-l 1 shows the alphanumeric information
displayed on the OTMP, and the table below de-
scribes the graphics. An asterisk (*) denotes infor-
\ OBSERVER POWER MSTRIBUTIW
mation displayed in PART position.

6. SPARE. Not used.


Figure 3-9. Observer Bay (OBY)
7. VTR RECORD/INACTIVE. RECORD lights
3.1.6.1 Observer Television Monitor Panel when VTR is recording. INACTIVE lights when
(OTMP). The OTMP is the vertical panel mounted in VTR is not recording.
front of the observer that is used to display video data on
two 9-inch monitors. Each monitor has video adjust- 3.1.6.2.1 Graphic Display Field. The graphic dis-
ment controls under the screen. Monitor presentations play field displays graphic information concerning the
are controlled by the observer from the OVC. The video airborne payload. This field is not used in the pilots dis-
presentation should be maintained on the left observer play screen. Figure 3-12 shows the information dis-
monitor because it is hard wired to the pilot bay right played in the graphic display field.
side monitor, which is used for flight. Avideo hard copy
unit is located over the TBY and can be used to provide 1. ANALOG HEADING AND BEARING MDI-
hard copy image of the video displayed on the monitor. CATOR. A dual pointer analog indicator for dis-
Above the monitors is a VTR used to tape video recep- play of TV camera (narrow pointer) and UAV
tion from the payload. The observers video monitors (wide pointer) bearings relative to magnetic north.
are identical to those of the pilot. Both 9-inch video
monitors can display video signals received from the 2. DIGITAL HEADING DISPLAY. Displays the
UAV, OBY-2000 messages, or Playback of VCR data. UAV heading.

3-19 ORIGINAL
AlSRRPV-NFM-OOO

OBSERVER VIDEO CONTROL

Figure 3-10. Observer Video Control (OVC)

8
,9
10
\
\ El23456 N7654321 15132147
14-10-84 11
TAL 2345 /12
AAT 1124 #234 I
HTD 8545 ART 345I/
LEFT 1234 13
ADD 1345
14

-
15

-m (
-

20

- SLB 325
- DEP54 \ 21
SCL 2457-1456

\
I \
l8 17 19 16

Figure 3-11. Alphanumeric Information on the OTMP (Sheet 1 of 2)

ORIGINAL 3-20
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

1. *Target coordinates - on the camera optical axis - east/north coordinates

2. Target altitude above sea level (TAL = Target Altitude) = meters

3. UAV altitude above the target (AAT = Altitude Above Target) = meters

4. Horizontal distance from UAV to target (HTD = Horizontal Target Distance) = meters

5. Graphic display of HTD. Each line equals IOClOm. Lowest line=Om/highest line=l0,OOOm

6. Line-of-sight bearing relative to grid north 9 SLB = Sight Line Bearing) = degrees

7. Line-of-sight depression relative to horizon (DEP - Depression) = degrees

8. *Sequential number of event, appearing for a few seconds during target designation

9. *Time (local time) - hours: minutes: seconds

10. Date - day-month-year

Mission serial number, entered by the operator - 3digit number. The artillery adjustment information
11.
(steps 12-14) appears only during the artillery adjustment procedures.

Artillery adjustment identification number consisting of:


(1) ART: Artillery
12.
(2) 3-digit number: target designation number, defined by the operator
(3) 2digit number: shell sequential number

13. Artillery east/west adjustment data (RIGHT = east/LEFT = west) = meters

14. Artillery north/south data (ADD = north/DROP = south) = meters

Graphic display of the camera field-of-view (FOV) :


(1) Pointer at lowest line
= widest FOV - MKD 200 and 12DS DLTV camera
15.
= super narrow FOV - MKD 400
(2) Pointer at highest line = narrowest FOV - MKD 200 and 12DS DLTV camera
= super wide - MKD 400

Picture scale at the screen center, consisting of:


(1) SCL: Scale
16. (2) 4-digit number: picture scale parallel to the line-of-sight axis
(3) 4-digit number: picture scale perpendicular to the line-of-sight axis. Scale ratio is given in meters
(On ground) tD CentiNIetWS (On SCtWn).

17. *Graphic display of the picture center (cross)

*Graphic display of the ground projection of the line-of-sight on the displayed picture (vector). Vector
18.
direction is toward the center of the picture.

19. Graphic display of where the light pen was pressed. Appears for several seconds.

Graphic display of the north on the picture axes (vector) (20). Vector direction is from the center of
20.
the picture outside.

Graphic display of the gun to target (vector). The gun to target vector is enabled/ disabled by the
21. PRESET/GUNFIRE menu on the observer bay. The geographic coordinates of the gun are also en-
tered via the menu.

Figure 3-11. Alphanumeric Information on the OTMP (Sheet 2 of 2)

3-21 ORIGINAL
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

3. DIGITAL BEARING DISPLAY. Displays the a. COUNTER: Displays the amount of tape
TV camera bearing relative to the UAV nose. travel in hours, minutes, seconds and frames.

4. DIGITAL DEPRESSION DISPLAY. Displays b. TC: The item to be displayed depends on the
the TV camera depression angle relative to UAV setting of the U BIT/TIME switch on the sub
horizontal axis. panel. When the U BIT/TIME SWITCH is set
to TIME: Displays the 8 mm time code. When
5. ANALOG DEPRESSION INDICATOR. Pointer the U BIT/TIME switch is set to U BIT: Dis-
indicating TV camera depression angle. The dot- plays the user bit.
ted area indicates a depression angle at which the
camera is not stabilized. c. DIAL MENU: The unit enters the dial menu
operation mode. The dial menu is displayed. In
3.1.6.3 VTR. The VTR is a Sony model EVO-9850. this mode, any other functions are deactivated.
The VTR records uplink and downlink data, downlink
video, and intercom audio. See Figure 3- 13. 3. TIME COUNTER DISPLAY. Displays the item
selected by time counter display switch.
1. POWER ON/OFF. Two-position switch used to
activate and deactivate unit. 4. RESET BUTTON. When the time counter display
switch (2) is set to COUNTER and the time coun-
2. TIME COUNTER DISPLAY SWITCH. Selects ter display (3) indicates the amount of tape travel,
what is displayed in time counter display as fol- press this button to reset time counter display and
lows: display on the time counter display.

ORIGINAL 3-22
AlSRRPV-NFM-OOO

7 6 8 13 14 15 5 16 17 2 24 327 4 1

9 10 11 12 22 21 20 19 18 23 25 26 28
Figure 3-13. VTR SONY EVO-9850

5. STATUS INDICATORS. These indicators are lo- 10. MODE SELECT SWITCH. Set the switch to
cated in the window below the cassette compart- EDIT to perform editing. The unit is always syn-
ment opening, and light to provide operational chronized with the input video signal regardless of
status information about the unit. the operation mode (record, playback, etc.). Set
the switch to NORMAL in the playback mode.
6. AUDIO LEVEL METERS. These meters indicate The unit is synchronized with the internally gener-
the audio recording level in record or Elec- ated reference signal.
tric-to-Electric (EE) mode. They indicate play-
back level in playback mode. 11. ASSEMBLE BUTTON and INDICATOR. Press
this button to select ASSEMBLE edit mode. The
7. PCM/AFM AUDIO LEVEL CONTROLS. These indicator above the button will light. Pressagain to
controls allow independent adjustment of audio cancel ASSEMBLE edit mode.
record levels.
12. INSERT BUTTONS and INDICATORS. In IN-
8. METER SELECT SWITCH. Selects the audio SERT edit mode, press the VIDEO, PCM CH- 1,
whose level is to be displayed on the audio level PCM CH-2 or TIME CODE buttons to select the
meter. desired input signal (the indicator above the se-
lected button lights). To cancel, press the button
a. PCM: Displays the recording level while the again. The light will go off.
audio input signal is being recorded onto the
PCM track. The meter displays playback level 13. EJECT BUTTON. Ejects the cassette.
during playback.
14. PREROLL BUTTON AND INDICATOR. When
b. AFM: Displays the recording level while the this button is pressed, the tape rewinds for 5 sec-
audio input signal is being recorded onto the onds and stops in the pause mode.
AFM track. The meter displays playback level
during playback. 15. REC (Record) BUTTON and INDICATOR. Press
this button together with the PLAY button to start
9. PHONES JACK and VOLUME CONTROL. Jack recording. Pressing the REC button allows you to
accepts 8 ohm stereo headphones to monitor the monitor the picture and sound in EE mode, as long
signal selected with the MONITOR SELECT as you keep the button held down.
switch. Volume is adjustable with the volume
level control.

3-23 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

16. EDIT BUTTON and INDICATOR. Pressthis but- b. DATA button: While holding down this but-
ton together with the PLAY button to start editing. ton, turn the search dial in JOG mode to set the
Pressing the EDIT button allows monitoring of the data.
picture and sound of the input signals selected
with the ASSEMBLE or INSERT buttons in EE c. SET button: Press this button after changing
mode, as long as the button is held down. one or more items in menu to save the changes.

17. CUT OUT BUTTON. Press this button to finish 25. SEARCH BUTTON. Press this button to place the
ASSEMBLE or INSERT editing. Edit mode is unit in searchmode. Searching with the searchdial
canceled, but the tape continues to run in playback in JOG or SHUTTLE mode will then be possible.
mode. When this button is pressed in record mode,
record mode is canceled. When this button is 26. SHUTTLE/JOG INDICATORS. The SHUTTLE
pressed in pause mode following preroll, edit indicator lights when the unit is in SHUTTLE
mode is canceled. mode. The JOG indicator lights when the unit is in
JOG mode. To change the mode, press the search
18. PAUSE BUTTON and INDICATOR. Press this dial.
button to stop the tape momentarily. To restart
tape, press this button again. When PAUSE is 27. SEARCH DIAL and DIRECTION INDICA-
pressed during recording, the EE picture is dis- TORS. Functions as a search dial menu operation,
played. When PAUSE is pressed during playback, according to the setting of the time counter display
a still picture is displayed. When PLAY, F FWD, switch.
REW or SEARCH buttons are pressed during
pause mode, pause mode will be released and the 28. REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCH. Set this switch to
tape will run in the mode corresponding to the control the unit either locally or from the equip-
pressed button. ment connected to the REMOTE 1 connector on
the rear panel.
19. F FWD (Fast Forward) BUTTON and INDICA-
TOR. Press this button to fast forward the tape. a. REMOTE: The unit is controlled from an ex-
The picture and sound can be monitored in EE ternal unit connected to the 9-pin REMOTE 1
mode during fast forwarding. connector on the rear panel. Setting this switch
to REMOTE disables all the tape transport but-
20. PLAY BUTTON and INDICATOR. Press this tons on the control panel, except for the STOP
button to start playback. Press the PLAY button and EJECT buttons.
together with REC or EDIT button to begin re-
cording or editing. b. LOCAL: The unit is controlled from the front
control panel.
21. REW (Rewind) BUTTON and INDICATOR.
Press this button to rewind the tape. The picture 3.1.6.4 Observer Control Desk (OCD) (Figure
and sound can be monitored in EE mode during re- 3-14). The OCD is a five-module desk that provides se-
winding. lection and control of the UAV payload. Each of the five
module bays are interchangeable and location of each
22. STOP BUTTON. Press this button to stop the tape module is left to the discretion of the local unit.
transport completely. The picture and sound can
be monitored in EE mode during stop mode. 1. MKD 200 PAYLOAD CONTROL MODULE

23. SERVO INDICATOR. Lights when drum and a. VIDEO ON. Two-position push-button used
servo and capstan servo lock during playback. to activate the TV camera. Upper half of
push-button lights when pressed. ON lights
24. DIAL MENU BUTTONS. when video transmissions are received from
UAV.
a. MENU button: While holding down this but-
ton, turn the search dial in JOG mode to select b. IRIS AUTO/MAN. Two-position push-button
the menu item. used to control the camera iris. When AUTO is
lit, the iris opening is controlled automatically
by the camera electronics. When MAN is lit,

ORIGINAL 3-24
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO
ii i 9
\
d 3 z
Figure 3-14. Observer Control Desk (OCD)
3-25 ORIGINAL
AlSRRPV-NFM-OOO

the iris opening is controlled manually by the e. DEPRESSION DEGREES SELECTOR


iris potentiometer. KNOB. Payload sensor platform depression
angle (in relation to UAV horizontal axis) se-
c. IRIS. Manually controls the Payload iris. lector. Operates when payload is in POSI-
TION control mode.
d. FOCUS. Momentary switch used to control
the camera focus in the up/down position, the f. RATE MODE CONTROL ON. This
focus lens moves and the Middle position is push-button is pressed to select the RATE con-
fixed focus. trol mode for the active payload sensor (con-
trolled by the camera control stick on the
e. ZOOM. Momentary switch used to control the OCT-2000).
camera focal length (field-of-view angle). The
IN position (UP) provides narrower 3. MKD 400 FLIR CONTROL MODULE
field-of-view and the OUT position (down)
provides wider field-of-view. a. DATA ON. Push-button (green). When illu-
minated, inserts alphanumeric status of the
f. SPARE. Not used. FLIR sensor display on the OBY video moni-
tor.
2. PLATFORM CONTROL MODULE
b. SPARE. Spare illuminating push-button (yel-
a. For the MKD-200 and MKD-400 payloads, low).
this push-button is pressed to uncage the plat-
form and provide electrical power to the plat- c. HEAT POLAR WHITE/BLACK. Twoposition
form gimbals. The bottom half illuminates illuminating push-button (green). When
when pressed indicating a command was sent WHITE is illuminated, hot objects are repre-
to the UAV to turn on the platform. The top sented as white on the monitor. When BLACK
half illuminates when the UAV reports the is illuminated, hot objects are represented as
platform is activated. When deselected, the black on the monitor.
MKD-200 or MKD-400 payload moves to pi-
lots window position and mechanically cages. d. VIDEO GAIN. Rotary knob used to control
the gain command for FLIR. The control is ac-
Note tive under VIDEO ON (item No. 3k).

Because ofthe electrical drain on the system, e. FIELD OF VIEW NARROW/WIDE.


activation of this button will normally cause Three-position momentary switch used to se-
momentary illumination of the A-PLT FAIL lect camera field of view (super narrow, nar-
warning lamp. row, wide, super wide). Each switch deflection
(narrow or wide) changes the camera field of
b. PAYLOAD SHIELD. Causes the payload view one step in the corresponding direction
shield to move into down position for payload (toward super narrow or super wide, respec-
protection during landing or net retrieval. The tively).
payload shield can only be deployed when the
FLT-TO/LD push-button on the PCD is in the f. FOCUS IN/OUT. Three-position momentary
TO/LD mode. switch. IN position moves the camera focus
lens in. OUT position moves the camera focus
c. BEARING DEGREES SELECTOR KNOB. lens out.
Payload sensor platform bearing (in relation to
UAVs longitudinal axis) selector. Operates g. LEVEL FINE. Rotary knob used for fine tun-
when payload is in POSITION control mode. ing of the screen background level. Active
only when the AUTO/MANUAL push-button
d. POSITION MODE CONTROL ON. This (item No. 3i) is in the MANUAL position.
push-button is pressedto select the POSITION
control mode for the payload sensor platform h. LEVEL COARSE. Rotary knob used for
(controlled by the BEARING DEGREES and coarse tuning of the screen background level.
DEPRESSION DEGREES selector knobs). Active only when the AUTO/MANUAL

ORIGINAL 3-26
AISRRPV-NFM-OOO

push-button (item No. 3i) is in the MANUAL 3.1.6.5 Observer Control Table (OCT) (Flg-
position. ure 3-l 5). The OCT provides control of payload when
operating in rate mode, a keypad for data input, and con-
i. AUTO/MANUAL. Two-position illuminating trol menus for the OBY. It also provides for OBY Iimc-
push-button (AUTO - green, MANUAL - yel- tional tests and calibration. In the preset mode the
low). When AUTO is illuminated, the screen observer uses the keypad to define parameters, input
background gray level is automatically con- data, align the camera and confirm payload installation.
trolled by the system. When MANUAL is illu-
minated, the screen background gray level is 1. CAMERA CONTROL STICK. Joystick used to
controlled manually by the observer using the control the payload line-of-sight when in RATE
FINE (item No. 3j) and COARSE (item No. control mode. Tilting the stick in the desired direc-
3h) knobs. tion moves the camera line-of-sight. The
push-button located on top of the joystick per-
j. VIDEO SPARE. Spare illuminating push- forms different functions for each type ofpayload.
button (yellow). Toggling the push-button with an MKD-200 pay-
load selects between velocity and acceleration
k. VIDEO ON. Two-position illuminating modes. When the joystick is in velocity position,
push-button (green) used to activate the FLIR the rate of change is linear to joystick angle of de-
system. flection. Releasing the joystick will stop move-
ment of the payload. When it is in acceleration
4. AUTOMATIC LANDING position, the rate of change increases with time.
Releasing the joystick allows the payload to con-
a. GROUND VIDEO. No longer used. tinue movement at the same rate until the operator
provides an opposite and equal movement of the
b. AUTO/LAND. No longer used. joystick or selecting velocity position. The
push-button selects between two constant speeds
c. GO AROUND. No longer used. for the MKD-400 payloads. The selections are
d. CUT/ENGINE. No longer used. 4/sec and 40/sec movement.

6 5 4 3

DATA CONTROL

-7

2 1 la

Figure 3-15. Observer Control Table

3-27 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

2. DEPRESSION TRIM. Used to trim drifts and/or h. TARGET ACQUISITION TABLE. Func-
inaccuracies of stick in depression axis. tional push-button that allows the user to enter
the target acquisition menu directly.
3. BEARING TRIM. Used to trim drifts and/or inac-
curacies of stick in bearing axis. i. TARGET ACQUISITION. Functional
push-button used to start the Target Acquisi-
4. TRACK TARGET. Momentary push-button. tion mode.
When pressed, causes plotter to trace the move-
ment of the camera optical axis on the ground (in- j. DATA INPUT KEYBOARD. Numeric key-
stead of tracing UAV trajectory), which helps the board used to enter numerical data and to select
payload operator obtain better orientation. When control functions.
pressed, TRACK TARGET indicator lamp illumi-
nates on PLOTTER CONTROL AREA in 7. TEST PUSH-BUTTON. Used to perform lamp
TCD-2000. When released, plotter returns to its test on OCT.
regular function.
3.2 TRACKING AND COMMUNICATION UNIT
5. MARK TARGET. When pressed, the position of (TCU) (FIGURE 3-16)
the UAV is marked on the plotter and identified by
a sequential number. The target altitude iteration The TCU-2000 controls all UAV-to-station tracking
is begun and the IP is prompted to update TAL. and communication functions, manages the UPL/DNL
RPV tracking data is being stored when this fimc- messages, and performs the preflight and diagnostic
tion is selected. After IP updates and exits TAL tests. The GCS-2000 Antenna System is part of the
menu the GCS updates target coordinates and Communication and Tracking subsystem. It is modular
marks target location on the map with correspond- and is installed on the communication shelter. It con-
ing sequential event number. sists of one C-band omnidirectional transmitting/re-
ceiving antenna, one UHF omnidirectional
6. DATA CONTROL PANEL. The following func- transmitting/receiving antenna, and one C-Band direc-
tional push-buttons are lit when their control tional/tracking antenna mounted on a pedestal. The an-
modes are selected: tenna system enables tracking of and communication
with the UAV up to 185 km. The shipboard configura-
a. TEST MODE. Functional push-button used to tion consists of two sets of C-band and UHF antennas
select the TEST control mode. When the installed on foundations remotely located from the
OBY-2000 is in Test mode, the airborne pay- TCU. Antenna tracking and switching is controlled by
load cannot be controlled by the payload oper- an RF switching box located in the TCU.
ator. The push-button is covered to prevent
unwanted operation of this mode. The TCU is powered by an external generator which
provides single-phase 110 Vat/60-Hz power. In addi-
b. PRESET. Functional push-button used to se- tion a pack of eight batteries (12 Vdc/lOO AH each)
lect the Preset control mode. combines to provide 28 Vdc/200 AH emergency power.
The shipboard configuration replaces the pack of eight
c. FAIL CHECK. Functional push-button that al- batteries with an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to
lows the display of a malfunction warning provide emergency power. The electrical power supply
messagewhen the OTMP-2000 indicates mal- and distribution subsystem and the communication and
function detection. tracking subsystem constitute the major components of
the TCU.
d. MULTI FUNCTION. Functional push-button
used to select the Multifunctional control The electrical power supply and distribution subsys-
mode. tem consists of five components that provide the re-
quired electrical requirements of the TCU and provide
e. TARGET ALT. Not functional. power failure warnings to the internal pilot. The power
supply unit (PSU) is a single phaserectifier that supplies
f. TARGET HOLD. Functional push-button that high-current 28 Vdc power and charges the backup bat-
allows payload to lock on targets. tery pack. The communication power distribution
(CPD) and the shelter electric power (SEP) box provide,
g. ARTILL. Functional push-button that allows monitor, and distribute DC voltages to the communica-
artillery adjustment procedure to start. tions bay and to the antenna. The pilot display panel

ORIGINAL 3-28
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

transmissions and processed for the TV monitors. The


tracking subsystem provides tracking azimuth and UAV
slant range to station. The CTS is made of five major
components.

3.2.2 Communications Control Box (CCB) per-


forms the subsystem calculations and control functions
as well as controls interbay communication for the
SMP.

3.2.3 Microprocessor Controlled Auto-


Tracking Unit (MCAT) controls RF communications
and tracking of the UAV The MCAT performs the track-
ing calculation and control functions of the
auto-tracking system including tracking antenna con-
trol, UAV azimuth calculation, and communications
bay power control and status reports.

3.2.4 Encoder/Decoder Unit (EDC) encodesuphnk


transmissions and decodes downlink receptions and
routes them to the transmitters and CCB respectively.
The EDC is also responsible for UAV to TCU range
calculations.

3.2.5 C-Band Receiver receives downlink from the


UAV, strips the non-coded video signals and sends it to
the GCS, and forwards encoded receptions to the EDC.
Figure 3- 16. TCU It also provides the MCAT with AM data for UAV
tracking.

(PDP) provides a power failure warning light and pro- 3.2.6 Antenna System is installed on top of the
vides a failure messageon the data screen in the event of S-250 shelter and consists of two omnidirectional trans-
a power interruption. mission/receiving antennas, a direction tracking dish
antenna, an RF box, and a pedestal unit. The
3.2.1 Communication and Tracking Subsys omnidirectional antennas are for UHF and C-band
tem (CTS) (Figure 3-17) provides for communica- while the directional dish antenna is used for C-band
tion with the UAV and operates the tracking unit. It only. The RF box routes power to the pedestal unit and
transmits uplink data to the UAV in C-band and UHF RF signals to the communications bay. The pedestal
and receives C-band downlink at ranges up to 185 km. unit rotates the dish antenna to maintain reception with
UAV communications are encoded before transmission. the UAV with a continuous, multi-turn 360 range of
The CTS decodes downlink and encodes uplink com- motion.
mands. Video downlink is piggybacked on the coded

3-29 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

DMYI ANT. MsnANT UHF M

m-0
wt.1 TxSPISP-TCU
cc0 EDC BUS
TCU ECC
TCU t
\
BW WL-2 UPL-2

TX cwma

Figure 3-17. Communication and Tracking Subsystem, Block Diagram

3-30
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

CHAPTER 4

The Portable Control Station (PCS)

4.1 PORTABLE CONTROL STATION (PCS) compartment directly below Primary Flight Control
(PRIFLY). By design it is a mobile/transportable sys-
The PCS is a compact and modular station installed tem manned by one pilot and is used to control the UAV
in three cases.The display case houses the TV monitors during take-off and landings. It has an effective control
and flight instruments, the Flight/command casehouses range of 40 km. When used for split site operations the
the pilot control desk and pilot control table, and the PCS will typically be manned by a crew ofthree: one in-
communications case houses the communications con- ternal and one external pilot and a payload operator. The
trol unit and power distribution panel. The PCS is typi- PCS can extend the maximum range of the UAV by up
cally housed in an S-250 shelter and mounted on an to 40 km and can also help overcome terrain masking
M-1042 HMMWV. For shipboard configuration, the and electronic line-of-sight problems.
PCS is mounted in a standard 19-inch rack installed in a

Figure 4-l. Portable Control Station (PCS)

4-l ORIGINAL
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

4.2.3 Power Supply Subsystem. The PCS is pow-


ered by a 110 Vat 60-Hz external generator and has two
The PCS contains three main subsystems: the flight 12-volt batteries for emergency power. The shipboard
command/control subsystem, communication subsys- configuration replaces the two 12-volt batteries with an
tem, and power supply subsystem. uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to provide emer-
gency power. Electrical supply distribution to the bays
4.2.1 Flight Command/Control Subsystem. The consists of 28 Vdc (for TV monitors), +5 Vdc and *15
flight command/control subsystem allows the pilot to Vdc. The distribution is controlled by two power distri-
perform takeoft7landing and flight control until com- bution units, one for the piloting subsystems and one for
mand ofthe UAV is transferred to the GCS. This subsys- the communications.
tem also allows computerized preflight tests on the
UAV and system diagnostic test on the PCS down to unit 4.3 PAYLOAD CONTROL
level, using the preflight Interactive Test Mode. It con-
tains a TV monitor panel (PTMP), a pilot display panel Control of the payload (MKD-200/400,12DS) can be
(PDP), a pilot control desk (PCD), a pilot control table accomplished using the PCS and the Student Box. To
(PCT), and two flight control boxes. accomplish this, the payload type and payload control
bay must be set using the PRESETWV DATA menu
4.2.2 Communication Subsystem. The commu- (Item # 10 on the PRESET menu) on the PCS. After con-
nication subsystem allows data communication with the trol of the payload is set to PBY, the payload functions
UAV. The subsystem performs the following main fiurc- are controlled by the Student Box and multifunction
tions: Transmits/receives data to/from the UAV, en- menu option, PAYLOAD CONTROL (Item #6). Each
codes/decodes data to/from the UAV, calculates the of the control levers on the student box controls an axis
range to the UAV, and loads Return Home data to the for the camera.
UAV. The communication subsystem contains anten-
nas, receivers/transmitters, and a communication con- The aileron stick controls camera bearing. Pushing
trol unit. the stick to the left/right turns the camera left/right.

1. Antennas. There are two omnidirectional trans- The elevator stick controls camera depression.
mitting/receiving antennas (one C-band and one Pulling back on the stick raises the camera and pushing
UHF), and a directional C-Band horn antenna. forward on the stick lowers the camera.
The horn antenna rotates 359 with a mechanical
stop. The zoom for the MKD-200 payload video camera is
controlled by the throttle stick where idle is zoom out
2. Receivers/Transmitters. There are two transmit- and max throttle is zoom in. For the MKD-400 FLIR
ters, one for C-Band and one for UHF, and one camera, the throttle controls the field of view where idle
C-Band receiver. is widest FOV and max throttle is narrowest FOV.

3. Communication control unit. Encodes/decodes Camera focus is controlled by the rudder stick. Right
the messageto/from the UAV and controls the re- rudder causes payload to focus out, left rudder causes
ceiver and transmitters. High power is not avail- payload to focus in.
able with the PCS UHF transmitter. (Selection of
high power for the secondary link will cause low
power warning lamp to illuminate.)

ORIGINAL 4-2
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

CHAPTER 5

The Payloads

5.1 STABILIZED RECONNAISSANCE b. Full performance from 2 to 10,000 lux.


PAYLOAD FOR DAYLIGHT OPERATION
(MKD-200) (FIGURE 5-1) 2. Line-of-sight Coverage

5.1.1 General. The MKD-200 payload consists of a a. Pitch: from -88 (*3) to 5 (*3), continuous
TV camera mounted on a stabilized platform. The stabi-
lized platform, controlled by the Payload Electronic b. Yaw: 360 multiturn, continuous
Box (PEB), enables setting and stabilization of camera
line-of-sight. The MKD-200 payload is installed in the c. Stabilization: 100 prad (peak max), in both
special payload compartment provided in the UAV. It axes.
receives electrical power from the UAV electrical sys-
tem. Commands to the payload subassemblies (modes 3. Target Detection: up to 18 km
of operation, control of gimbals, camera azimuth, eleva-
tion, camera on/off, zoom, etc.) are received through the 4. Target Recognition: 3 km.
UAV radio uplink (UPL), while payload telemetry and
video data are transmitted to ground control through the 5.1.3 Operational Control Modes. TheMKD-
UAV video and telemetry downlink (DNL). 200 payload operates in the following modes:

The MKD-200 payload is a delicate optical system. It 1. Manual Control mode


requires a special, clean environment for removal and
installation of optical/mechanical assemblies. The 2. Caging Control mode.
LRUs (Line Replaceable Units) of the MKD-200 are the
stabilized platform assembly, the electronic assembly, 5.1.3.1 Manual Control Mode. In this mode, the
the bubble dome, and the cables. Troubleshooting at the observer controls the TV camera line-of-sight to view
LRU level is performed by automatic/interactive tests the area and to perform reconnaissance missions. The
carried out by the pilot/observer in the control station MKD-200 payload can be manually controlled in two
(GCS-2000 or PCS). Preventive maintenance required submodes:
for the MKD-200 consists of bubble dome cleaning and
preflight checks performed from the control station. 1. Rate Control

The MKD-200A is an improved day payload. It is en- 2. Position Control.


closed in the same opaque protective bubble as the
MKD-400. Operating procedures are the same for both 5.1.3.2 Rate Control. The observer controls the rate
MKD-200 and MKD-200A payloads, but video quality of change in the TV camera line-of-sight by means of a
of the MKD-200A is reportedly better than the joystick, located on the Observer Control Table (OCT)
MKD-200. at the control station. Moving the joystick (back, for-
ward, left, or right) moves the line-of-sight (up, down,
5.1.2 Mission Capabilities. The MKD-200 pay- left, or right) accordingly. The rate of change is deter-
load has the following mission capabilities: mined by the angle of the joystick from the vertical
(mid) position in two modes, selected by a velocity/ac-
1. Illumination Range celeration (VEL/ACCEL) switch. When the joystick is
in velocity position, the rate of change is linear to the
a. Effective picture 0.5 to 10,000 lux joystick angle. When it is in acceleration position, the
rate of change increases with time.

5-l ORIGINAL
Figure 5-1. MKD-200 Day Payload

5.1.3.3 Position Control. The observer controls This mode is automatically selected by the
the TV camera line-of-sight by means of two control MKD-200 logic when a failure in the UAVs generator
knobs (one for each axis) located on the payload control is detected (GEN FAIL signal). The MECH. CAGE
panel at the control station The position control has mode has a fixed pitch angle of -6 and a fixed yaw an-
pitch angle authority of -88 (*3) through *5 (zt3). gle of 0. Caging time should be no greater than 10
seconds.
5.1.3.4 Caging Control Mode. In this mode, the
gimbals of the mechanical assembly are locked to the 5.1.3.6 Electrical Caging Mode (ELEC. CAGE).
UAV axes. The MKD-200 can be caged in two sub- The gimbals are electrically caged to the UAV axes, thus
modes. Both submodes are automatically performed by setting the TV camera line-of-sight at a preset pitch an-
the MKD-200 control logic. The MKD-200 operator gle (O to 30) and 0 yaw angle, relative to the UAV
cannot select these modes nor turn them ON/OFF. axes. This mode is automatically selected by the
MKD-200 logic when the communication link to the
5.1.3.5 Mechanical Caging Mode (MECH control station is lost (LOST CARRIER warning).
CAGE). The gimbals are mechanically locked to the
UAV axes by means of an electromechanical device, 5.1.4 Operation Procedures
thus setting the TV camera line-of-sight at -6 pitch and
0 yaw, relative to the UAV axes. 5.1.4.1 Turn-On Procedure. After receiving the
turn-on command from the operator, the MKD-200 pay-
load performs the following:

ORIGINAL 5-2
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

1. Activates the rate gyro unit 2. After 3 seconds(required by the MKD-200 to con-
firm the LOST CARRIER mode), the following
2. Disconnects power to the yaw and pitch gimbal procedures are performed:
motors until there is complete stabilization of the
rate gyro output signals, and then powers the gim- a. The MKD-200 payload is set to Electrical
bals motors Caging mode

3. Releases the mechanical caging of the gimbals b. TV camera operates continuously

4. Sets the zoom lens to maximum field of view c. Iris is set to automatic mode

5. Sets the MKD-200 payload to Manual Control d. Focus freezes in its last position
mode
e. Zoom lens is set to maximum field of view.
6. Performs mnctional tests.
3. The MKD-200 payload returns to normal opera-
5.1.4.2 Turn-off Procedure. After receiving the tion 3 seconds after the emergency termination
turn-off command from the operator, the MKD-200 command is received from the UAV.
payload performs the following:
5.1.5.2 MKD-200 Automatic Functions. The
1. Switches the MKD-200 payload to Mechanical MKD-200 automatic payload functions are performed
Caging mode when voltages out of the designated range are detected
in the MKD-200 payload. In this case, the MKD-200 is
2. At the end of the MECH. CAGE mode, discon- shut off without performing the turn-off procedure, and
nects the MKD-200 payload from the power sup- the turn-on procedure is inhibited.
ply with the exception of the TV camera, which
operates continuously 5.2 STABILIZED RECONNAISSANCE
PAYLOAD FOR DAY/NIGHT OPERATION
3. Sets the zoom lens to maximum field of view. (MKDQOO) (FIGURE 5-2)

5.1.4.3 Optimizing Target Coordinate Accu- 5.2.1 General. The MKD-400 payload consists of a
racy. Target coordinate accuracy is optimized with lightweight FLIR system mounted on a stabilized plat-
steeper camera depression angles. This is because, at a form. The platform is stabilized in two axes by a
steeperdepression, any movement of the camera in ele- pitch-over-yaw type gimbals system. Thus, the plat-
vation results in less linear movement on the ground form enables the FLIR to sustain a fixed line-of-sight
than it would at a shallower depression. Therefore, there (relative to ground) that can be set for various angles by
is less target coordinate fluctuation and potential linear controlling the gimbals system. The platform is con-
coordinate error. Errors can also be introduced by incor- trolled by the Platform Electronic Box (PEB), which re-
rect target altitude (Preset 7 - TAL), barometric pres- ceives control commands and sends status reports via
sure (Preset 5 - Pressure Table), or altimeter cat the UAV CPA cable. The FLIR is a real-time thermal-
(Preset 1) entries, all of which will result in erroneous imaging system, based on the principle of detecting
altitude above target (AAT) values. The effect of these thermal energy radiated by objects encountered in its
errors is also reduced at the steeper depression angles. field of view. The received energy is then converted to a
standard TV image by the FLIR Electronic Box (FEB).
5.1.5 Automatic Payload Functions The MKD-400 Payload is installed in the special pay-
load compartment provided in the UAV It receives elec-
5.1.5.1 UAV Automatic Functions. The UAV au- trical power from the UAV electrical system.
tomatic payload functions are performed when a failure Commands to the payload subassemblies (modes ofop-
is detected in the uplink communication system (LOST eration, control of gimbals, camera azimuth, elevation,
CARRIER warning). Should the MKD-200 payload re- camera on/off, zoom, etc.) are received through the
ceive a LOST CARRIER signal, it proceeds according UAV radio uplink (UPL), while payload telemetry and
to the following steps: video data are transmitted to ground control through the
UAV video and telemetry downlink (DNL).
1. The mechanical and electro-optical assemblies
(i.e., the line-of-sight) freeze in their last positions

ORIGINAL
Al-SRRPV-NFM-OOO

FEB STABILIZED PLATFORM PEB


(FLIR)

Figure 5-2. MKD-400 FLIR Payload

5.2.2 Mission Capabilities. The MKD-400 Pay- The MKD-400 Payload is a delicate optical system. It
load system has: requires a special, clean environment or removal and in-
stallation of opticalfmechanical assemblies. The FLIR
1. Calculated detection and recognition ranges (50% uses a germanium window instead of a bubble dome
probability) for NATO standard target (2.3 x 2.3 x since the bubble dome is not transparent to IR rays. The
4.6 m) FLIR germanium window should be covered by a pro-
tective cover during all inoperative time to avoid dam-
a. Super-wide FOV - Detection: 1.6 km age to the window. The components of the MKD-400
are the stabilized platform assembly (including the
b. Wide FOV FLIR unit), the PEB, the FEB, the two cooling nitrogen
bottles, and the system harnesses. Troubleshooting at
- Detection: 3.1 km the component level is performed by automatic/interac-
tive tests carried out by the pilot/observer in the ground
- Recognition: 1.4 km. control station (GCS-2000). In addition, the payload
system is tested during the UAV automatic test. When
c. Narrow FOV the control station is the PCS-2000, the payload system
can be tested only during the UAV automatic test. Pre-
- Detection: 7.7 km ventive maintenance and ready-to-service operations
consist of cleaning; preflight actions, nitrogen bottle re-
- Recognition: 3.7 km. placement, and window protective cover removal/in-
stallation. Payload calibration procedures can be
2. Line-of-sight coverage performed while the payload is installed in the UAV and
operated in conjunction with the GCS-2000 only. Sys-
a. Pitch: -85 through 0 (*3), continuous tem calibration is performed by the observer from the
observer bay (OBY-200) in the station.
b. Yaw: 360 multiturn, continuous.

ORIGINAL 5-4
The MKD400C is an improved IR sensor that incor- 5.2.3.3 Semi-Automatic Control Modes. The
porates a closed-loop cooling system, eliminating the semi-automatic control modes are GCS-controlled
need for nitrogen. The closed-loop system has a built-in modes. In these only the platform pitch and yaw com-
compressor that provides high-pressure air for cooling mands (line-of-sight) are station-computer controlled;
of the IR sensor. The operating procedures and charac- the remaining payload commands (FOV, focus, video
teristics listed in this section are the same for both pay- gain, and heat polarity) are manually controlled.
loads except that the MKD-400C does not have the time
limits that the nitrogen-cooled MKD-400 has. The semi-automatic/station computer line-of-sight
control modes perform lock on a preselected ground
5.2.3 Operational Control Modes. In order to location (target) or the current line-of-sight. Since the
perform reconnaissancemissions, the observer may use UAV is moving, the line-of-sight parameters must be
several control modes. In these modes the observer is constantly updated. The update ofparameters is done by
able to control the line-of-sight as well as the focus and station computer commands sent to the UAV via the
the FOV of the MKD-400 system. uplinks according to station computer calculations.
There are two semi-automatic control modes: fast target
5.2.3.1 Rate Mode. This mode is selected by press- acquisition mode and target acquisition mode.
ing the RATE push-button on the PLATFORM CON-
TROL module located on the OCD. In this mode the 5.2.3.4 Target Hold Mode. In this mode the pay-
observer controls the rate of change in the plat- load line-of-sight is locked on a manually set ground
form/FLIR line-of-sight by means of the push-button on point (using one of the manual modes). The station cal-
the Observer Stick. There are two fixed velocities, culates the platform pitch and yaw compensation com-
40/sec (high) and 4O/sec(low), selected by pressing the mand. The FLIR will be looking at the ground point as
push-button on the observer joystick (OCT). long as this mode remains selected. This mode is se-
lected by the observer by pressing the TARGET HOLD
The manual rate mode has the following push-button in the DATA CONTROL section on the
specifications: OCT.

1. Yaw angle: 360, multi-turn 5.2.3.5 Target Acquisition Mode. In this mode
the payload line-of-sight is set to a preselected ground
2. Pitch angle: 0 through -85 (*3) point (coordinates). The observer selects the coordi-
nates through the TARGET ACQUISITION MENU us-
3. Slewing rate: 0 through 30tsec ing the SELECT screen.

4. Acceleration rate: At least 60/sec* on both axes The mode becomes active upon pressing the
TARGET ACQUIS push-button in the DATA CON-
5. Line-of-sight: Stabilized (35 urad). TROL section on the OCT. Upon selecting this mode,
the platform line-of-sight will be automatically set to
5.2.3.2 Position Mode. This mode is selected by the selected coordinates and will remain set until the
pressing the POSITION push-button on the PLAT- mode is canceled.
FORM CONTROL module. The observer controls the
position of the platform/FLIR line-of-sight by setting Note
the payload position control knobs located on the
PLATFORM CONTROL module. This mode is not possible in flight control
modes that do not enable the station to re-
The manual rate mode has the following ceive the slant or other flight parameters of
specifications: the UAV in order to calculate the UAV
location.
1. Yaw angle: 360, multi-turn
5.2.3.6 Caging Mode. In this mode the platform
2. Pitch angle: 0 through 85 (*3) gimbals (mechanical assembly) are locked to the UAV
axes. The MKD-400 can be caged in two modes. Both
3. Accuracy: &3 caging modes are automatically performed by the
MID400 control logic. The observer cannot select or
4. Line-of-sight: Stabilized. intervene in these modes of operation.

5-5 ORIGINAL
Al SRRPV-NFM-000

5.2.3.7 Mechanical Caging Mode. The platform the PLATFORM CONTROL module (on the OCD).
gimbals are mechanically locked to the UAV axes by The MKD-400 payload performs the following:
means of an electro-mechanical device, setting the
FLIR line-of-sight at 0 pitch and 0 yaw, relative to the 1. Switches the platform to mechanical caging mode
UAV axes. This mode is automatically selected by the
MICD-400 logic during turn on/turn-off procedures. 2. At the end of mechanical caging, disconnects the
During turn-off the elevation and azimuth motors are power from the platform and maintains power to
disconnected. the FLIR

The mechanical cage mode has the following 3. Sets the field of view to WIDE FOV.
specifications:
5.2.4.3 Functional Test Procedures. The pay-
1. Fixed pitch angle: 0 load functional test should be performed after installa-
tion or replacement of an MKD-400 system. This test is
2. Fixed yaw angle: 0 also carried out as a performance check of the Payload
MKD-400 System.
3. Accuracy on both axes: Hl.5
5.2.4.4 Preflight Procedures. The MKD-400 pre-
4. Line-of-sight: Not stabilized flight tests are performed within the UAV preflight test.
There are functional tests that may be performed instead
5. Caging time: 15 set (max). of the preflight test. Before starting the preflight test en-
sure nitrogen bottles are on the platform and the germa-
5.2.3.8 Electrical Caging Mode. The platform nium window protective cover has been removed.
gimbals are electrically caged to the UAV axes. This is
done by compensation commands to the gimbal motors, 5.2.4.5 In-flight Procedures. Before turning on
setting the FLIR line-of-sight at a preset pitch angle (de- the MKD-400, get mission commander approval and
pression) of 0 to -30 and yaw angle to O, relative to announce Platform ON. Turning ON the MKD-400
UAV This mode is automatically selected by MKD-400 system could cause the A PLT FAIL warning lamp to
logic upon a UAV report of communication loss for at light due to overloading of the power bus and a momen-
least 3 seconds. tary power loss identified by the AUTO PILOT system.

The electrical cage mode has the following Note


specifications:
Every time the FLIR is turned on, it uses an
1. Fixed pitch angle: 0 to -30 (laboratory preset) amount of nitrogen equivalent to approxi-
mately 20 minutes of flight time.
2. Fixed yaw angle: 0
1. During launch/recovery, platform should be set in
3. Accuracy on both axes: Stabilized. POSITION mode and oriented aft (bearing 180
and depressed45) to minimize potential damage
5.2.4 Operation Procedures to the germanium window. For RAT0 launch
camera should be caged to minimize damage from
5.2.4.1 Turn-On Procedure. The MKD-400 logic the RAT0 bottle.
performs the turn-on procedure in response to the ob-
server pressing the ON push-button on the PLATFORM 2. After recovery, when the UAV has stopped, turn
CONTROL module (on the OCD). The MKD-400 pay- OFF the PAYLOAD CONTROL and wait 25 sec-
load turn-on procedures include the following items de- onds until the platform is mechanically caged.
tectable by payload operator:
5.2.4.6 Optimizing Target Coordinate Accuracy.
1. Sets the field of view to WIDE FOV Target coordinate accuracy is optimized with steeper
camera depression angles. This is because, at a steeper
2. Sets the control mode to manual rate mode. depression, any movement of the camera in elevation
results in less linear movement on the ground than it
5.2.4.2 Turn-Off Procedure. The MKD-400 logic would at a shallower depression. Therefore, there is less
performs the turn-off procedure in response to the ob- target coordinate fluctuation and potential linear coor-
server pressing the ON (setting to OFF) push-button on dinate error. Errors can also be introduced by incorrect

ORIGINAL 5-6
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

CHAPTER 6

The Remote Receiving Station (RRS)

6.1 THE REMOTE RECEIVING STATION 6.1.2.1 Tracking Unit Assembly (TUA). The
(RRS) (FIGURE 6-l) TUA consists of the Pedestal Assembly, which receives
downlink (DNL) signals through a directional (HORN)
6.1 .I Purpose and Use. The Remote Receiving antenna or an OMNI Assembly. The antennas are
Station (RRS) is designed to receive and display mounted on a manually controlled tracking plate that al-
real-time data transmitted from the UAV. The data re- lows tracking of the UAV. The TUA is designed to fit an
ceived by the RRS consists of a video picture from the MT-60 standard antenna mounting. If the UAV is trans-
day camera/IR sensorpayload in the UAV. The payload, mitting via the directional antenna, the RRS must be lo-
which is remotely controlled from the control stations, cated within the beam width for downlink reception. If
continuously transmits a picture of the surveyed area, the UAV is transmitting in OMNI, only distance limita-
which is displayed on the RRS monitor. This video con- tions apply.
tains no graphic or any other parametric data.
6.1.2.1.1 Directional Antenna (HORN). The
6.1.2 General Description. The RRS consists of HORN provides directional 359 azimuth coverage and
two main subsystems: the Tracking Unit Assembly elevation coverage of*12. It operates in the frequency
(TUA) and the Main Unit Assembly (MUA). range of4.5 to 5.5 GHz with a gain of24 dB. The HORN
receives with a horizontal beam width of 9 and a verti-
cal beam width of 12.

6.1.2.1.2 Omnidirectional Antenna (OMNI). The


OMNI Antenna provides 360 azimuth coverage for the
frequency range 4.8 to 4.99 GHz with a gain of 4 dB.
The OMNI antenna receives within a horizontal beam
width of 360 and a vertical beam width of 30.

6.1.2.1.3 Pedestal Assembly. The Pedestal As-


sembly consists of a moving part on which the Tracking
Plate Assembly is installed and a static part (Pedestal
Assembly base). The Pedestal Assembly includes a DC
motor, a transmission gear, and a central axis. The DC
motor receives its power from the command panel via a
control cable. The motor revolutions are transmitted to
the central axis through the transmission gear. The
Tracking Plate Assembly is mounted on the central axis
and is able to rotate bi-directionally 359. The two an-
tennas are mounted on the antennabase and their output
is applied to the down converter, which selects the re-
ceiving antenna according to control signals from the
main unit. The down converter receives the OMNV
HORN selection signal and DC power from the Main
Unit through the antenna control cable. The down con-
verter output is provided to the receiver through an RF
cable.
Figure 6-l. Remote Receiving Station

6-l ORIGINAL
OMNI OFF

H
Q

LEFT RIGHT

Figure 6-2. RRS Main Unit Assembly

6.1.2.1.4 OMNI Assembly. The OMNI Assembly cooling fan operation. The PSA receives 24Vdc from an
provides the first amplification stage for the C-band RF external source and supplies the voltages for system op-
signal and selects the receiving antenna. The OMNI As- eration. A cooling fan motor is located on the PSA and
sembly consists of a coaxial switch, which receives the rotates a fan to decreasethe MUA internal temperature.
two RF signals from the OMNI and HORN antennas The motor is activated by a relay in the monitor
and a control signal from the command panel. assembly.

6.1.2.2 Main Unit Assembly (MUA). The MUA 6.2 SITE SELECTION AND DEPLOYMENT
consists of four main subsystems.
Select an appropriate deployment site considering
6.1.2.2.1 Receiver Unit. The RF signal enters the the following:
receiver and is delivered to the mixer through a filter.
The video signal detected is amplified and delivered to 1. Altitude. Find the highest site in the area to afford
the Main Unit monitor and to the VIDEO OUT output. maximum reception.
The operating frequency is determined by push-buttons
on the receiver front panel, which permit selection of 2. Concealment. Find a site affording minimal expo-
one of ten preset channels, in ~-MHZ steps. sure.

6.1.2.2.2 Command Panel. The command panel is 3. Free Line-of-Sight. Find a site free of obstacles
a three-toggle, two-knob (up, down) panel for turning (buildings, trees, etc.) that may interfere with di-
the system on and off and controlling monitor bright- rect RRS-UAV communication.
ness and contrast. The panel also allows the selection of
HORN or OMNI antennas, and controls the pedestal 4. Easy access to communication with controlling
rotation. station and supported unit.

6.1.2.2.3 Monitor Assembly displays the vid- 5. UAV flight profile that assures video reception.
eo picture.

6.1.2.2.4 Power Supply Assembly (PSA) includes


the Power Supply Box Assembly and a motor for

ORIGINAL 6-2
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

-.-A 7

1. Pedestal Assembly
2. Antenna Receptacle
3. Bolts (Four)
4. Tracking Plate
5. Bolts (Four)
6. Cable W-2
7. Horn Assembly
8. Ext. Ant. Connector
9. Cable W-3
10. RFOut
11. RF In
12. Cable W-4
13. Control
14. Control In
15. Cable W-l
16. RFOut
17. Cable W-9
18. Antenna Control
19. Omni Assembly

Figure 6-3. RRS Tracking Unit Assembly, Setup

6.3 RRS SETUP 4. Connect coaxial cable W-2 (6), which connects
the HORN antenna (7) to the EXT. ANT. connec-
6.3.1 TUA Setup (Figure 6-3) tor (8) on the OMNI assembly (19). Tighten con-
nectors.
Note
5. Connect coaxial cable W-3 (9) to connectors RF
The numbers in parenthesesrefer to those in OUT(10)ontheOMNIassemblyandRFIN(l1)
Figure 6-3. on the pedestal. Tighten connectors.

1. Remove TUA from containers. 6. Connect control cable W-4 (12) to connectors
CONTROL (13) on the OMNI assembly and
2. Place the pedestal assembly (1) on the antenna re- CONTROL IN (14) on the pedestal. Tighten con-
ceptacle (2) as high as possible, and secure using nectars .
four bolts (3).
7. Connect coaxial cable W- 1 (15) to connector RF
3. Place the tracking plate (4) on the pedestal assem- OUT (16) on the pedestal assembly. Tighten con-
bly, and secure using four bolts (5). nector.

63 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

8. Connect control cable W9 (17) to connector AN- maximal reading on the SIGNAL STRENGTH
TENNA CONTROL ( 18) on the pedestal assem- meter.
bly. Tighten connector.

9. Adjust the elevation ofthe HORN antennaaccord-


ing to the expected direction of the UAV. Eleva-
tion of HORN antenna is adjusted by loosening Do not electrically drive antenna past me-
adjustment knob on rear horn mounting bracket, chanical stops.
positioning antenna as required, and tightening
adjustment knob. 6. Ensure that a clear video picture is displayed on
the monitor whenever a signal is received from the
6.3.2 Main Unit Setup UAV. Adjust BRIGHT and CONTR knobs on
command panel as necessary.
1. Slide the MUA onto the base, ensuring that align-
ment pins are matched, and secure using two lock- Note
ing wing bolts.
At very low environmental temperatures, the
2. Connect cable W-9 to the ANT CONT connector main unit requires a warm-up period. During
on the control panel. Tighten connector. this period, the video picture may be blurred.

3. Connect coaxial cable W-l to the RF IN connector 6.4 MISSION PROCEDURES


on the receiver unit panel. Tighten connector.
6.4.1 Standby Mode. Before receiving the UAV
4. Ensure that power is supplied to the RRS main unit transmissions, verify the following:
assembly (24Vdc) with cabling provided.
1. POWER ON/OFF switch is in ON position.
6.3.3 RRS Startup
2. POWER indication light is illuminated.
1. Turn POWER switch to ON. Ensure that the
power lamp illuminates. 3. Antenna selector is in HORN position.
2. Select the operation frequency channel by means 4. HORN antenna is pointed in the direction of the
of the up and down push-buttons. expected appearanceof the UAV.
Note 5. Receiver channel corresponds to the UAV
downlink signal frequency.
Under current configuration, Channel 16 or
1 is used for operation. 6. None of the LEDs illuminate (no reception) on the
SIGNAL STRENGTH meter.
3. Set the OMNIAIORN switch to the OMNI posi-
tion. Check that the SIGNAL STRENGTH indi- 7. Monitor operatesproperly; white noise (snow) ap-
cator on the receiver unit indicates a reading above pears (no reception).
l/14 of its length (i.e., a signal is received).
6.4.2 Operation Mode. After the UAV downlink
4. If the signal is too weak (less than /z of the meter signal is received, the TUA should be rotated using the
length), set the OMNI/HORN switch to the AZIMUTH switch on the command panel, until a maxi-
HORN position. mal reading on the SIGNAL STRENGTH meter and a
clear video picture on the monitor are attained.
5. Rotate the HORN antenna by means of the AZI-
MUTH switch on the command panel to reach a

ORIGINAL 64
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

CHAPTER 7

System Limitations

7.1 OPERATING LIMITATIONS Note

7.1.1 Introduction. The limitations set forth in this While engine temps above 230C and below
section are the result of flight test & operational experi- 260C are authorized, the GCS and PCS
ence. Close attention must be given to the text since it software will illuminate the ENG TEMP
represents limitations that are not necessarily repeated warning light at or above 230C. Refer to
on the instrument markings. If limitations are exceeded, section 13.3.2, ENGINE TEMP emergency
report it immediately. Further flight should not be at- procedures, for appropriate response to an
tempted until the air vehicle is inspected by qualified ENG TEMP warning light.
maintenance personnel.
7.1.3 Roll and Pitch and Yaw Limitations
7.1.2 Engine Limitations
Autopilot Engaged
Static Idle RPM
(Payload & Lights Off) ..........................3200-3500 rpm Roll: Knob control ..............................,...30 AOB
Stick control ...................................60 AOB
Minimum Static Full throttle rpm ....................6700rpm

Cylinder Head Temperature ..................... 110C (Min.)


231C to 260C (Max. 4 minutes)
Bank angles in excess of 30 should be
avoided when UAV is not in sight.

Pitch: Knob control .................................+18, -14


l Continuous engine operation at idle for Stickcontrol .................................+20,-17
more than 30 seconds in flight, while not
within glide range to landing site, should Yaw: Knob control .........................................&lo
be avoided. Stick control ..........................................*20

l If engine temp exceeds 260C at any time, Autopilot Disengaged


or the temp is held at or above 23 1C for
more than 4 mins. duration per occur- Roll: ............................................................90 AOB
rence, the mission shall be aborted. Pitch: ..................................................................*60
Yaw: ..................................................................*20
l The engine temp should not exceed 240C
for a period of one hour after the engine
has operated in the 23 1C to 260C tem-
perature range. If the engine temp ex-
ceeds 24OC, immediately initiate cooling
procedures.

7-1 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

7.1.4 Airspeed Limitations 5. Negative g for more than 3 set

Maximum 6. Flight in known icy conditions.

Knob control.. ............................................ ..95 KIAS


Stick control .............................................. 1 10 IUAS
Nav programmer ........................................ .80 KIAS

Minimum l Flight in rainy conditions should be


avoided.
Still air .........................................................55 IUAS
Rough air .....................................................60 KIAS l Avoid flying in winds over 60 knots at al-
titude.
.
7.1.5 Maneuvering Load Factors
l Avoid flying in areasin which downdrafts
G limits .......................................................+3g/- 1.5g are expected.

7.1.6 Altitude Envelope 7.1 .lO Autopilot Limitations. When altitude hold
mode is used, the following procedures shall be
Min altitude ..........................................................ELOS followed:
Service ceiling ................................................. 12,000 ft
Absolute ceiling ............................................... 15,000 A 1. TP 309 shall be monitored for 15 seconds during
level off for cruise or following airspeed increase.
7.1.7 Maximum Weight
2. If TP 309 is greater than 0.2, reduce airspeed
Options II and II+: and/or altitude so that TP is 0.2 or less; or

Rolling Takeoff ...............................................205 kg 3. Use stick throttle to continue mission,


RAT0 or Pneumatic Takeoff ..........................203 kg

7.1.8 Wind Limitations (Takeoff 8 Landings)


w
Maximum headwind .....................25 kts, gusts to 30 kts
Maximum crosswind ..................... 15kts,guststo20kts Operations in Altitude Hold Mode to include
Maximum tailwind .................5 kts (RATO/Pneumatic) Programmer and Camera Guide Modes
Maximum tailwind ...........................5 kts (Rolling T/O) when TP 309 is greater than 0.2 may cause
damage to servo throttle unit. This condition
7.1.9 Prohibited Maneuvers may lead to a stuck throttle and subsequent
loss of air vehicle.
1. Intentional spins

2. Inverted flight, rolls, or loops

3. Intentional stalls below 1200 ft. AGL

4. Rates of descent greater than 480 ft/min on land-


ing

ORIGINAL 7-2
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

7.2 GCS-2000 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM


LIMITATIONS

Control shelter Do not switch UAV transmitter to high


power on ground until insuring all ground
DC ..........................................................28 (%4)Vdc personnel are clear of UAV nose area.
AC ...................................................... 1lO(%lO)Vac
60 (*2) Hz (3-phase) 7.4 UPLlNKlDOWNLlNK FREQUENCY

Communications shelter Primary uplink (C-band)

DC ..........................................................28 (*4) Vdc Frequency ................................................. .4.55 GHz


AC ...................................................... 1lO(*lO)Vac Bandwidth.. .............................................. .12.5 MHz
60 (*2) Hz (single phase) Power.. ....................................................... .30 Watts

7.3 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS RANGE Secondary uplink (UHF)


LIMITATIONS
Frequency range.. ............................... .420-470 MHz
Primary uplink (C-band) ................................... .185 km Bandwidth.. ................................................ .600 KHz
Secondaryuplink(UHF). .................................. .185km Power (50 watt XMTR) ............ .45.7 dBm at antenna
Downlink.. ........................................................ .185 km
Downlink (C-band)

Frequency range.................................... .4.8-4.9 GHz


Bandwidth .................................................... 10 MHz
Power.. ....................................................... .30 Watts

Pneumatic
Launcher
Hazard Zone: No personnel should
(30 deg both be in launch hazard
sides of front of zone during launch.
launcher to 100
meters)

Note
RAT0 Exhaust
RAT0 exhaust
Products Hazard
plume should be
Zone: 200 ft.
avoided for 2 min.
radius from center
after launch or until
dissipation.
RAT0 Explosive
(unprotected) Hazard
Zone: 500 ft.
radius from center

Figure 7-1. Launch Hazard Zones

7-3 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

El DOUBLEHEARING PROTECTIONREQUIREDATALL TIMES


!Y!si DOUBLE HEARING PROTECTIONREQUIREDDURING HIGH POWER
SINGLE HEARING PROTECTIONREQUIREDAT ALL TIMES

Figure 7-2. Noise Hazard Zones

ORIGINAL 7-4
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

PART II

Indoctrination

Chapter 8 - Indoctrination Procedures

31 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL


AlSRRPV-NFM-000

CHAPTER 8

Indoctrination Procedures

8.1 INTRODUCTION complete the local unit EP check flight before qualifica-
tion is certified.
This section describes the minimum training and re-
fresher training required for achieving and maintaining 8.4.2 Internal Pilot (IP). The IP shall complete the
qualifications in key UAV operating billets. course of instruction outlined in the current CNET
trainee guide. In addition, the IP shall satisfactorily
8.2 TRAINING SYLLABUS complete the local unit IP check flight before qualifica-
tion is certified.
Standard training for each aircrew position involves
initial training at the Department of Defense UAV 8.4.3 Payload Operator (PO). The PO shall com-
Training Center (DUTC), with follow-on training at the plete the course of instruction outlined in the current
tactical unit. CNET trainee guide. In addition, the PO shall satisfac-
torily complete the local unit PO check flight before
8.2.1 Initial Training (DUTC). All personnel with qualification is certified.
UAV-specific MOSS and NECs must have successfully
completed the appropriate course of instruction at the 8.4.4 Internal Operator (IO). The IO shall com-
DUTC at Ft. Huachuca, AZ. plete the course of instruction outlined in the current
CNET trainee guide. In addition, the IO shall satisfacto-
8.2.2 Unit Training. Upon completion of the appro- rily complete the local unit IO check flight before quali-
priate initial training syllabus the trainee will complete fication is certified.
tactical training at the local command in accordance
with the current training manual and local directives. 8.4.5 Mission Commander (MC). The Pio-
neer Mission Commander is a specific UAV flight crew
8.3 DESIGNATION AND DESIGNATING position responsible for Mission Commander and Pilot
AUTHORITY In Command responsibilities as delineated in
OPNAVINST 37 10.7 series. The MC shall possessad-
8.3.1 Designation. Personnel will be designated to a vanced knowledge of UAV capabilities, limitations,
specific position only after successfully completing the employment considerations, and airspace coordination
prescribed courses of instruction for the position, and requirements. The MC must be fully familiar with all
receiving certification thereof by the designating au- stations and major components of the UAV system. The
thority. The certificate shall state the position in which ultimate responsibility for safety of flight rests with the
the individual is qualified and shall be placed in his/her Mission Commander. The MC shall complete the local
aircrew qualification jacket. unit MC check flight before qualification is certified.

8.3.2 Designating Authority. Commanding offi- 8.4.6 Crew Requirements


cers or offtcers in charge of Pioneer units are authorized
to issue certificates for specific crew positions in their 1. The minimum crew required to conduct range
units. flight is MC, IP, IO, and EP.

8.4 QUALIFICATIONS 2. The minimum crew required to conduct local


touch-and-go training without a payload is EP and
8.4.1 External Pilot (EP). The EP shall complete IP. In this case, the Pilot at Controls (PAC) fulfills
the course of instruction outlined in the current CNET the PIC responsibility as delineatedin OPNAVINST
trainee guide. In addition, the EP shall satisfactorily 3710.7 series.

8-l ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

3. All instructional flights will be under the supervi- the past 90 days shall be given a refresher flight under
sion of a certified instructor for the crew position the supervision of a certified instructor.
receiving instruction.
8.4.8 NATOPS Evaluations. Each crew position
4. Split site operations shall require a certified IP to shall complete a written examination and a flight evalu-
man the PCS whenever the UAV can be controlled ation annually.
by that station.
8.4.8.1 Written Examination. The written exami-
5. A certified crew chief will be present for all engine nation shall consist of open and closed book sections
starts. and test practical knowledge of equipment employment
and emergency procedures. The exams shall consist of a
6. Ground personnel and wing walkers will receive minimum of 40 and 20 questions respectively. Mini-
appropriate training at unit level prior to taxiing an mum acceptable scores are 3.5 and 3.3, respectively.
operating UAV. The written examination shall be administered not more
than 30 days prior to the flight evaluation.
8.4.7 Currency
8.4.8.2 Flight Evaluation. The flight evaluation
8.4.7.1 External Pilots. EP currency will be based may be conducted on any flight and should test practical
on Figure 8-1. The requirements must be met within a knowledge of equipment employment and emergency
60-day period to maintain currency. A training device procedures.
for EPs can be a % scale Pioneer, MiG RC aircraft, or the
PC-based EP simulator. To regain currency, a re- 8.4.8.3 Definitions
currency flight will be flown with an EP instructor con-
sisting of: 1 takeoff, 5 touch and gos (T&G) or low Qualified - that degreeof competence demonstrated
approaches (LA), and 1 landing. Also, before a by a crewmember who has good knowledge of standard
recurrency flight, the EP shall conduct 1 hr of training operating procedures and thorough understanding of
device with an EP instructor. their area of the UAV system.

If the EP has not flown in one week, the EP shall uti- Unqualified - that degree of competence demon-
lize a training device for 1 hour, prior to a Pioneer flight. strated by a crewmember who fails to meet the minimum
A day flight must be flown within 5 days prior to a night acceptablestandards.The individual should receive indi-
flight. An EP instructor may accumulate training device vidual, supervised instruction until qualified or until per-
time during an instruction period. Actual flight hours manently unqualified.
may be substituted for training device hours on a 1-for- 1
basis. Commanders of units without available training 8.4.8.4 Waivers. Unit commanders are authorized to
devices may waive training device requirements. waive, in writing, minimum flight and training require-
ments where recent experience and knowledge of UAV
8.4.7.2 Internal Pilot, Mission Commanders, operations warrant.
and Payload Operators. IP, MC, and PO that have
not operated Pioneer in their respective positions within

EP Currency Takeoff/Launch T&G or LA Landings Training Device

Shore Day 2 10 2 6hrs

Shore Night 1 5 1 2hrs

Sea Day 2 10 2 6hrs

Sea Night 1 5 1 Phrs

Figure 8- 1. External Pilot Currency Chart, 60&y Requirements

ORIGINAL 8-2
Al SRRPV-NFM400

Part Ill

Normal Procedures

Chapter 9 - Flight Preparation

Chapter 10 - Shore-Based Procedures

Chapter 11 - Shipboard Procedures

33 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL


Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

CHAPTER 9

Flight Preparation

9.1 MISSION PLANNING 9.1.3 Weight and Balance

9.1 .l Introduction. Adequate and thorough plan- 1. Basic weight of a UAV includes all fixed operat-
ning of the flight is necessary to assure the successful ing equipment and trapped fuel and oil.
completion of any mission.
2. Operating weight is the basic weight of a UAV
9.1.2 Factors Affecting UAV Lift Capability plus payload, fuel, oil, and all special equipment
required for the mission.
9.1.2.1 Humidity. The performance charts contained
in Part VII of this manual presume the aircraft to be op- 3. Maximum gross weight is the total weight (UAV
erating in air of standard composition. Standard air plus all contents) at which the UAV may take off.
is perfectly dry; consequently, the density altitude com- This weight takes into consideration performance
puted from the appropriate chart in the NATOPS will be and structural limitations of the UAV and must not
less than the actual density altitude if operating in humid be exceeded.
air.
4. Useful load is the difference between operating
Air saturated with water vapor (100 percent relative weight and maximum gross weight.
humidity) will be approximately 97 percent as dense as
standard air. Therefore, when operating under saturated 9.1.4 Mission Planning. Mission planning has two
conditions, density altitude computations from requirements. The first requirement is for pilots and op-
NATOPS should be adjusted upward by 1,000 feet (ad- erations personnel to calculate normal and emergency
just proportionately if relative humidity is less than 100 air vehicle operating capabilities concurrent with exist-
percent). ing ambient conditions and mission requirements prior
to every flight on a daily basis. The second requirement
In cases where performance is depicted in terms of is preparation of planning documents for a future sup-
pressure altitude rather than density altitude, the effects port mission. The planning is normally prepared from
of humidity may be considered by: weather summaries and consideration of predicted
weather in the area. Weather summaries suitable for
1. Determining dry density altitude by taking pres- preparation of such estimates can be prepared or ob-
sure altitude and outside air temperature into the tained by any authorized weather facility with a fore-
density altitude chart. casting ability. UAV operations should be conducted in
VFR conditions to the maximum extent possible.
2. Adding the humidity correction to the determined
dry density altitude. 9.1.4.1 Frequency Deconfliction. Emlx&edUAV
operations require planning consideration of possible
3. Working the density altitude chart backward to electromagnetic interference (EMI) from various emit-
find the effective pressure altitude corresponding ters currently onboard LPD-class ships. EMI studies
to the wet density altitude. concluded that the Pioneer UAVs UHF uplink is sus-
ceptible to AlCSPS-40 (Air Search Radar) interference.
4. Using effective pressure altitude in those perfor- A 15-MHz separation between UHF secondary uplink
mance charts requiring pressure altitude input and the SPS-40 Air Search Radar should reduce any
(and wet density altitude in those requiring den- degradation experienced.
sity altitude input).
Prior to any land or ship operations at locations other
than homeguard, considerations should be given to

9-l ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

frequency management. As a guide, when operating the 4. Have crews prepare their respective documents
UAV in an environment containing potential EM1 inter- prior to the brief (gross weight limitations, load
ference from ship radar, air defense radar, microwaves computation card, and any locally required docu-
as well as UAV operations involving another UAV unit, ments).
frequency separations of 0.05 GHz (downlink) and 15
MHz (uplink) are recommended. Coordination between 5. Use appropriate briefing guides for the type mis-
unit commanders is highly recommended to mitigate sion being performed.
the possibility of one units uplink commands interfer-
ing with another units UAV. A briefing shall be conducted using a briefing guide.
On training flights, the appropriate syllabus guide will
9.1.5 Fuel Planning. Fuel planning should be per- be used stressing learning objectives, maneuvers to be
formed before flight using fuel performance charts in demonstrated, maneuvers to be introduced, and com-
Chapter 16. Consideration should be given to winds mon errors and causes.
aloft to arrive overhead the landing site with at least 8 li-
ters of fuel remaining. 9.2.2 Briefing Guide

9.1.6 Equipment List. The below listed equipment 1. Administrative information should be reproduced
is considered the minimum essential equipment for for handout at the beginning of the briefing and is
UAV operations. not covered verbally.

1. One operable control station with operational pri- a. Roll call, flight assignments
mary and secondary control links.
b. WX
2. Operable lights and IFF transponder equipment to
(1) local
comply with FAA requirements.
(2) enroute
3. Backup electrical supply.
(3) forecast.
4. Operational return home mode of flight.
c. Time hack
5. Two-way communication between the UAV con-
d. General
trol station and appropriate airspace authority.
(1) air vehicle number
9.2 BRIEFING/DEBRIEFING (2) call sign
9.2.1 Briefing. Proper and thorough briefing of (3) event number
flight crews is as crucial to mission successas thorough
(4) mission number.
planning. As such, it should be conducted in the most
logical, least time consuming, most organized manner
e. Mission
possible. Every effort should be made to have all flight
crewmembers available at each brief. (1) configuration
(2) fuel
The person delivering the brief should orchestrate the
proceedings to achieve maximum effectiveness. Some (3) payload
methods to achieve this are as follows:
(4) weight.
1. Have everyone in place and begin the brief on
f. Times
time.
(1) start
2. Seat crew positions together. By doing this, you
(2) take-off
save the time lost by people moving to their next
briefing positions. (3) time on target
(4) landing.
3. All administrative information should be repro-
duced and passed to all aircrewmen initially.
g. Type launch/recovery

ORIGINAL 9-2
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

h. Controlling agencies b. Aborts

i. Operation area (1) ground


(2) takeoff
j. Hazards to flight
(3) downrange.
k. VTR
c. Lost communications
1. Special considerations (1) UAV
(1) split ops (2) flight crew
(2) night (3) control agencies.
(3) RAT0 d. Inflight emergencies
(4) others.
e. Crew coordination
2. Mission profile
f. Safety.
a. Intelligence brief
9.2.3 Debriefing. A proper debriefing shall be con-
(1) enemy situation
ducted after all training and operational flights. This is a
(2) friendly situation. very important phase of the flight in that a vast majority
of our learning comes from the consolidation of con-
b. Supported units structive criticisms from all crewmembers. Mistakes
can be discussed in an atmosphere free from distrac-
c. Mission statement / commanders intent tions. The types of information derived from debriefs
are threefold and are as follows:
d. Concept of operations
1. Note how well a pilot/payload operator performed
(1) departure maneuvers/duties on a training flight. Good points
(2) enroute can be brought out as well as the reasons for and
corrective actions for problem areas.
(3) target area
(4) RTB. 2. On operational flights, discuss how well the mis-
sion was accomplished. Also discuss tactics used,
e. Coordinating instructions effectiveness, improvements to tactics, and any
new item that may affect future operations.
(1) restricted areas
(2) maps/charts, declination, inclination 3. Obtain first-hand intelligence information from
flight crews. Essential elements of information
(3) return home plus any new or unusual circumstances that could
(4) bingo fuel influence future operations should be discussed.
(5) intelligence/authentication
A debriefing guide shall be used for debriefing. For
(6) elevation/dish antenna. training operational flights, the syllabus guide or appro-
priate briefing guide should be used. This allows you to
3. Emergencies examine systematically each maneuver and its accom-
plishment, all mission goals, all tactics involved, and
a. Ground emergencies any other items that had a bearing on the mission.

9-3 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL


Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

piiiz-WARNING) 4. Commanding UPL ...........REQD/OFF (XFER IP)

Note
RPV transmitter should not be placed on
HIGH on deck unless personnel are beyond Once both station addresses begin to flash,
3 ft of the antenna and only for brief periods the transferring IP should release his UPL
of time to prevent PCU overheating. transmitter switch first. This action places
the receiving station in command ofthe RPV
8. DNL Frequency Thumbwheel ................ SET (IP) and automatically reverts the transferring
station transmitter to the non-commanding
9. UHF UPL Frequency ..............................SET(IP) mode. Once the transmitter is secured by the
transferring IP, both stations should observe
10. Primary UPL/Code ...........SHORT/SECURE (IP) the RPV RCVR, ADDR LOSS, and LINK
LOSS warning lights illuminate for what is
11. Presets now the non-commanding link.

a. Cal & Warnings 5. Commanding UPL ..........................ON (RCV IP)

b. Range Cal 6. Non-commanding UPL ...................ON (RCV IP)

c. RPV Data Note

d. RI-I Settings. Both stations should observe the RPV


RCVR, ADDR LOSS and LINK LOSS
10.3.2.5.2 Control Station Transfer. The follow- waming lights extinguishfor the non-command-
ing procedures should not be conducted until command ing link.
of the vehicle is to be transferred. Once commenced,
this checklist should not be interrupted. Although voice 7. Preferred
communication is encouraged, tactical situations may Commanding UPL .......a.........SELECT (RCV IP)
dictate a no communication transfer. Detailed briefing
and training are required for no communication trans- Note
fers. For split site operations, pre-transfer coordination
can be conducted via radio, phone, e-mail or message. The selection for preferred uplink is based
on which freq band is likely to be more sta-
1. Control Box/ ble. The decision should be based on EMI,
Flight Mode ............................VERIFY (RCV IP) atmospheric conditions, etc.

2. Non-commanding UPL ................OFF (XFER IP) 8. Return Home Data ......LOADNERIFY (RCV IP)

Note 9. Primary UPL Code ................AS REQD (RCV IP)

Both stations should observe the RPV 10.3.2.6 Engine Shutdown. This checklist is pro-
RCVR, ADDR LOSS and LINK LOSS vided for shutting down the engine in a non-emergency
waming lights iiiuminate for the non-command- situation. The intent is to preserve all preset data and
ing link. battery life in order to effect a quick turnaround for sub-
sequent launch.
3. Non-commanding UPL .......ON/REQD (RCV IP)
1. Wheels ......................PINNED/CHOCKED (CC)
Note
2. External Power ................................OFF (IP/CC)
Both stations should observe the RPV
RCVR, ADDR LOSS and LINK LOSS 3. External Power Cable ..........CONNECTED (CC)
warning lights extinguishfor the non-command-
ing link. Additionally, the station addressfor 4. External Power ..........................*.......ON (IP/CC)
the requesting station should begin flashing.
5. Battery Switch ......................................OFF (CC)

ORIGINAL 1o-2
6. ERC Switch.. ................................ OFF/CUT (CC) Power.. ............................................................... H
XMTG ................................. ON(IfTransmitting)
10.4 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE Power Failure.. ............................................... OFF
VSWR Failure ............................................... OFF
The Mission Commander should not accept the UAV XMTG/STBY ........................................... XMTG
System for flight until he is assured that the UAV Sys- Channel 2 Frequency Selector .............. AS REQD
tem is satisfactory for safe flight and accomplishment of Main power light ............................................. ON
the assigned mission. The two major steps to be taken Remote light.. .................................................. ON
prior to acceptance of the UAV are careful examination ON/OFF switch ............................................... ON
of the recent discrepancies and a thorough preflight Local/remote switch ............................. REMOTE
inspection.
7. CCB - Communication Panel
10.5 PREFLIGHT INSPECTION
All warning lights .......................................... OFF
10.5.1 TCU Preflight Inspection ON/OFF switch.. ............................................. ON
Test push-button light.. .................................... ON
1. AC Entrance Panel
8. MX 1IOSB-GPS (As Required)
Generator selected ........................................ 1 or 2
Corresponding light Power .............................................................. ON
(Gen 1 or Gen 2). ........................ ILLUMINATED Setup.. ........................................... COMPLETED

2. AC Distribution Panel 9. Battery box circuit breaker ................................IN

115 Vat light.. ............................ ILLUMINATED 10.5.2 GCS Preflight Inspection. Maintenance
Circuit Breakers ................................. CHECKED daily inspections and interactives establish operational
(ON AS REQD) readiness for a given system configuration. Operator
preflight inspection ensures the integrity and operation
3. DC Distribution Panel for the given system configuration. The external pilot
(EP) shall ensure that control box cannon plugs are
Battery Warning Light.. ................................. OFF locked into their detents.
PS Fail Light .................................................. OFF
DC Main Light.. ......................... ILLUMINATED 10.5.2.1 GCS Electrical Panels
DC Main Indicator.. ........................... .28 Vdc (k2)
Circuit Breakers .............................................. ON 1. Generator selector Switch ............GENl or GEN2
RADIO.. ............................................... AS REQD
DC main selector switch ...................................... 1 2. Three-phase
Buzzer ................................................ ENABLED indicator lamps ..........................ILLUMINATED

4. Auxiliary Control Unit 3. Voltage meter


(inall3phases) ..................... 1lSVAC(*lOVAC)
Elevation actuator breaker.. ............................. ON Current meter
Dish angle, basedon Mission.. .............. AS REQD (in all 3 phases)...................................CHECKED
Radio power source ............................. .AS REQD Frequency meter ..........a........................60Hz(*2)
Actuator direction.. ........................................ OFF
4. Circuit breakers on .............................CHECKED
5. Horizon power supply (CPS 253A)
5. GCS lighting ...............................AS REQUIRED
DC ampere meter.. ........................... .25 AMP (*2)
DC voltage meter.. ............................. .28 Vdc (%2) 6. Warning panel ................................ALL LIGHTS
Power indication lights.. .................................. ON EXTINGUISHED
Power circuit breaker.. ..................................... ON
7. Battery
6. UHF Transmitter
Voltage ................................................... 28V (*4)
Channel Selector.. .............................................. .2 Current.. .................................................... .OAMP

10-3 ORIGINAL
8. Supply power A-PLT MAL ............................................ OFF
A-PLT FAIL ............................................ OFF
Voltage.. ............................................ .28 Vdc (*2) PRIM LINK: RPV RCVR,
Current ............................................ .25 AMP (*5) ADDR MODE, LINK LOSS .................... OFF
COMD INHIB.. ........................................ OFF
9. Electrical Power
applied to UAV .......................................VERIFY b. RPV System Data

10.5.2.2 Air Conditioner ENGINE RPM.. ............................................ .O


ENGINE TEMP ................. INDICATES OAT
1. MODE Selector ....................................AS REQD FUEL.. .......................................... CHECKED
BUS VOLTAGE.. ........................ .28 Vdc (*2)
2. TEMP level ..........................................AS REQD
c. RPV Flight Data
10.5.2.3 Intercommunication System
ATTITUDE
All stations activated ....................................CHECK INDICATOR .,................... -0 PITCH/ROLL

10.5.2.4 Pilot Bay Note

1, Communication warning lamps ....................OUT The attitude indicator shall be confirmed for
correct launch attitude as follows:
2. TV monitors on/adjusted ........................VERIFY
For RAT0
3. Pilot and Observers Presets..........COMPLETED Launch ......................................+14*2 pitch
For Pneumatic
Note Launch ..........................+ 10.5+6 or -2 pitch
IAS ...................................................O-20KTS
Refer to PRESETS section of this checklist RATE OF TURN .........................................0
for details. TRACKING
AZIMUTH ..........................REFLECTS TCD
4. Pilot Display Panel AZIMUTH DISPLAY
RPV HEADING ..........................REFLECTS
a. Warnings UAV HEADING
ALTITUDE (METER/
LOW IAS.. ................................................. ON NUMERICAL DATA) ............VERIFIED AT
LOW ALT ................................................. ON SE/V-FIELD LEVEL
LOW FUEL.. ............................................ OFF RATE OF CLIMB .........................................0
PLT BOX ................................................. OFF RANGE ................REFLECTS UAV RANGE
COPLT BOX.. .......................................... OFF FIELD LEVEL/SEA
VTR INACTIVE ....................................... ON LEVEL SWITCH ...................FIELD LEVEL
PWR FAIL ............................................... OFF
GCS FAIL.. .............................................. OFF d. Time Data
TEST MODE ........................................... OFF
PROG FAIL ............................................. OFF MISSION TIME ............................................0
RI-I FAIL .................................................. OFF LOCAL TIME .................a...........REFLECTS
ENG TEMP ............................................... ON CURRENTTIME
BAT-I FAIL.. ............................................. ON
EPS FAIL.. ............................................... OFF 5. Pilot Control Desk
GEN FAIL ................................................. ON
ENG CUT ................................................. .ON DISENG/AUTOPLT.. ................................... OFF
SEC LINK: RPV RCVR, MASTER CAUTION.. .................................. OFF
ADDR VAC, LINK LOSS ....................... OFF FLT-TO/LD .............................................. TO/LD
NO REPORT.. ........................................ ..OFF GEN RESET.. ................................................ OFF
RTN HOME ........................................... ..OFF REPORT INHIBIT.. ...................................... OFF
GLIDE .................................................... .OFF ON/LIGHTS.. ................................................ OFF

ORIGINAL 10-4
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

LAUNCH MODE, XMTR POWER and


LAUNCHER, LAUNCH.. ............................. OFF STATION RCVR SIGNAL
PROG CONTR .............................................. OFF STRENGTH (meters). .................................. .6
NAV TO COOR ............................................ OFF HIGH/LOW.. ............................ AS DESIRED
AUTO LAND/GO AROUND ....................... OFF PRIM UPL and SEC UPL
CAMERA GUIDE.. ....................................... OFF (toggle switches). ......... STATION XMTRON
KNOB CONTR ............................................. OFF TEST Push-button.. ........................ PRESSED
STICK CONTR.. ............................................. ON ALL PBY lamps, push-buttons, annunciators,
PLT BOX ........................................................ ON meters and digital displays ............ CHECKED
COPLT BOX ................................................. OFF
Note
a. PROGRAMMER CONTROL ................. OFF
STEP #. ..................................................... SET All meters should be pegged except for the
REMAINING STEP/TIME.. ......... VERIFIED fuel meter, which will read 30 liters. All digi-
RUN/PAUSE ................................. BOTH ON tal displays should read eight (8) except for
SSA.. ........................................................ OFF the altitude, mission time and local time
PROGRESET ......................................... OFF readouts. All lights and pushbuttons should
be lit.
b. KNOB CONTROL
6. Pilot Control Table
ROLL .......................................................... .O
ROLL READY .................... ILLUMINATED READY light.. ................................................. ON
IND AIRSPEED.. ............................... .70 KTS RUDDER, AILERON,
IAS READY ........................ ILLUMINATED THROTTLE, ELEVATOR lights ................... ON
HEADING.. .................................... AS REQD ENGINE ON/OFF Switch.. ............................. ON
ALTITUDE.. ............................ 1000 FT. AGL ELEV TRIM.. ............................. MAXIMUM UP
ALT READY ....................... ILLUMINATED RUDDER TRIM .............................. CENTERED
POSITION
c. RPVXMTR AILERON TRIM.. ........................... CENTERED
POSITION
ON/OFF .................................................... .ON THROTTLE STICK .................................... IDLE
HIGH/LOW ........................................... LOW
TRANSP.. ................................................ OFF 10.5.2.4.1 PCS Integrity Checklist
RI-I DELAY.. ............................................ OFF
SECURE/CLEAR.. .......................... SECURE External Power Supply:
LONG/SHORT ............................... AS REQD
Voltage Meter.. ......................................... .28 Vdc
d. COMMUNICATION CONTROL ICS / Radio .............................................. CHECK
PPD:
PRIM UPLINK: +15 Vdc Supply Circuit Breakers ............. OFF
OVERHEAT, 28 Vdc Systems Circuit Breakers ............... ON
HI RFL PWR, LOW PWR ........................ OFF CPD:
DOWNLINK: All Circuit Breakers ........................ AS REQD
RCVR FAIL.. ........................................... OFF P.S. Lamp.. .............................................. OUT
SEC UPLINK: BAIT Lamp ............................................. .ON
OVERHEAT, BATT Warning Lamp ............................. OUT
HI RFL PWR, LOW PWR.. ...................... OFF CCB - Communication Panel:
RPV# (display). ............................. VERIFIED All Warning Lamps ................................. OUT
STATION#/RPV# ON/OFFSwitch.. ...................................... ON
(Thumbwheel). .............................. VERIFIED Lamp Test Switch.. ............................. CHECK
COMMANDING
STATION (arrow) ........................... SEC UPL 10.5.2.5 Tracking Bay
STATION# (displays). .................. VERIFIED
1. Plotter panel maps.......................... POSITIONED

1o-5 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

2. PRESET Maps to DISWOMNI ....................................... ..OMN I


Plotter ........................................... COMPLETED RPV ANT ........................................... ..OMN I
TEST (push-button). ............................ PRESS
Note LAMPS/METERS ....................... CHECKED

Refer to Tracking Bay PRESETS in the 10.5.2.6 Observer Bay (Observer)


PRESET Section of this checklist.
1. Observer Control Table
3. Tracker Control Desk
PRESET Menu.. ............................ COMPLETED
a. Plotter control Multifunction Menu ...................... COMPLETED
Target Acquisition Menu .............. COMPLETED
MAP # ........................................... VERIFIED
EAST/NORTH/SOUTH ............... VERIFIED 2. Video Telemetry Recorder
UTMGEOGR ........................................ UTM
RESET.. ..................................................... ON POWER .......................................................... ON
PRESET, DIAGN, TAPE.. ............................ LOADED/REWOUND
MAP ORIENT, TIME COUNTER
TCU COVR, TCU ALT.. .......................... OFF DISPLAY SW.. .................................. COUNTER
DATA LOSS ............................................ OFF TIME COUNTER DISPLAY ................... RESET
OVER RANGE ........................................ OFF LOCAL/REMOTE.. ................................ LOCAL
TRACKTARGET ................................... OFF AUDIO LEVELS.. ....................................... .ODB
MARK TARGET.. ................................... OFF (EXCEPT PCM CH3 (VOICE)
OVER FLOW .......................................... OFF ADJUST TO LEVEL 2)
CONTISTEP.. ................................. AS REQD PHONE LEVEL .............................. MIDRANGE
COARSE/FINE ....................................... OFF MODE SELECT.. ................................ NORMAL
LOCAL .................................................... .ON METER SELECT.. ............................... AS REQD
TRACK .................................................... OFF ASSEMBLE.. ................................................ OFF
AUTO/MANUAL.. ............................ ASREQ INSERT INDICATIONS .............................. OFF
L/R pen selection ........................... LEFT PEN TAPE TRANSPORT INDICATORS ........... OUT

Note 3. OTMP ............................................................. ON

Verify left pen light illuminates on tracker Note


arm.
Both adjusted (do not change size of screen
RUN ......................................................... OFF w/video).
MAP#. ...................................................... OFF
PEN UP .................................................... OFF 4. Observer Video Control

Note LIGHT PEN.. ................................ CONNECTED


AUX VIDEO .................... ..EXTERNA L VIDEO
Verify pen in up position on tracker arm. CONNECTED AS REQD
DIMMERS ....................................... ADJUSTED
STOP ....................................................... OFF VIDEO GRAPHIC BUTTONS......A S DESIRED
VTR RECORD / INACTIVE ............. INACTIVE
b. Tracker Control
5. Observer Control Desk
Azimuth Degrees ............................ AS REQD
ANTPWR ................................................ OFF a. AUTOMATIC LANDING.. ........ ALL PUSH-
TRACKER FAIL ..................................... OFF BUTTONS OFF
TRACK LOSS ......................................... OFF
MANUAL ................................................ .ON b. MKD-200 Payload (Used for both MKD-200
TRACK.. .................................................. OFF and MKD-200A)
WIDE/NARROW.. .................................. OFF
SCAN.. .................................................... .OFF VIDEO ...................................................... ON

ORIGINAL 10-6
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

Figure 1O-l. Pioneer RPV Exterior Inspection

IRIS.. .................................................... AUTO BEARING TRIM and


IRIS MANUAL KNOB .............. CENTERED DEPRESSION TRIM .........................a.AS REQD
FOCUS.. ................................................... SET
ZOOM.. ....................................... ..M AX OUT 10.5.3 PIONEER Preflight Inspection
c. MKD-400 Payload 10.5.3.1 Exterior Inspection (Figure 10-i). The
exterior inspection (preflight) should be conducted to
VIDEO.. .......................................... AS REQD detect possible discrepancies, which could result in the
LEVEL.. ............................................... AUTO unsafe flight operation of the Pioneer Air Vehicle.
DATA ....................................................... .ON
HEAT POLR.. ................................. AS REQD 1. NOSE COWLING:
FIELD OF VIEW ..................... SUPER WIDE
FOCUS.. ................................................... SET a. Nose Cowling Fasteners: Check for security,
and missing fasteners.
d. PLATFORM CONTROL
b. BPU Static Ports: Check for security and for
ON push-button ......................................... ON obstructions.
POSITION/RATE
CONTROL push-buttons .............. POSITION c. Pitot Tube: Check for security and obstruc-
BEARING DEGREES ............................. .180 tions.
DEPRESSION DEGREES.. .......................... 0
PAY LOAD SHIELD ............................. ..OFF d. Nose Light Unit: Check for security of compo-
nents.
6. Observer Control Table
2. FUSELAGE NOSE SECTION (LOWER NLG
All push-buttons ............................................ OFF AREA):

1o-7 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

a. Nose Wheel Stops: Inspect mechanical stops 4. PAYLOAD PACKAGE MKD-200, MKD-400,
for nose wheel travel limits. A AND C MODELS:

b. Servo Arm Fastener: Check for security and a. MKD-200: Check for integrity of payload
proper assembly of components. bubble to include check for cracks, moisture.

c. Nose Landing Gear Strut: Check for structural b. MKD-400: Check for security of unit.
integrity to include mechanical components.
Ensure proper alignment of nose wheel in Au- 5. MAIN WING (LEFT SIDE PANEL):
topilot Disconnect.
a. Wing Tip (Left): Check for security and ab-
d. Wheel and Tire Assembly: Check for freedom sence of fasteners. Check for security of navi-
of movement (should not have excessive play gation lighting.
on axle assembly) and wear of rubber tire com-
pound. b. Aileron Unit (Left): Check for binding of unit
against adjacent areas. Inspect aileron surface
e. Pneumatic Launch (Strap) Catch Release for signs of structural failure and/or excess
Mechanism: Check for function if utilizing wear ofhinge point pivots. Lift up and down on
pneumatic launcher for flight operation. wing to note proper autopilot functioning.

3. FUSELAGE (LEFT SIDE): Note

a. Main Upper Hood: Check for security of fas- Some Pioneer models may incorporate
teners to include those missing, and associated breakaway damage resistant surfaces. In-
fasteners to include the Directional Antennae, spect for integrity of components.
IFF Strobe assembly, and GPS package.
c. Servo Aileron Left (SAL): Check for mechani-
b. Forward Left Rail Launch Guide: Check for cal integrity of linkages and associated hard-
security and inclusion of fairing. ware including left aileron surface.

c. Upper Main Wing Mounting Points: Check for d. Left Wing Panel: Inspect for signs of structural
mounting pin(s)/safety clips and for security to failure (i.e. cracks around mounting point, ex-
include possible cracks or other structural cessive drooping of wing panel, excessive
anomalies. wear of mounting point pin holes, cracks in the
wing panel, or wing covering deterioration).
d. Lower Main Wing Area: Check for possible
fuel leaks around wing mounting points to e. Wing Strut Mounting Point: Inspect for secu-
lower fuselage area and cabling conduit. rity of pin through wing and associated hard-
ware.
e. Access Panels and Hatches: Check for security
of fasteners, to include missing fasteners. f. Tail Boom Mounting Point (Let? Side): Check
for signs of cracking and inspect for security of
f. Rear Left Rail Launch Guide: Check for secu- tail boom mounting bolts (3).
rity and inclusion of fairings.
6. TAIL BOOMS (LEFT AND RIGHT SIDES): In-
g. Toggle Switches to include: Battery, ERC, spect for security and damage to boom structure.
Comm, and VGU. Check for preset positions
and security of switches. Note

h. Upper Cowling (Engine): Check for security Some UAV models are equipped with alu-
of fasteners to include missing fasteners and minum boom structures while others are
structural cracking. constructed of composite materials.

i. Lower Cowling (Engine): Check for security 7. HORIZONTAL STABILIZER:


of fasteners to include missing fasteners and
structural cracking.

ORIGINAL 10-8
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

a. Horizontal Stabilizer: Inspect structure for e. Rear Right Rail Launch Guide: Check for se-
cracks or other visible signs of damage. In- curity and inclusion of fairings.
spect attachments to tail boom assembly for se-
curity. Inspect attachment to vertical stabilizer f. Upper Cowling (Engine): Check for security
assembly and associated hardware. of fasteners, to include missing fasteners and
structural cracking.
b. Elevator Surfaces: Check for integrity of units
including hinge pivot points for wear, and po- g. Lower Cowling (Engine): Check for security
tential binding against adjacent areas. of fasteners to include missing fasteners and
structural cracking. Check for excessive fuel
c. Servo Elevator Units (SEU): Inspect for me- leakage or oily deposits.
chanical integrity to include linkages, safety
wiring, and associated hardware. 10. MAIN WING (RIGHT SIDE PANEL):

8. VERTICAL STABILIZER (LEFT AND a. Wing Tip (Right): Check for security and ab-
RIGHT): sence of fasteners. Check for security of navi-
gation lighting.
a. Vertical Stabilizer: Inspect for structural
cracks or other visible signs of damage. Check b. Aileron Unit (Right): Check for binding of
and inspect attachment points to horizontal unit, and against adjacent areas. Inspect aile-
stabilizer to assure security. ron surface for signs of structural failure and/or
excess wear of hinge points pivots.
b. Vertical Stabilizer Tips: Check for security of
fasteners to include navigation lighting fix- c. Servo Aileron Right (SAR): Check for me-
tures. chanical integrity of linkages, and associated
hardware to include right aileron surface.
c. Rudder Units: Inspect for integrity of unit to
include hinge pivot points for wear, and poten- d. Right Wing Panel: Inspect for signs of struc-
tial binding against adjacent areas. tural failure (i.e., cracks around mounting
points, excessive drooping of wing panels, ex-
d. Servo Rudder Unit (SRU): Inspect for me- cessive wear of mounting point pin holes,
chanical integrity to include linkages, safety cracks in the wing panel, or wing covering de-
wiring, and associated hardware. terioration).

e. Vertical Stabilizer Skid Plates: Inspect for e. Wing Strut Mounting Point: Inspect for secu-
binding against rudder assembly due to tail rity of pin through wing and associated hard-
strikes. ware.

9. FUSELAGE (RIGHT SIDE): f. Tail Boom Mounting Point (Right Side):


Check for signs ofcracking, and inspect for se-
a. Forward Right Rail Launch Guide: Check for curity of tail boom mounting bolts. (3)
security and inclusion of fairings.
g. Flux Valve Unit (FVU): Inspect for secure
b. Upper Main Wing Mounting Points: Check for mounting.
mounting pin(s)/safety clips, and for security
to include possible cracks or other structural 11. FUSELAGE (AFT UPPER SECTION):
anomalies.
a. BEU Access Hatch: Check for security of fas-
c. Lower Main Wing Area: Check for possible teners and associated bolts and hardware.
fuel leaks around wing mounting points to Check for structural cracks and signs of fa-
lower fuselage area and cabling conduit. tigue.

d. Access Panelsand Hatches: Check for security b. Main Wing Fairing: Check for security of fas-
of fasteners, to include missing fasteners. teners to include missing fasteners or mount-
ing bolt hardware.

10-9 ORIGINAL
Al-SRRPV-NFM-OOO

12. MAIN LANDING GEAR (MLG) UNIT: Note

a. Landing Gear Strut: Check for possible There should be freedom of movement until
delamination of fiberglass components includ- encountering of compression stroke (visual
ing structural cracking. inspection through exhaust stack).

b. Main Landing Gear Attachment Points: Check 14. EXTERNAL IDLE ADJUSTMENT:
for loose or missing bolts and associatedsafety
wiring. Check for security (if UAV is so equipped).

c. Arresting Gear Attachment Point: Check for 10.5.3.2 Generator Inspection (When
security of Arresting Gear and condition of Required for Operation)
skid pad.
1. Identify specific generators providing power to
Note system.

During preflight procedure Arresting Gear 2. Visually inspect power cables and connectors/fit-
secure pin may be installed and should be re- tings.
moved before launch.
3. Check cycles at 60 Hz *2 Hz.
d. Main Landing Gear Wheel and Tire Assem-
bly: Check for wear of the tire unit. 4. Check voltage at 110 V *lo V.

13. POWERPLANT: Note

a. Spark Plug Wiring: Check for security and safety Both gauges (one on generator, one in con-
wiring. trol shelter) should be inspected. Gauge in
shelter should be considered primary
b. Cylinder Head Cowling: Check for security, indicator.
and possible cracking.
5. Check percent of rated power at approximately
c. Exhaust Stacks: Inspect for cracks, excessive 75%.
carbon build-up, and visible scarring of cylin-
der wall and piston ring assembly. 6. Check fuel level to ensure adequate supply for
mission.
d. Engine Thermocouple Harness (ETH): Check
for security of attachment (one cylinder only). 10.6 RAT0 PRESTART CHECKLIST

e. Flywheel Unit: Check for structural integrity, Note


scarring, or corrosion on magnets.
Shipboard ops require FLIGHT QUAR-
f. Magneto Wiring: Check for security and abra- TERS and AMBER DECK for RAT0
sion of wiring by lower engine cowling. upload.

g. Propeller Unit: Check for security of mounting 1. RAT0 Upload


hub and associated hardware and safety wir- Clearance ............................REQUESTED (MC)
ing. Insure correct mounting direction of pro-
peller (i.e., leading edge of prop forward). Note
Check prop for nicks and cracks which could
result in prop failure. If external power is not used or is unavail-
able, start engine from battery power and
h. Binding of Reciprocating Components: Check complete presets after engine start.
by rotating propeller through several cycles to
determine possible bearing malfunction or 2. External Power ......................................OFF (CC)
other associated problem.
3. RAT0 Upload .........................COMPLETE (CC)

ORIGINAL 10-10
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

4. RAT0 Final Checks ................ COMPLETE (CC) 4. Fire ext. and fire guard .................PRESENT (CC)

5. External Power ....................................... ON (CC) 5. CBX ..........................................SELECTED (EP)

6. Update Presets........................... COMPLETE (IP) Control of UAV is transferred to EP and EP


READY light is illuminated.
After power has been interrupted to the UAV, the
following PRESETS must be reset: 6. Nav Lights .................................... AS REQD (EP)

a. Return Home Data ....................... (PRESET 2) 7. IFFlStrobe ..................................... AS REQD (IP)

b. Mission Computer ..................... (PRESET 13) 8. ERC Switch ............................................ ON (CC)

1. General ................................. UPDATE l-6 9. VGU Switch ........................................... ON (CC)

2. Mask (ifGPS) ........................... DEFAULT 10. Comm Switch.. ....................................... ON (CC)

c. Navigation Programmer/ 11 Battery Switch ........................................ ON (CC)


Mission Computer ....................... (PRESET 3)
12 EXT POWER .......................................... OFF (IP)
1. (2) General ................................. AS REQD

2. (1)CurrentReport.. ...................... VERIFY


pii-,,,.,,,
3. (5) RPV Programmer.. ................ AS REQD

4. (7) Command, Item 3 Ensure the external power source is properly


(if GPS) ...................................... AUT0/2D identified (GCS, PCS, or PP7333) and
power is secured prior to removing external
d. Range Cal.. .................................... (PRESET 4) power cable from UAV.

7. Engine Start Clearance.................. REQUESTED/ 13. Ext Power Cable ............ DISCONNECTED (CC)
APPROVED (MC)
14. TP-53 (monitor 20 seconds).................. ..>3.4 (IP)
8. Control Transfer to PCS .................. .COMPLETE
Note
10.7 STARTING ENGINE
Monitor TP-53 for at least 20 sets. Ifreading
A qualified person designated by the commanding is less than 3.4, battery replacement is re-
officer shall be in control of the pilot box whenever the quired. In this case, immediately reconnect
UAV engine is started. Starting personnel shall receive external power to preserve presets and
and acknowledge the plane captains and fireguards all interactives.
clear signals before engaging starter. The UAV engine
shall not be started until the UAV is properly chocked. 15 Engine start ...............................CLEARED (MC)
Chocks shall be removed with caution when the propel-
ler is turning and only upon proper signal from the plane
captain. [ WARNING 1

1. ICS .......................................... CHECKED (ALL)


CC shall determine that personnel are clear
2. VTR RECORD/INACTIVE.. ....... RECORD (PO) of the UAV prior to engine start. EP shall re-
quest clearance for engine start from the MC
3. Starter.. ........................................... READY (CC) after the CC reports ready.

Crew Chief (CC) ensures starter and all start per- 16. Engine .............................................START (CC)
sonnel are in position.

10-11 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

Flight Controls .................................CHECK (EP)

Note
Engine should be started without delay, as
battery usage of more than 1.5 min requires Check AILERONS, ELEVATORS, RUD-
battery replacement. DERS, and NWS for correct response. The
CC/EP shall check correct responseby com-
17. Throttle ........................APPROX 5000 RPM (EP) paring the stick input to the control surface
deflection.
18. Eng Temp ........................................VERIFY (IP)
Examples:
Note
Back Stick ........................................Elevators UP
RPM shall be maintained between Forward Stick ............................Elevators DOWN
4800-5200 until CHT indicates above Left Stick (Roll) .............................Lt Aileron UP,
150C. Verify ENG TEMP light is extin- Rt Aileron DOWN
guished above 100C. Right Stick (Roll) ....................Lt Aileron DOWN,
Rt Aileron UP
19. Throttle ................................................IDLE (EP) Left Stick (Yaw) .,.,................. Rudders/NWS Left
(UAV perspective)
20. ENG CUT, BATT FAIL, GEN FAIL Right Stick (Yaw) .................RuddersfNWS Right
Warning lamps ................................a......OUT(IP) (UAV perspective)

Note

If TP-53 is increasing and at least 3.62 Vdc,


takeoff with the BATT FAIL light illumi-
nated is permitted. To prevent damage to the SWU, do not con-
duct rudder checks during RAT0 operations
10.8 ENGINE SHUTDOWN unless the NWS linkage has been
disconnected.
This checklist is provided for shutting down the en-
gine in a non-emergency situation. The intent is to pre- 2. Idle RPM (3200-3500) ......................CHECK (IP)
serve all preset data and battery life in order to effect a
quick turnaround for subsequent launch. 3. Bus Voltage ......................................CHECK(IP)
1. Wheels ......................PINNED/CHOCKED (CC) EP acceleratesthrottle to MAX then returns to idle
threetimes and verifies steadybus voltage (28 &2V).
2. External Power .................................OFF (IP/CC)
4. Throttle ................MAX RPM ABOVE 6700 (EP)
3. External Power Cable ...........CONNECTED (CC)

4. External Power ...................................ON (IP/CC)

5. Battery Switch .......................................OFF (CC)

6. ERC Switch ..,............................... OFF/CUT (CC) Wide-open throttle shall not be maintained
for more than 10 seconds.
10.9 PRE-TAXI CHECKS
5. Throttle ........................APPROX 5000 RPM (EP)

6. ENG Switch ...........................................OFF (EP)

Confirm no effect for at least 3 seconds.


To prevent tension link failure during RAT0
operations, al1 throttle accelerations shall be 7. ENG Switch ............................................ON (EP)
conducted gradually.

ORIGINAL 10-12
Al SRRPV-NFM-000

8. Nav Lights ...............................................ON (EP)


pi--,,,,,,,
9. ENG Switch ....................................CYCLE (EP)

Verify engine cut reaction. CC shall not taxi the UAV until permission
hasbeen granted by the mission commander.
10. Throttle ................................................IDLE (EP)
22. CC off headset...........................ADVISE WHEN
11. Nav Lights ....................................AS REQD (EP) ON HEADSET(IP/MC)

12. Autopilot ........................................DISENG (EP) 10.10 PRE-TAKEOFF/LAUNCH


PROCEDURES
13. IDLE RPM (3200-3500) ...................CHECK (IP)
1. CBX selected ..............................CONFIRM (EP)
14. Throttle ................MAX RPM ABOVE 6700 (EP)
2. Video/Platform ....................CHECK/POSITION
AS REQD (PO)
w

Wide-open throttle shall not be maintained


for more than 10 seconds.
Set for type of Takeomaunch. For RATO:
15. Throttle ................................................IDLE (EP) Caged as applicable. For Rolling/Pneumatic
Launch: MKD 200 caged, 180 bearing and
16. Flight Controls .................................CHECK (EP) 0 depression for all other MKDs.

Note 3. Lamp Test .................................COMPLETE (IP)

Check AILERONS, ELEVATORS, RUD- 4. PRIM/SEC Uplink Xmtrs .....................HIGH (IP)


DERS, and NWS for correct response.
5. Gauges/Instruments ..........................CHECK (IP)
17. Autopilot ......................................ENGAGE (EP)

18. Additional box checks e.................AS REQD (EP) H

Note
The ATTITUDE indicator shall be con-
Panel interactive tests ensure correct opera- firmed for correct launch attitude as follows:
tion of each control box. The above checks
ensureproper functioning of the uplink com- RAT0 +14*2
mand path and air vehicle components.
Pneumatic +10.5 +6%2
19. Walkaround ............................COMPLETE (CC)
Rolling Level
20. Eng Trap Count ...........a...........COMPLETE (CC)

Note Note
During RAT0 or pneumatic launches the At a minimum, the following shall be
CC may be required to man his position in an checked: RPM, ENG TEMP, and FAIL
alternate location. If applicable implement CHECK, Bus voltage and warning lamps.
Step 22. Perform an Altitude Calibration as
necessary.
21. Ready for Taxi ...........................CLEARED (MC)

10-13 ORIGINAL
Note 10.11 TAKEOFF/LAUNCH CHECKLIST

Maximum time for VGU to erect is up to 10


minutes.
1 WARNING 1
6. Range Cal .....................................CONFIRM (IP)
ADJUST IF NECESSARY
Execution of the TAKEOFF/LAUNCH
7. CC Back on headset......CONFIRM (CC) (IP/MC) checklist shall not commence until all per-
sonnel are clear of the nose of the vehicle. At
8. (RATO) Shorting Jack J 1 .........REMOVED (CC) any time duringthe takeoffflaunch sequence
any member of the crew may announce
9. (RATO) Fire line ABORT, ABORT, ABORTin the event of
(cable W 1) ............................CONNECTED (CC) any safety of flight emergency.
(Pneum.) V6 valve closed ..........CONFIRM (CC)
1. Pins ...........................................REMOVED (CC)
10. Altimeter Cal ................................CONFIRM (IP) Remove tailhook and/or launch pins.

Note

If the Altimeter Calibrations are updated,


then the PRESET/MISSION COM-
pz--WARNING)
PUTER/GENERAL must be updated and
loaded. Failure to do so will result in im- Verify tension link integrity prior to remov-
proper flight altitudes during NPL flight. ing pins.

11. (Dual OPS) NVC Bypass ........................-NO (IP) 2. FLT-TO5D ...........................................aFLT (IP)

12. (DuaIOPS)NPL/CurrentReport...SELECT(IP) 3. Manual Rtn


Home Data .......................LOAD & VERIFY (IP)
13. (Dual OPS) Step # ..........a............CONFIRM (IP)
4. TakeoffLaunch clearance .........CLEARED (MC)
Note
5. (RATO) Firing Box ........... READY LIGHT (CC)
All information displayed within STEP # (Pneum.) V6 Valve .......................... ..OPEN (CC)
is acquired from the Ground Programmer
only. The RPV Programmer should bc veri- 6. (RATO) Remote Safe/
fied for accuracy of all NPL steps. Arm Switch ....................................ARMED (CC)
(Pneum.) Launcher S2 Switch .......ARMED (CC)
14. (Dual OPS) PRSNT POS .............CONFIRM (IP)
7. All Stations Report .......a...............READY (ALL)
15. (Dual OPS) Range/ ETA .............CONFIRM (IP)
8. Nav Lights ....................................AS REQD (EP)
16. (Dual OPS) Operation Mode .........AS REQD (IP)
9. Throttle .........................MAX ABOVE 6700 (EP)
17. (RATO) Remote Safe/Arm Switch.....SAFE (CC)
(Pneum.) Launcher S2 Switch ..............OFF (CC) 10. UAV ..........................RELEASE/LAUNCH (EP)

18. TakeoffTrim ..........................................SET(EP) a. Rolling Takeoff: EP will call ROTATE and


LIFT OFF.

ORIGINAL 10-14
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

b. RATO: EP counts down, 5-4-3-2-l Note


LAUNCH. RAT0 crew press ARM & FIRE
switches simultaneously. After rocket fires, re- Must be in full knobs heading in order to
lease ARM & FIRE switches; verify switches transition into programmer mode. Use of
have returned to their secure positions. A total programmer is subject to the TP 309
of three (3) attempts to fire are authorized prior limitations.
to initiating MISFIRE procedures.
6. (Dual OPS) PROG CONTR
c. Pneumatic Launch: EP counts down Push Button .....................................SELECT (IP)
54-3-2-1 LAUNCH.
7. (Dual OPS) UAV Enters
Launcher Command Correct NPL Flight .......................CONFIRM (IP)
Module Switch .................................CLOSED
8. Station Transfer .............................AS REQD (IP)
A total of three (3) attempts to fire are autho-
rized prior to initiating MISFIRE procedures. 9. CBX to PBX XFER .......................AS REQD (IP)

11. Mission Clock ....................................START (IP) 10.12.2 Control Checks. Whenever control and/or
flight modes are modified, a control check should be
12. RPV Xmtr ............................................HIGH (IP) conducted to confirm proper UAV response to the new
mode. E.g., when transferring control from the CBX to
10.12 AFTER TAKEOFF the PBX, the IP should schedule a turn or climb opposite
to a CBX input and verify proper response.
10.12.1 Climb Out
Similar verifications should be done when switching
1. Climb ..........................ABOVE 500 FT AGL (EP) between STICKS, KNOBS, and PROGRAMMED
flight modes.
2. Controllability Checks .............COMPLETE (EP)
10.13 DISHLOCK
Note
A dishlock can be conducted regardlessof whether or
These checks are conducted to determine if not you currently have command of the UAV. If not in
the UAV meets the below listed criteria. The command, the first four items on the checklist are per-
IP shall verify pitch and bank angles for each formed to match the controlling stations uplink com-
maneuver. mands. While not required to perform a successful
dishlock, these steps are required to increase the margin
of safety.
Pitch UP 18 zt3
The dishlock procedure may have to be performed in
Pitch DN 14 *3 conjunction with a CBX to PBX control transfer. In this
case, close crew coordination is required to avoid skip-
Bank LT 57 *3 ping required steps.

Benk RT 57 *3 1. RPV Ant ..............................................OMNI (IP)

2. ALT/IAS/HDG
3. Nav Lights ....................................AS REQD (EP) Knobs ....................................SETASREQD(IP)

4. IFF/Strobe .....................................AS REQD (IP) 3. ALT/IAS/HDG


Lights ..............READY/SELECT AS REQD (IP)
5. ALT/IAS/HDG Knobs ..................AS REQD (IP)
4. UAV Heading .....................ESTABLISH (IP/EP)

10-15 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

5. Dish Azimuth/Elevation ..........................SET(IP)

6. Primary Link .........................................DISH (IP)

Note l Final descent should be commenced to ar-


rive overhead the landing site with at least 8
Dishlock procedures should not be at- liters (indicated) of fuel remaining. Abrupt
tempted until the UAV is beyond 1 km due to pitch or bank maneuvers can cause fuel star-
the high slew rates in close. During dishlock, vation with low fuel, and should be avoided
a NO REPORT condition may exist until the when the UAV is returning with low fuel
dish azimuth and elevations are properly (5-7 liters). Fuel starvation may occur in
adjusted. level flight when fuel quantity is 4 liters or
less.
7. Antenna Track .................................ADJUST (IP)
l Monitor CHT during descents. If the CHT
Note approaches minimum limits (1 lOC), level
off. Set RPM for level flight and monitor
Adjust the antenna track for maximum sig- CHT until it reaches a level acceptable for
nal strength and 0 boresight error. This will continued descent.
help ensure the receiver main lobe (vice side
lobe) is used for tracking. 1. Altimeter Setting .................................FIELD (IP)

8. Tracker Control ................................TRACK (IP) 2. Low Altitude Warning .....................ADJUST

9. Plotter Control ..............................AS REQD (PO) 3. Commanding Link .........................AS REQD (IP)

10.14 CLIMB 4. IFF/Strobe .....................................AS REQD(IP)

1. Mission Altitude ................................SET (IP/EP) 5. UPLCode ......................................AS REQD (IP)

2. Altimeter Setting .......................SEA LEVEL (IP) 6. Nav Lights .....................................AS REQD (IP)

3. Plotter Control ..............................AS REQD (PO) 7. FLT-TO/LD .......................................TO/LD (IP)

4. RPV Ant ........................................AS REQD (IP) 8. Payload Shield ..........................DEPLOY (IP/PO)

5. Commanding Link .........................AS REQD (IP) 9. FLT-TO/LD ............................................FLT(IP)

6. UPL Code ............................................LONG (IP) 10. RI-I Auto ...........................................VERIFY (IP)

7. Low Altitude Warning .....................ADJUST 11. RPVAnt ..............................................OMNI (IP)

8. RI-I First Climbing Spiral ........................YES(IP) Once the EP has visual:

9. RI-I Update .......................................VERIFY (IP) 12. CBX SELECT ...............................AS REQD(IP)

10. CBX to PBX ....................................VERIFY (IP) 13. Full Sticks/Mixed Mode ...............AS REQD (IP)

10.15 DESCENT 14. Primary Link ..*..................................... OMNI (IP)

Standard rates of descent are made at 400-600 feet 15. Manual RI-I ..........................LOAD/VERIFY (IP)
per minute. Full idle position will allow maximum de-
scent, with airspeed set at 60-62 knots. Other techniques
can increase the available descent rate (i.e. spiral from
altitude, S turns, slipping) to expedite UAV recovery
in an emergency.

ORIGINAL lo-16
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

10.16 LANDING 7. Video/Platform .................................OFF (PO/IP)

8. ERC Switch ...........................................OFF (CC)

9. Comm, VGU, Batt ...........a...........AS REQD (CC)

The landing checklist should be commenced


to be on deck with at least 7 liters (indicated)
of fuel remaining. Abrupt pitch or bank ma-
neuvers can cause fuel starvation with low
fuel and should be avoided when the UAV is To prevent damage to the VGU, the UAV
returning with low fuel (5-7 liters). Fuel star- should not be moved for at least 10 minutes
vation may occur in level flight when fuel once power to the VGU has been secured.
quantity is 4 liters or less.

1. Station Transfer .............................AS REQD (IP) 10.18 DUAL UAV OPERATIONS

2. Platform ............................................SET (IP/PO) Operation of the Pioneer UAV in an intelligence


gathering scenario may require on-station times in ex-
cess of single UAV endurance limitations. One Pioneer
UAV is limited to a total flight endurance time of about
four hours (including enroute time from home base to
target and return). Dual Ops procedures are intended to
provide an on-station relief using a second UAV
Set for Landing. For Net: MKD 200/400, launched and guided by the same UAV unit. This proce-
Caged. For Rolling; MKD 200 caged; 180 dure will increase UAV on-station time in proportion to
for all other MKDs. the number of follow-on launches, and with regard to
the distance between home base and target. To ensure
Once established on Downwind leg: unbroken coverage and maximum on-station time, fol-
low-on launch times must be carefully planned and
3. Nav Lights ...............................................ON (EP) coordinated.

Once established on Final for a Full Stop: 10.18.1 Dual Ops Procedures

4. FLT-TO/LD .......................................TO/LD (IP) 1. Two (or more) UAVs, with proper frequency sep-
aration, are preflighted and all programmed routes
After runway touchdown/net impact: are entered into the GCS and PCS. All procedures
and UAV frequencies and channels are carefully
5. Engine ...................................................OFF (EP) briefed. The two UAVs should have different ad-
dresses, UHF frequencies, and C-band downlink
10.17 POST LANDING frequencies.

1. Nav Lights ............................................. OFF (EP) 2. The first UAV is launched by the GCS or by the
PCS and transferred to the GCS upon completion
2. RPVXmtr ............................................. LOW (IP) of in-flight checks. It is flown to the on-station en-
try point to begin the mission, Enroute navigation
3. UPL Xmtrs.. .................................. LOW/OFF (IP) programs are loaded into and checked in the UAV.

4. Mission Clock ...................................... STOP (IP) 3. Prior to the first UAV reaching Prudent Limit of
Endurance (PLE), and allowing for enroute time
5. Plotter ...............................................RESET (PO) for the second UAV, the second UAV is launched
by the PCS and controllability checks are con-
6. VTR RECORD/ ducted.
INACTIVE ................................INACTIVE (PO)

10-17 ORIGINAL
4. The first UAV is put into a programmed holding Note
pattern on station by the GCS. The GCS then tunes
to the second UAV, takes control from the PCS, Acquisition of a returning UAV by a ship-
conducts controllability checks, and programs it board PCS may require turning the ship to
to fly a route to the on-station entry point, hold, eliminate antenna masking.
and return to home base, ensuring that altitude
separation of at least 1000 feet is maintained be- 7. Upon completion of mission, the second UAV is
tween UAVs. At this time, the PCS continues to flown home by GCS. Landing is accomplished
track the second UAV to station, or to the limit of from either GCS or PCS.
its line-of-sight coverage. The GCS tunes back to
the first UAV, resumes control, and continues 10.18.2 Dual OPS I On-Station Turn Over
with the mission.
Note

This checklist covers the basic procedures


f for returning an off-going UAV to a recov-
ery/PCS area and receiving an oncoming
UAV for mission purposes.
Dual UAV operations shall select NVC By-
pass -NO. With NVC Bypass selected +YES 1. RPV Programmer
and UAV in programmed mode, when the set for RTB ...................................CONFIRM (IP)
controlling station changes address, the
UAV (incorrectly) executes return home. A 2. NVC Bypass............................................-NO (IP)
power fluctuation on the UAV with NVC
Bypass -NO may cause an unrecoverable 3. UPL Code .........................SHORT/SECURE (IP)
NVC hang.
4. NPLKurrent Report ........................SELECT(lP)
Note
5. Step# ............................................CONFIRM (IP)
While this step causes a break in mission
coverage, it ensures that both the first and Note
second UAVs can be programmed and con-
trolled by the GCS, and all programs are re- All information displayed within STEP #*
corded on the Video Telemetry Recorder is acquired from the Ground Programmer
(VTR). only. The RPV Programmer should be veri-
fied for accuracy of all NPL steps.
5. When the second UAV arrives on station, the first
UAV is commanded to fly its programmed return 6. PRSNT POS.................................CONFIRM (IP)
route to a holding point near home base. When the
first UAV is enroute home in programmer mode, 7. Range/ETA .................................CONFIRM (IP)
the GCS tunes to the second UAV, takes control,
and continues with the mission. 8. Operation Mode .............................AS REQD (IP)

Note 9. Return Home ..................VERIFY/CHANGE (IP)


IfChanged ....................................VERIFY LAST
Radar assistance may be necessary to ac- UPDATE MENU (IP)
quire UAVs returning from distant targets.
Use of Strobe/IFF should be considered 10. PROG CONTR Push-button ............SELECT (IP)
prior to entering programmer mode.
11. UAV Enters Correct
6. The PCS tunes to the first UAV, and when ac- NPL Flight ...................................CONFIRM (IP)
quired, takes control and lands it.
12. GCS XMTRS ..........................................OFF(IP)

ORIGINAL lo-18
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

Note 10.18.3 Dual OPS I Descent 4%Landing

Verify off going UAV executing Program-


mer Mode.

13. RPV ANT ............................DIRECTIONAL (IP)

14. Oncoming UAV DNL Final descent should be commenced to ar-


Frequency ........................................SELECT (IP) rive overhead the landing site with at least 8
liters (indicated) of fuel remaining. Abrupt
15. Oncoming UAV UHF pitch or bank maneuvers can cause fuel star-
Frequency ........................................SELECT (IP) vation with low fuel, and should be avoided
when the UAV is returning with low fuel
16. Oncoming UAV Address .................SELECT(IP) (5-7 liters). Fuel starvation may occur in
level flight when fuel quantity is 4 liters or
17. Dishlock (oncoming UAV) ..........EXECUTE (IP) less.

18. Station XMTRS .............................ON/HIGH (IP)

19. Communications
Warning Lamps ......................................OUT (IP)

20. Verify Positive Control Monitor CHT during descents. If the CHT
ofUAV ........................................CONFIRM (IP) approaches minimum limits (11 OC) level
off. Set RPM for level flight and monitor
Note CHT until it reaches a level acceptable for
continued descent.
A possibility exists that the indicated alti-
tude does not match the oncoming UAVs 1. Station Transmitters ................................OFF (IP)
actual altitude. NPL will maintain the alti-
tude that is commanded by the UAV 2. RTB UAV DNL Frequency .............SELECT (IP)
Programmer.
3. RTB UAV UHF Frequency .............SELECT (IP)
21. QNH/QFE
(Recorded at Takeoff) ........................ENTER (IP) 4. RTB UAV Address ........................SELECT (IP)

22. Oncoming PRI / SEC 5. QNH/QFE .........................VERIFY/ENTER(IP)


RangeCalOffsets .............................ENTER(IP)
6. Range Cal. Offsets .............................ENTER (IP)
23. NVC Bypass (-20 ONLY) .....................+YES (IP)
7. UPLCode ..........................................SHORT(IP)
24. Perform Climb
Checklist ...................................COMPLETE (IP) 8. NPLStep# .......................................VERIFY (IP)

10-19 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

9. Programmer Mode.. ,........................SELECT (IP) 10.19 UAV REACQUISITION

10. Station Transmitters ......................ON/HIGH(IP) The EP should be in position prior to the arrival ofthe
UAV. After establishing communication with the flight
11. Communications crew the EP may be asked to verify CBX switch posi-
Warning Lamps ......................................OUT(IP) tions. Acquiring the UAV is done by looking in the gen-
eral direction of the dish antenna azimuth.
12. Altimeter Setting .................................FIELD (IP)
Information from the IP may assist in reacquisition.
13. LOW Altitude Warning ...................ADJUST Heading, altitude, and range should be utilized. When
the UAV is spotted, the CBX may be selected, and the
14. Commanding Link.. .......................AS REQD (IP) EP can assist the internal operator in negotiating head-
ing changes to enhance the position of the UAV.
15. IFF/Strobe .....................................AS REQD (IP)
When ready the EP will announce Ready For Head-
16. NAV Lights ...................................AS REQD(IP) ing. The EP may also request altitude (throttle control)
and airspeed (elevator control). Refer to normal landing
17. UAV in Sight ......................................... YES (EP) procedures at this time, utilizing good flight and ground
crew coordination, or as mission profile demands.
18. Knobs/Sticks ................................... SELECT (IP)
10.20 POST FLIGHT INSPECTION
19. Verify Positive
Control of UAV ......................CONFIRM (IP/EP) Once cable arrestment has occurred, the UAV should
be inspected for signs of debris, impact, damage, and
20. NVC Bypass ...........................................YES (IP) propeller deterioration. In the event of mission tum-
around, EP will conduct entire pre-flight inspection pro-
21. FLT/TO-LD a............,.....,................... TO-LD(IP) cedures prior to second flight.

22. Payload Shield ................................DEPLOY (IP) 10.21 NIGHT OPERATIONS

23. FLTTTO-LD ..............................a.............FLT (IP) 10.21 .l Chemlighting Runway

24. Platform ..................................................SET (IP) 1. Chemlights for centerline should be spaced ap-
proximately 50 feet apart.

2. The runway edges should be illuminated with


f chemlights, spaced in between the centerline
lighting.

Payload set for Landing. For Net MKD Note


200/400, Caged. For Rolling: MKD 200
caged; 180 for all other MKDs. The actual amount of chemlights required
may be determined by operational profile.
25. Manual RI-i .........................UPDATE/LOAD (IP)
10.21.2 Hand Signals
26. NAV Lights.. ........................................... ON (EP)
1. Taxi of the UAV is performed - LIGHTS ON
27. FLT/TO-LD ....................................... TO-LD (IP) to end of the runway.

28. Engine ...................................................OFF (EP) 2. When the UAV is positioned for take-off, and the
crew chieflground crew has performed the final
walk-around, the crew chieflground crewmember
will indicate with one cycle, OFF-ON-OFF* of a
flashlight. (Amber tipped recommended).

ORIGINAL 1O-20
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

3. The EP (if ready) will acknowledge the crew through the menu items in logical order. After all
chiefs signal with one ON-OFF-ON cycle of functions in the submenu are performed, the sys-
the navigation lights. tem continues directly to the next menu or returns
to the original selecting menu. A default option,
4. The crew chieflground crew will confirm signal- usually the next submenu, appears in the item
ing, with two cycles OFF-ON-OFF, number field. The default option is selected by
OFF-ON-OFF of the amber tipped flashlight. pressing the ENTER key.

5. At this time, if the EP is READY FOR TAKE- 2. Operational function selection is similar to
OFF Maximum RPM is applied. submenu selection. If no default option is selected,
the cursor is displayed in the item number field. If
6. EP checks and confirms RPM, completes two cy- the system requests an input, the cursor appearson
cles ON-OFF-ON, ON-OFF-ON of the navi- the data entry field and the user enters the required
gation lights, indicating to ground crew to release data.
the UAV for takeoff roll.
3. Exiting From a Menu Tree. Operation in a main
10.21.3 Recovery - Landing of UAV menu is terminated by pressing the specific fimc-
tional push-button on the users keyboard. When
1. Ensure that the runway chemlights are still illumi- the push-button key is pressed the system ac-
nated and in position. knowledges the termination by turning off the
push-button internal lamp. The numeric keyboard
2. Depending on possible terrain features of the ap- and all control keys are disengaged.
proach end of the runway, it may be necessary to
position signal personnel to indicate to the EP 4. The system evaluates data only after the ENTER
when the UAV has cleared the obstruction. key is pressed,or in some caseswhen the submenu
is exited. If the data is acceptable, it is entered into
3. Ensure all chemlights are collected after recovery the system for use. This data appearson the appro-
complete. priate item line in the menu field. If the data is un-
acceptable, the data entry field flashes until the
10.22 PRESETS DELETE key is pressed and acceptable data is en-
tered.
10.22.1 Logic and Use of Menus
10.22.2 Pilot Bay Presets
10.22.1 .I Menu Logic. The GCS-2000 operational
system was built using a top-down design method; i.e., 1. PRESET push-button .............................SELECT
to reach a specific operating function, the user pageshis
way through a top-down menu system. The menus are 2. PRESET Menu is displayed .....................CHECK
fixed, and selecting an item from a higher level menu
prompts the selected lower level menu. Main menus of 3. Presskeyboard # 1and ENTER ..............PRESS
the operational system are selected by functional
push-buttons and can be viewed as roots of the system. 10.22.2.1 Altimeter Cal 8 Warning Set (Item#l)
Each main menu is divided into a group of selecting
menus, and each group into submenus, until a specific 1. CASE- 1: UAV on ground, in preflight, near the
function is reached. Each selecting menu, submenu, and control station.
function can be viewed as a major or minor branch of a
main root, thus building a menu tree. a. Altitude above Sea Level

10.22.1.2 Working With a Menu Tree FIELD LEVEL/SEA LEVEL


Switch on PDP ............................SEA LEVEL
1. Selecting a Main Menu. Select the main menu root Accurate altitude (in feet) of UAV
by pressing the specific functional push-button on above sealevel ....................................ENTER
the users keyboard. A menu tree can be selected Verify proper entry of QNH on PDP
only if all other menu trees (functional digital display ................................VERIFIED
push-buttons) except the FAIL CHECK menu tree Document numerical
are turned off. The operational program is built se- display of item #3 .......................RECORDED
quentially and the system leads the operator

IO-21 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

b. Altitude above field level display on PDP ..................................VERIFY


(Must have UPL established)
FIELD LEVEL/SEA LEVEL
switch on PDP .........................FIELD LEVEL b. FIELD LEVEL/SEA LEVEL
Altitude of UAV above field switch on PDP .........................FIELD LEVEL
level ....................................................ENTER Enter pressure at field level (QFE)
(normally, for runway takeoff equals 1 foot; received from local meteorological
RAT0 & Pneumatic equals 3 feet) station or from station passing
Verify proper entry of QFE control of UAV ..............................ENTERED
on PDP digital display .......................VERIFY
Document numerical c. LOW Airspeed Limitations and Warning -
display of item #4 .......................RECORDED Minimum airspeed....................................SET
(58-70 knots)
Note
Note
Compare barometric measures(items #3 and
#4) with local meteorological data (if avail- During locking process, it is possible to lose
able). If deviation exists, record for possible UAV downlink (no report).
future use.
d. Low Altitude Warning
Note Minimum Altitude ....................................SET
(- 1,500 to 21,500 fit)
Digital Altimeter readout may decrease
50-100 feet after engine start. Re-calibrate e. Low Fuel Warning Minimum
altimeter on both sea level and field level if Fuel level between O-20.0 ltrs ...................SET
required. Compare to EDC downlink altime-
ter readout prior to takeoff. 10.22.2.2 Return Home Data (Item #2). Return
Home data menu displayed after completion of Altime-
c. LOW Airspeed Limitations ter Calibration and Warning Set menu or by pressing #2
and Warning .............................................SET and enter from PRESET menu.
(58-70 knots)
a. Cruise Altitude 3,6,9, or
12 thousand feet .............................................SET
1 WARNING 1
b. Cruise Airspeed 60, 70,
or 80 knots ......................................................SET
Do not set Low Airspeed Limit below stall
speed. c. Final Holding Altitude - 1, 1, 3,
or 5 thousand feet ...........................................SET
d. Low Altitude Warning ..............................SET
(- 1,500 to 2 1,500 ft) d. First Climbing Spiral
(+)YES(-)NO ..................................SELECTED
e. Low Fuel Warning Minimum
fuel level between O-20.0 ltrs ....................SET e. Coordinates/Home 13 digit UTM grid
coordinate of RETURN
2. CASE-2: UAV in flight, control transfer from HOME LOCATION ......................................SET
launch site, altitude unknown.
f. CoordinatesMav Program end ......................SET
a. Altitude above SEA LEVEL
Note
FIELD LEVEL/SEA LEVEL
switch on PDP .............................SEA LEVEL Coord/Nav Prg end is not functional. How-
Enter pressure at sea level:(QNH) received ever, the last active step of any program
from local meteorological station or from control should be entered as a valid RI-I location.
station passing UAV control ..........ENTERED
Verify proper display of QNH altitude on digital

ORIGINAL 1o-22
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

10.22.2.3 Navigation Programmer (Item #3) n. PROGRAM ...........................+ (CONTINUE)


OR - (END)
Note
4. Query: Used to query the NVC for the status of
On RPV Data Menu (Press #lo) Mission various navigational and GPS data.
Computer must be set to + YES.
5. RPV Programmer: This submenu is similar to
The following Navigation Programmer MISSION submenu #3 (Ground Programmer). Values ap-
COMPUTER Menu is displayed after completion of pearing in this submenu are taken directly from
Return Home data menu or by selecting PRESET #3. It the RPV programmer (NVC) - not from the
provides the following data/functions: GCS/PCS programmer.

1. Current Report. 6. Mask: Used to specify GPS sensor operation pa-


rameters.
2. General: Used to specify UAV critical fuel level
and NVC operations mode. 7. Command: Used to access waypoint #OO,define
GPS position fixes as 2-D or 3-D, and to access
3. Ground Programmer: Used to specify and load GPSNVC reset and test functions.
Navigation Programmer step parameters. The fol-
lowing Navigation Programmer parameter op- 8. Load programmer: Used to load groups of Ground
tions are available: Programmer steps to the NVC. Option not re-
quired if single step loading (option, 0 {Load
a. ADVANCE STEP Step) of Ground Prog. or UAV Prog) was used. If
LOAD ALL STEPS is selected, loading will
b. STEP# ................................................ 1TO96 take up to 20 minutes or more.

c. ACTIVE .............. + ACTIVE or - INACTIVE 9. Clear RPV Programmer: Clears the RPV pro-
grammers; i.e. all parameters set to 0 and all steps,
d. COORDINATES ......UTMCOORDINATES except step # 1, set to - inactive.
OF WAYPOINT
10. Reset Programmers: Clears both the RPV and
e. GRID ZONE .........................GRID ZONE OF GCS/PCS programmers; all steps, except step #I,
OPERATINGAREA will be set to - inactive.

f. HOLDING TIME .............0:OO:OO


HRS:MIN: 10.22.2.4 Range Calibration (Item #4). Range
SEC (0:OO:OlTHROUGH 8:3 1:OO) calibration menu is displayed after completion of Navi-
gation Programmer data menu or by selecting #4 and
g. ALTITUDE ................a......00.0 KFT (0.1 KFT enter from PRESET menu.
THROUGH 20.0 KFT)
1. PCD controls and indicators:
h. AIRSPEED e................................. 00 kt (60 KT
THROUGH 80 KT) a. PRIM UPLINK and SEC UPLINK Toggle
Switches ........................................STATION
i. COMMAND .......................+ (RECEIVE) OR TRANSMITTER ON
-(INHIBIT)
(- INHIBIT option has been deactivated) b. PRIM XMTR and SEC XMTR
push-button higMow ..............................LOW
j. TRANSMITTER ...............+ (ON) OR - (OFF)
c. RPV XMTR push-button ...........................ON
k. BEACON ...........................+ (ON) OR -(OFF)
d. RPV XMTR HIGH/LOW
I. FILM CAMERA push-button ............................................LOW
(IFF/Strobe) .......................+ (ON) OR -(OFF)
e. RPV # (ADDRESS)
m. VIDEO CAMERA .............+ (ON) OR -(OFF) thumbwheel... ......SET TO CURRENT UAV #

IO-23 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

f. PRIM UPL SECURE/ 2. Data Entry/Pressure Table


CLEAR push-button ........................SECURE
a. Update table with altitudes/
g. CODE LONG/SHORT pressure in millibars -
push-button ........................................SHORT received from local
meteorological station ........................ENTER
h. COMMANDING STATION
arrow LINK .........POINTING TO PRIMARY 3. Data Entry/Wind Table

2. PDP warning lamps: a. Update table with winds


at altitude - received from
a. RPV RCVR ADDRESS local meteorological station ................ENTER
LOSS (PRIM) LINK LOSS ......................OFF
4. Data Entry/Temperature Table
b. RPV RCVR ADDRESS
LOSS (SEC) LINK LOSS ........................OFF a. Update table with temperature
at altitude in degreesCelsius ...............ENTER
c. NO REPORT ....................................a.......OFF
Note
3. PRIM LINK OMNVDISH
push-button switch .....................................OMNI Each table has 15 entries for altitudes from
2,000 to 16,000 feet.
4. TCD RECEIVER
SIGNAL STRENGTH Partial update of the table is acceptable and the
meter strength .............INDICATES 6 OR MORE various types of data are marked as follows:

5. Range between TCU In - input data entered


and UAV .............................................ENTERED
Est - estimated data (based on input data)
Note
Time (hour:min) - calculated data (wind ta-
Allow range to count down before switching ble only)
to SEC Link.
10.22.2.6 Camera Guidance (Item #6). Camera
6. UAV RANGE display guidance menu is displayed after completion of Meteo-
on PDP ................................................VERIFIED rological data menu or by pressing #6 and enter in the
PRESET menu.
7. Offset/correction factors ..................RECORDED
1. Circling Radius - Radius, in km, of UAV orbit. Set
8. COMMANDING from 1.O to 9.9 km.
STATION arrow ...............................TRANSFER
(transfer command from PRIM to SEC uplink) 2. Circ - Target Distance - Distance, in km, from the
center of the UAV orbit to the target. Set from 0 to
9. Repeat steps 5 and 7 .......................COMPLETED 15km.

10.22.2.5 Meteorological Data (Item #5). Mete- 3. Circ - Target Azimuth - Azimuth, in degrees, from
orological data menu is displayed after completion of the center of the UAV orbit to the target.
range calibration menu or by entering #5 and enter in
the PRESET menu. 4. Default parameters - Radius = 1.Okm, Distance =
0.0 km, Azimuth = 0.
1. Mode Selection Updates:
10.22.2.7 Geographical Data (Item #7). Geo-
a. Ah/pressure table .......................+(Yes) - (No) graphical data menu is displayed after completion of
Camera Guidance menu or by pressing #7 and enter in
b. Automatic Wind Update .............+(Yes) -(No) the PRESET menu.

ORIGINAL 1O-24
1. Target Altitude - Set target altitude above sea 7. Magn. Declin - Set angle, in degreesand minutes
level, in meters. (grid to magnetic) (+, east, right).

2. Station Data/Coordinates - Set the 13 digit UTM 10.22.2.8 Tracker Calibration (Item #8). Tracker
grid coordinates for the TCU location. calibration menu is displayed after completion of Geo-
graphical data menu or by pressing #8 and enter in the
Note PRESET menu.

Auto Position Update (step #4) must be dis- 1. Azimuth. Allows the user to enter the known di-
abled to allow entry of Station Data/ rection between the station and the beacon unit,
Coordinates. during the azimuth calibration procedure.

3. Station Data/Altitude - Set the TCU altitude 2. Correction Offset. Displays the difference be-
above sea level in meters. tween the measured direction to the beacon unit
and the direction read by the tracking unit, and is
4. Auto Position Update - (YES or NO). used to calibrate the direction read by the tracking
unit relative to the map grid. Set to 0 for ship-
Note board operations.

Yes - indicates that the station coordinates 3. Masked Zone A (Item #3). Defines a blind area of
are obtained from the GPS, and the values in the directional antenna caused by an obstruction.
preset #2 are not valid. No - indicates there The zone is defined by entering the degrees at
is no autoposition source available for the which the blind zone starts (F-from) and ends
TCU, and values loaded in preset #2 are (T-to). The From value entered must be less than
used. the To value entered and values must be less than
360 degrees.
5. Grid Zone Input - (YES or NO). Enables (+ yes )
or disables (- no) the alternate grid zone entered in 4. Masked Zone B. Defines a secondblind areaof the
Item #6 below. When the grid zone input is - no, directional antenna.
the GCS obtains coordinate data from either the
PRESET/GEOGRAPHIC coordinates or the Nav- 5. Auto Ship Heading Update. Enables/disables the
igational Data System. When the grid zone input is automatic heading update mode. If + yes, all re-
+ yes and the GCS is receiving coordinate infor- lated controls and indicators read true bearings. If
mation from the Navigational Data System, the - no, all related controls and indicators read rela-
grid zone provided in Item #6 below is used by the tive bearings.
GCS instead of the calculated grid zone from the
Navigational Data System. 6. Own Ship True Heading. The default value used
for ships heading if the auto ship heading update
Note is disabled or inoperative. This value should be set
to 0 for ground based operations.
The IP has the option of selecting the grid
zone for GPS computations between 1 and 10.22.2.9 Retrieval Net Data (Item #9)
60. When the GRID ZONE INPUT is NO,
the system will compute and display a GRID Note
ZONE NUMBER.
This function is for shipboard Autoland sys-
6. Grid Zone - This item is provided so the operator tem and is no longer used. All values should
can alter the station grid zone by one (1) in either be set to zero.
direction from the grid zone calculated by the
Navigational Data System. The grid zone is en- Retrieval net data is displayed after completion of
abled/disabled by the grid zone input. This Rmc- Tracker calibration menu or by pressing #9 and enter
tion is used when the UAV is to be flown into a in the PRESET menu.
grid zone different from the one in which the GCS
is located. 1. Station-glide path distance meters

IO-25 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

2. Station-net distance ,................................... meters 10.22.2.12 GPS Initialization (Item #12). Not
+ net behind station used.
- net in front of station
10.22.2.13 Mission Computer (Item #13)
3. Eng cut point-net distance.. .........................meters
Note
4. Net altitude .................................................meters
PRESET Menu 13 can only be accessed if
10.22.2.10 RPV Data (Item #IO). The RPV data Mission Computer (Preset Menu #IO) is set
menu is displayed after completion of the Retrieval Net to (+) YES.
data menu or by pressing #lO and enter in the
PRESET menu. The Mission Computer menu can only be displayed
by selecting preset # 13.
1. Weight (Empty fuel tanks) in Kg
1. General: will initialize UAV position, critical fuel,
2. RPVmodel .....................................850 (Option I) date, and time. This data will be initialized during
907 (Option II) Preflight for Nav Programmer use.
910 (Option II+)
2. Mask: will initialize the UAVs GPS sensor con-
3. Payload trol parameters.

0 - NONE 3. Ground programmer: accesses the programmer


1 - MKD 200 card resident in the GCS/PCS only (Preset #3).
2 - MKD 400
3 - RADIO RELAY (Not available) 4. Datum: allows the operator to select the appropri-
4 - EO/FLIR ate ellipsoid model (8 options).

6. Camera Control Bay 5. The Load Programmer: menu is used for loading
groups of Navigation Program steps to the NVC.
1 - OBY (Loading steps 1 through 96 can take up to 20 min
2-PBY or more.)

7. Mission Computer .............................. ..+(YES) 6. Clear RPV Programmer: will render all RPV
Navigation Programmer steps inactive except for
Note step 1, which is left active. This menu also erases
all parameters within the RPV programmer and
Mission computer must be set to + YES to sets them to zero.
access preset menu #13 (MISSION COM-
PUTER Menu), and to access valid Naviga- 7. Reset Programmers: clears all steps in both the
tion Programmer menu (Preset #3). RPV and ground programmer programs, and ren-
ders all steps inactive except step 1, which is left
10.22.2.11 Point Navigation Data (ttem #Hi). The active.
Point Navigation data menu is displayed after comple-
tion of RPV data menu or by entering # 11 on PRESET 10.22.3 Pilot Control Table-Other Functions
menu.
10.22.3.1 Calibration (CALBR). Same as Pilot Bay
1. NAVIGATION/UPDATE the 13 digit UTM co- PRESET # 1.
ordinates for each target. For use in Navigation
Coordinate mode. 10.22.3.2 Fail Check. This push-button may be
used at any time as part of troubleshooting or emer-
2. Mode Continue (+) - go to next target. Hold (-) - gency procedures. FAILURE DISPLAY will display
circle over the target at the parameters defined in warning message(s) relating to: PWR FAIL (steady),
the Camera Guidance Menu. GCS FAIL (steady), RI-l FAIL (flashing), CAMERA
GUIDE push-button (flashing), and NAV to COORD
pushbutton (flashing).

1O-26
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

10.22.3.3 Multifunction
MULT TEST DESCRIPTION FAIL PASS

1. Uplink Command FACTOR POINT

0 Fuse 28 V NESS 0 3.5 f 0.5


a. IFF/Strobe Cmd - (ON/OFF) 28 REU (regulator) 0 3.5 f 0.5

b. Payload Shield - (ON/OFF) 2 Fuse Stroba/lFF 0 3.5 f 0.5

3 C-Band receiver 0 3.5 If 0.5


2. GPS data (TCU IBX)
4 UHF receiver 0 3.5 zt 0.5
a. Station Coordinates Exxxxxx Nxxxxxx 5 DC-DC cow, PCU 0 3.5 f 0.5

15 Exterior lights 0 3.5 f 0.5


b. Velocity X0 m/s YO m/s
20 Fuse, Directional 0 3.5 f 0.5
c. Area number Antenna

21 Fuse, ServeNW 0 3.5 f 0.5


d. Status Code
22 Fuse, Vertical Gyro 0 3.5 f 0.5

e. Error Code 44 Engine Cut (EPS) cut = 2.5 V Run - OV

51 Battery (after 40 = 32 v Waw4


f. Ship True Hdg switch)

8 52 Battery balance 112 test point 53*.04


g. Ship Pitch
8 53 Battery (before 4.0 = 32 V (charged)
h. Ship Roll switch)

2 58 Battery Charger = 2.5 t .3 Fail = CM


3. Current Navigation Data - provides data on good Fail .3v
UAV for navigation including speeds, heading,
track, winds, and fuel. Figure 10-2. Commonly Used Test Points
4. RPV test point check allows selection of five test
points to be monitored by system. (See Figure
10-2.) MKDQOO

5. EDC Panel - allows IP to select and monitor: 1. Payload - determines if platform is on or off.
Uplink analog, Uplink digital, Downlink analog,
and Downlink digital information. 2. FLIR - determines if sensor is on or off.

6. Payload Control - IP selects control parameters 3. DATA - provides data about sensor status.
for payload selected. Menu is only available when
Preset #lO RPV DATA, ITEM #6, CAMERA 4. POLARITY - determines if sensor signal is
CONTROL BAY is selected to PBY. Menu in this black hot or white hot.
field will reflect payload selected in preset #lO
RPV DATA, ITEM #3, PAYLOAD. 5. LEVEL MODE - rotary knobs used for fine or
coarse adjust background level.

6. LEVEL SET-push-button used to select auto or


manual IRIS control.

7. GAIN SET-rotary knob used to control the gain


command for FLIR.

8. MODE CONTROL - choose rate position for


payload operation.

1O-27 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

MKD-200 3. NAVIGATION/UPDATE allows the operator to


enter and change data in the navigation coordinate
1. PAY LOAD -determines if platform is on or off. program.

2. RATE - select high or low rate for platform. 10.22.4 Tracking Bay Presets

3. CAMERA - select camera on or off. 1. PLOTTER SETUP

4. IRIS MODE - determine if iris setting is deter- a. Pen Up push-button ...............................PRESS


mined automatically or manually.
b. Resetpush-button .................................PRESS
5. IRIS SET - allows for manual manipulation of
iris on camera. c. Pen should go to Park Pen ...............VERIFIED

6. MODE CONTROL - choose rate or position for d. Place Map(s)


payload operation. on plotter ...................................COMPLETED

10.22.3.4 Target Altitude (TARGET ALT). IP en- 2. MAP NUMBER


ters altitude of target above sea level in meters. Same as
Pilot Bay PRESET #7. a. Presetpush-button ................................PRESS

10.22.3.5 Camera Guide Menu. Same as Pilot b. Map #push-button ................................PRESS


Bay PRESET #6.
c. 1 (on the TBY keyboard) ......................ENTER
10.22.3.6 Navigation Programmer (NPL). Same
as Pilot Bay PRESET #3. 3. MAP ORIENTATION

10.22.3.7 Return Home Loading (RHL) a. Map Orient push-button ........................PRESS

1. RPV last update. Displays the last updated return b. Map Orient ............................ILLUMINATED
home parameters.
c. Local .....................................ILLUMINATED
2. Data change. Enables updating of the return home
parameters. Same as Item #2 in Preset. d. Using Cant/Step and Coarse/Fine push-buttons
place pen over grid intersection in Lower Left
3. LOAD Nav Program Return Home data. Loads comer of map.
RI-l update data when a programmed flight is
planned. e. Key in Easting; 3 digits
(you drop the ones, tens, and hundreds zeros
4. Auto loading. Enables/disables automatic loading of the coordinate) ...........,.,...................ENTER
of predelined return home parameters.
f. Key in Northing; 4 digits ......................ENTER
5. Man Return Home. Enables entering manual re-
turn home parameters and loading them. g. Repeat steps d-f for each comer of the map
working clockwise.
10.22.3.8 Navigation To Coordinates (NAV TO
COOR) h. Diagn Push-button .................ILLUMINATES

1. NAVIGATION/SELECT or NAVIGATION/ i. Plotter should go to each Point and the Pen


UPDATE menus will interchange at each push of should go down on each comer.
the ENTER key.
j. Check Digital Display for Comer Coord.
2. NAVIGATION/SELECT allows the operator to
select one of up to 10 targets displayed and acti- k. Pen returns to Pen Park ....................VERIFIED
vate it as the next target for this mode.
4. TCU COORDINATES

ORIGINAL 1O-28
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

a. TCU COORD Push-button ...................PRESS on point A when the zoom is maximum in (narrow
FOV).
b. TCU ......................................ILLUMINATED
2. Pressthe PRESET push-button on the Observers
c. Key in Easting; 6 Digits Control Table (OCT). The PRESET menu appears
for TCU coordinates ............................ENTER on the OTMP screen.

d. Key in Northing; 7 Digits 3. Select Item #3 (Alignment Procedures).


for TCU coordinates ............................ENTER
a. PRESET/ALIGNMENT menu appears on the
e. Plotter should go to the TCU Coord and OTMP screen.
the pen should go down ...................VERIFIED
b. Note the alignment correction number (in pix)
5. TCU ALTITUDE on Item #1 of the PRESET/ALIGNMENT
menu.
a. TCU Alt Push-button ............................PRESS
4. Select Item #2 (Optical Alignment).
b. TCU Alt n............................... ILLUMINATED
a. PRESET/ALIGNMENT/OPTICAL appears
c. Key in Alt (meters) of TCU ..............,.. -ENTER on the OTMP screen.

d. Will display in Easting Screen b. A second graphics cross appearson the screen.
while being keyed and will The position of the second cross can be con-
display briefly in not-thing trolled by the dimmer knobs on the OVC.
screen after entry ............................VERIFIED
5. Select Item #l (Line #l) ofthe PRESET/ALIGN-
6. REPEAT FOR MAPS #2 through #9 as Req. Sub- MENT/OPTICAL menu. At the bottom of the
sequent maps must be within the boundaries of screen, 1 first * second - appears.
Map #l.
6. Place payload in Position Control mode (where
10.22.5 Observer Bay Presets the payload is controlled by the bearing and de-
pression knobs) by pressing the ON push-button
PRESET Push-button .........................................PRESS in the POSITION MODE CONTROL area of the
PLATFORM CONTROL module on the OCD.
10.22.5.1 General Data. Select item #1 General The bottom half (unmarked) of the POSITION
data. MODE CONTROL ON push-button illuminates
when pressed and the top half (ON) illuminates
1. First Event (number) ................................ENTER when the RPV reports that the platform is in posi-
tion control mode.
2. Date (dd-mm-yy) .....................................ENTER
7. Locate the target by moving the BEARING DE-
3. Mission (number) .....................................ENTER GREES and DEPRESSION DEGREES knobs on
the OCD until the target appears on the screen.
10.22.5.2 Payload. Select item #2. Payload Defini-
tion. Select appropriate Payload. 8. Move the zoom to 75% ofmaximum zoom in (nar-
row FOV). The graphic zoom indicator on the
10.22.5.3 Optical Axis Alignment Procedure. right side ofthe screen should be 2.5 lines from the
To align the optical axis of a payload with the screen on top of the zoom scale.
the OTMP, perform the following steps. The UAV must
be on the ground and stationary before performing this 9. Using the BEARING DEGREES AND DEPRES-
procedure. SION DEGREES knobs on the OCD, place the
original graphics cross (not the one controlled by
1. Place the target 10 to 15 feet from the payload, the dimmer knobs) on point A of the target.
making sure that points B and C remain on the
screen with the graphics cross (center of screen) 10. Move the second graphics cross, using the dimmer
knobs on the OVC, to point B of the target and

1o-29 ORIGINAL
Al-SRRPV-NFM-OOO

press ENTER. At the bottom of the screen, the 1 2. Gun On Ship.. ...................................(+Y ES, -NO)
first * second - will change to 1 first + second *. Yes indicates gun is on ship with TCU.

11. Move the zoom to 75% of maximum zoom out 3. Gun Location Entry ...............El 23456 N 1234567
(wide FOV). The graphic zoom indicator on the If yes selected above this grid will be same as
right side of the screen should be 2.5 lines from the TCU.
bottom of the zoom scale.
4. HEIGHT ................................................XXXXM
12. Place the original graphics cross on point A of the Gun locations elevation in meters (MSL).
target using the BEARING DEGREES and DE-
PRESSION DEGREES knobs on the OCT. 5. Ship Location ........................E 123456N 1234567
Grid for firing battery or ship.
13. Place the second graphics cross on point B of the
target using the dimmer knobs on the OVC and 6. Delete Gun Entry.
press ENTER. The - signs in Item #l (Line #1)
of the menu will change to +* signs. At the bot- 10.22.6 Other Observer Control Modes
tom of the screen 2 first * second - appears.
10.22.6.1 Multifunction
14. Repeat steps 8 to 13 using points A and C on the
target. The - signs in Item #2 (Line #2) on the 1. Screen selection
menu will change to + signs.
2. Multifunction/Screens
15. After the -* signs in Item #2 (Line #2) of the
menu have changed to + signs, press ENTER Left screen (normal by UAV sensor)
again. This completes the procedure and returns Right screen (normal by DATA)
you to the PRESET/ALIGNMENT menu.
1. Data
ENTER may have to be pressed a second time
to return to the PRESET/ALIGNMENT menu. If 2. UAV Sensor
CLEAR is pressed instead of ENTER, the adjust-
ments are not performed by the system. 3. VCR#l

16. Record the payload number and the alignment 4. VCR #2


correction @ix) number as it appears in Item # 1 of
the PRESET/ALIGNMENT menu. Anytime this 5. Auxiliary
payload is utilized for a mission, the recorded
alignment correction (pix) number can be entered 6. Default parameters.
in Item #l of the PRESET/ALIGNMENT menu
and the alignment procedure does not have to be 10.22.6.2 Artillery - Light Pen (Article)
repeated.
1. Target Number
10.22.5.4 Timers and Counters
Average
1. VCR Timer .............................SET AS DESIRED
set to display time tape has remaining (MP) 2. Adjustment
Select item #4 Timers and Counters.
# ADD RIGHT
2. Camera Timer - Disregard, Not used. (DROP) LEFT
DIST . A&UTH
10.22.5.5 Gunfire
Operator should ensure that accurate barometric
Select item #5 Gunfire. pressure, declination angle, and target altitude are al-
ready entered. The direction in which the impact of the
1. Gun/Target display ........(+ENABLE,-DISABLE) rounds must be corrected is as follows:
Displays gun target line on video screen.
ADD - impact corrected to the North

ORIGINAL 1O-30
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

DROP - impact corrected to the South b. Camera bearing and depression in relation to
UAV and field of view (in angles)
RIGHT - impact corrected to the East
c. UAV barometric pressure.
LEFT - impact corrected to the West
3. Parametersfed in by the operator at shell impact:
Artillery light pen adjustments are based on 6400
mils (360 grid). a. The parameters of the shell impact point.

10.22.6.3 Target Acquisition Table. On OCT se- The program does not require information on the
lect Target Acquisition Table. UAV location to perform calculations. Therefore, the
GCSAJAV range and azimuth and GCS location param-
1. TGT ACQ/Select ............................DISPLAY ED eters are not important for the artillery adjustment
procedure.
2. PressENTER .......................................PRESSED
The adjustment results are displayed on the data
3. TGT ACQAJpdate ..........................DISPLAYED monitor and, for a few seconds, on the UAV video mon-
itor. The information is displayed on the local map axes
4. Enter up to 9 target as a number/word pair for each shell.
locations in 13 digit UTM
grid coordinates and altitudes ..............ENTERED 1. The number represents the distance, in meters, be-
tween the shell impact point and the target loca-
5. PressENTER .......................................PRESSED tion.

6. Select the number 2. The words represent the direction in which the
of the target desired shellfire must be corrected (add, drop, left, right).
for TGT ACQ function ......................SELECTED
To begin the artillery adjustment procedure, the
10.22.6.3.1 Artillery Adjustment Proce- ARTILL push-button on the OCT is pressed and Item
dures. The Artillery Adjustment application pro- #2 is selected from the display menu. The adjustment
gram provides the parameters for artillery adjustment procedure is performed using a light pen.
using the real-time picture seen on the TV screen at the
exact moment the shell explodes. The program calcu- After starting the adjustment procedure, the observer
lates the actual distance between the intersection of the should track the target on the monitor as accurately as
optical axis with the ground and the shell impact point possible. The camera field-of-view must be at maxi-
indicated by the operator. mum. When the shell impact appearson the screen, the
pen should be pressedaccurately against this point. This
To perform the calculations, the system receives: will cause a second cross hair to momentarily appear.

1. Parameters fed in by the operator before flight: The light pen is activated by pressing it against the
screen.
a. Barometric correction parameters for correc-
tion of UAV barometric pressure With the pen touch, the correction parameters are su-
perimposed for a few seconds on the video picture, indi-
b. The angle between the map local grid north cating the shell number to which the information
and magnetic north relates. Every press of the pen starts the process again.

c. Estimated target altitude above sea level When touching the impact point with the light pen, it
is essential that the optical axis cross be accurately posi-
d. The optical axis parameters on the screenaxes tioned on the target.

e. Camera type (volt-angles, table, focal length). At the same time, the data monitor (on the OTMP)
displays the following information:
2. Parameters received from the system:
1. The shell number
a. UAV pitch, roll, and heading angles

IO-31 ORIGINAL
2. The average correction in meters for al1 shells en- c. Ammunition:
tered, given as RIGHT/LEFT (East/West) and
ADD/DROP (North/South) (1) Shell

3. The adjustment required in meters for the shell, (a) HE is standard.


given as RIGHT/LEFT and ADD/DROP.
(b) ICM, ILLUM, FASCAM, SMOKE,
Because the Artillery Adjustment function (Artill etc. must be requested.
Menu) calculates the distance and azimuth between the
target and the shell impact point, this function is also (2) Fuse
useful in the measurements of large objects on the
ground, i.e., check points in convoy paths, bridge or air- (a) Quick is standard.
field lengths, etc.
(b) VT, TIME, etc. must be requested.
1. Holding the optical axis on one end of an object to
be measured and applying a light pen press to the d. Distribution of rounds:
other end will provide a distance and azimuth be-
tween the two points. This information is then dis- (1) Parallel sheaf is standard.
played on the Observers Graphic Display field.
(2) Converged sheaf (all rounds impact near
Artillery Call For Fire Format same point).

1, OBSERVER IDENTIFICATION: de (3) Open sheaf (rounds impact at max effec-


tive bursting radius).
2. WARNING ORDER: K
(Immediate Suppression; Fire for Effect; Adjust 6. METHOD OF FIRE AND CONTROL
Fire; Suppress)
a. Method of Fire: Battery is standard. (Observer
3. TARGET LOCATION: may request L/R Plt; All available, etc.)

a. (GRID) ------ K b. Method of Control: Fire When Ready Is Stan-


(6 digit grid coordinate) dard

b. (POLAR) Direction ,Distance K (1) At My Command


Unit firing must know observers location.
(2) Time On Target
c. (SHIFT FROM KNOWN POINT)
Direction (3) Cannot Observe
L/R ,ADD/DROP
UP/DN K (4) Fire When Ready

4. TARGET DESCRIPTION: K (5) Continuous Illumination


Include type of equipment, number of troops, etc.
(6) Coordinated Illumination
5. METHOD OF ENGAGEMENT
(7) Continuous Fire
a. Type of adjustment:
(a) Cease Loading
(1) Area (standard)
(b) Check Firing
(2) Precision (registration OR destruction).
(8) Repeat.
b. Danger Close (The term Danger Close must
be included if rounds will fall within 600 me- Naval Gunfire Call For Fire Format
ters of friendly troops.)
1. SPOTTER IDENTIFICATION: de

ORIGINAL 1O-32
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

2. WARNING ORDER: [FIRE MISSION (target SHELL FUSE COMBINATIONS AVAILABLE FOR NA
number if known)] VAL GUNS

3. Target Location: (omit if target number is used)

a. GRID K
(6digitad-rznF

b. SHIFT FROM KNOWN POINT


L/R *- ADD/DROP ,-UP/DN
DIR,
I 5-m
I
SAME AS 5138

c. POLAR:
DIS,
DIR,
ALT CORR,
I 16-150
I
HCIPD, MT. BD; AP/BD; lCM/MT
I

10.23 FUNCTIONAL CHECK FLIGHTS


4. TARGET DESCRIPTION: K
Functional check flights (FCFs) are required under
5. METHOD OF ENGAGEMENT the following conditions (after the necessary ground
check and prior to the release of the aircraft for opera-
a. Type of engagement (choose one): destruc- tional use):
tion, neutralization, harass, mark, screen, ob-
scure, coordinated illum, continuous illum A. Receipt of an air vehicle from another reporting
*Danger Close is 750m for 5 guns and 1OOOm custodian or rework facility. When an air vehicle
for 16 guns with the exception of 16 ICM has not flown in more than 30 days and is returned
which is 2000m*. to flight status. Minimum checks required are pre-
fixed by the letter A.
b. Trajectory (Full Charge is standard) request
reduced charge for low trajectory. B. After installation of engine, engine rigging has
been performed, fuel control or any other compo-
C. Ammunition (Shell/Fuse combination) nents that cannot be checked in ground operation.
Minimum checks required are prefixed by the let-
HE/PD is standard. ter B.
6. METHOD OF FIRE AND CONTROL C. When fixed or movable flight surfaces or flight
control system components have been installed,
a. Method of Fire: main armaments, secondary reinstalled, adjusted or rerigged, and improper ad-
armament, number of guns, special instruc- justment or replacement of such components
tions, interval, sustained fire, TOT. could cause an unsafe operating condition. Mini-
mum checks required are prefixed by the letter
b. Method ofControl: spotter adjusts, ship adjust, C.
fire for effect.
D. After major avionics repair or replacement that
cannot be checked during ground operation. Mini-
mum checks required are prefixed by the letter
D.

Use the checklist below for FCFs.

1o-33 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

NATOPS
PIONEER UAV
FUNCTIONAL CHECK FLIGHT CHECKLIST

Date of Check Flight Check Flight Number

Aircraft Bureau Number Reason for FCF

BRIEF:

Mission Commander:

Quality Assurance Rep:

DEBRIEF:

Mission Commander:

Quality Assurance Rep:

PROFILE
PREFLIGHT

ABCD 1. EXTERIOR INSPECTION .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . ..

STARTING ENGINE

ABCD 1. Perform Starting Engine checklist.

Figure 10-3. Pioneer UAV FCF Checklist (Sheet 1 of 4)

ORIGINAL 1o-34
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

GROUND CONTROL CHECKS

A C FLIGHT CONTROLS (AUTOPILOT ENGAGED)


1. ELEVATORS FULL UP.. ................................................
2. ELEVATORS FULL DOWN ............................................
3. AILERONS LEFT ROLL ................................................
4. AILERONS RIGHT ROLL.. ............................................
5. RUDDERS LEFT YAW ..................................................
6. NOSE WHEEL STEERING LEFT.. ................................
7. RUDDERS RIGHT YAW.. ..............................................
8. NOSE WHEEL STEERING RIGHT ...............................

AB ENGINE CHECKS (AUTOPILOT ENGAGED)


1. IDLE RPM (3200-3500). ..................................................
2. BUS VOLTAGE (28 k2 Vdc). .........................................
3. MAX RPM (6700 MIN). ...................................................
4. ENGINE CUT (LIGHTS OFF). .........................................
5. ENGINE CUT (LIGHTS ON). ...........................................
6. THROTTLE DETENT CHECK (CBX, 1-8 CLICKS
FROM IDLE POSITION TO FIRST NOTED
RPM CHANGE) .............................................................

A C FLIGHT CONTROLS (AUTOPILOT DISENGAGED)


1. ELEVATORS FULL UP.. ................................................
2. ELEVATORS FULL DOWN.. ..........................................
3. AILERONS LEFT ROLL ................................................
4. AILERONS RIGHT ROLL.. ............................................
5. RUDDERS LEFT YAW.. ................................................
6. NOSE WHEEL STEERING LEFT.. ................................
7. RUDDERS RIGHT YAW.. ..............................................
8. NOSE WHEEL STEERING RIGHT.. .............................

AB ENGINE CHECKS (AUTOPILOT DISENGAGED)


1. IDLE RPM (3200-3500). .................................................
2. BUS VOLTAGE (28 k2 Vdc) ..........................................
3. MAX RPM (6700 MIN). ....................................................
4. ENGINE CUT (LIGHTS OFF). ..........................................
5. ENGINE CUT (LIGHTS ON). ...........................................
6. THROl-l-LE DETENT CHECK (CBX, l-5 CLICKS
FROM IDLE POSITION TO FIRST NOTED
RPM CHANGE) .............................................................

Figure 10-3. Pioneer UAV FCF Checklist (Sheet 2 of 4)

1o-35 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO -

INFLIGHT CHECKS (EXTERNAL PILOT)

A C CONTROLLABILITY CHECKS
1. PITCH UP (18 +_3DEG). .................................................
2. PITCH DOWN (14 k3 DEG) ...........................................
3. LEFT ROLL (57 k3 DEG) ................................................
4. RIGHT ROLL (57 ,+3 DEG). .............................................
5. LEFT YAW (20 DEG) ......................................................
6. RIGHT YAW (20 DEG). ..................................................
7. STRAIGHT & LEVEL FLIGHT .......................................
8. AUTOPILOT DISENGAGE FLIGHT CHECKS ................

AB ENGINE CHECKS
1. SELECTED RPM (INDICATE SELECTED RPM). ..........
2. INCREASE/DECREASE THROTTLE ...........................
3. DC BUS VOLTAGE STEADY.. .........................................

A D HEADING CHECKS
1. HEADING INDICATOR STEADY ..................................
2. ACCURACY WITH RUNWAY/SHIP ..............................
3. FOUR CARDINAL HEADINGS ......................................

Figure 10-3. Pioneer UAV FCF Checklist (Sheet 3 of 4)

ORIGINAL lo-36
Al -SRRPV-NFM400

INFLIGHT CHECKS (INTERNAL PILOT)

A INFLIGHT CHECK
1. PERFORM DISHLOCK .................................................
2. IP CONTROL CONFIRM ........................................ CONFIRM

A D CONTROLLABILITY CHECKS
I. KNOB CONTROL.. ............................................... SELECTED
2. HEADING (STEADY) ....................................................
3. ALTITUDE (STEADY). ...................................................
4. AIRSPEED (STEADY). ..................................................
5. SELECT ROLL.. ...................................................... CONFIRM
6. ROLL (STEADY). ...........................................................

A D CAMERA GUIDE CHECKS


1. CAMERA GUIDE MODE ...................................... SELECTED
2. VERIFY SET PARAMETERS ........................................

A D PROGRAMMER CHECKS
1. PROGRAMMER MODE ....................................... SELECTED
2. VERIFY SET PARAMETERS ........................................

A D RETURN HOME CHECKS


1. RPV ADDRESS.. ................................................... CHANGED
2. RETURN HOME MODE (ACTIVATED). ........................
3. VERIFY PARAMETERS.. ..............................................
Remarks:

Figure 10-3. Pioneer RPV FCF Checklist (Sheet 4 of 4)

1o-37 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

CHAPTER 11

Shipboard Procedures

11.1 INTRODUCTION around the ship, a switching system for the dual anten-
nas, an antenna stabilization system, a more powerful
The shipboard version of the Pioneer UAV system antenna azimuth drive, and modifications to the RF sys-
incorporates a number of modifications to provide an tem. A net recovery system is provided to net arrest the
operational capability in an at-sea environment. These UAV for retrieval aboard ship. The net recovery system
changes include an enhanced Navigation Data System, is referred to as the Shipboard Pioneer Arresting and
the addition of a second TCU antenna to provide full Recovery System Three (SPARS III).
360-degree communications and tracking coverage

1, SPARSIII POLES
2. PCS ANTENNA
3. AFT C-BAND ANTENNA
4. GCS LOCATION
5. FWD C-BAND ANTENNA
6. ANTENNAL SWITCH POINTS - MOVING FWD
7. ANTENNAL SWITCH POINTS - MOVING AFT
8. TCU LOCATION

Figure 11-1. LPD-4 Class UAV Installation

11-I
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

11.2 SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS


100 - Navigation
The LPD configured Pioneer GCS is housed in a
modified MF shelter mounted on the aft Gun Deck. The 200 - Satellite
TCU is housed in an S-250 shelter located one deck be-
low the Signal Bridge. The TCU antennasare housed in 15 - Heading Mode
shipboard radomes installed on platforms remotely lo-
cated from the shelter. The forward platform is located 24 - Speed
on the same level as the TCU shelter with the antennait-
self located approximately two levels higher. The aft 25 - Heading
antenna platform is attached to the aft side of the port
stack at approximately the 03 level. The PCS is installed 35 - Gyro Error
inside the skin of the ship in the compartment directly
below Primary Flight Control (PRIFLY). The PCS an- 36 - Gyro Ratio
tenna is housed in a radome with the supporting plat-
form installed on the port stack at about the 01 level. Main Menu
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) units are installed
in the GCS, TCU, and PCS in place of the land-based
systems backup batteries to provide emergency power INT LATN 38 09.044 01/l l/99
in the event of a ships power failure (Figure 1l- 1). 3D LON W 76 26.234 GMT 16 57 09
11.2.1 Navigation Data System. Becausethe ship Heading 62.1 (A) ALT =33 m
is continuously changing position, an effective means
of updating the ground station position and true antenna 100 Speed 15.00 kts DRT=O
azimuth must be employed. The main navigation unit
for the LPD installation is the MX- 1105B located in the 100 - NAVIGATION
TCU. The MX-1105B contains a Trimble ACE II GPS
receiver, CPU, synchronization circuit card, and a dis- 1. MT, SEQ, NAV: INT is displayed upon power up
play with keypad on the front panel. Ships heading in- of the system. SEQ indicates the GPS receiver is
formation is passedto the CPU from the ships gyro via searching for satellite data. NAV indicates the unit
the synchronization card.The CPU packages positional is performing positional fixes.
information from the GPS and heading information
from the ships gyro for display on the Navigation Inter- 2. 2D, 3D: Indicates the receiver is performing a
face Status menu in the PBY via the IBX. The display 2-dimensional or 3-dimensional fix. This relates
and keypad on the MX-I 105B provides access to sev- to the number of satellites available.
eral menus that display navigational information, satel-
lite information, and user input menus. The IBX 3. 100: Identifies this display as menu 100.
assemblesthe navigation data in a CBY-compatible for-
mat. The data is sent through the IBX StargateACLcard 4. LAT/LON: Provides GPS location in degrees,
via the ACL-4 Distribution Box to the CBY, where it is minutes, and thousandths of a minute.
interfaced to the Pioneer system. A Graphics Adapter
PCB (not installed in the land-based version of the IBX) 5. Heading: (A) indicates heading in degrees from
allows raw IBX navigation data to be displayed on the the ships gyro. This is selected using menu 15
right-hand PBY monitor as the Navigation Interface Heading Mode. (M) indicates heading input was
Status menu (see paragraph 11.2.1.2). The menu is se- manually input using menu 25 Heading.
lected with the A/B switch attached to the right-hand
side of the PCD. 6. Speed: This information is entered manually from
menu 24 Speed and is not used for any calcula-
11.2.1.1 MX-1105B Menus. The unit contains sev- tions.
eral status and user input menus:
7. Date: Current date-from GPS.

8. GMT: Indicates current Greenwich Mean Time. If


time is incrementing, the system is performing po-
sitional fixes.

ORIGINAL 11-2
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

9. ALT: Altitude of GPS receiver relative to spher- 25 Heading is automatically displayed for heading
oid level and indicated in meters. input.

10. DRT: A timer that activates when satellite signals 2. 15: Identifies this display as menu 15.
are lost. NAV will change to SEQ, GMT time will
freeze, and after ten seconds the PBY monitor will
prompt pilot for manual update of ships location. Speed
Speed = 36
Enter Speed =
24

24 - SPEED

1. Speed: Indicates speed entered previously in this


200 - SATELLITES menu.

1. # SATS: Number of satellites used to calculate po- 2. Enter Speed: Allows user to enter current ships
sition. The Trimble receiver uses a maximum of 8 speed. User may enter values from -100 kts to
satellites. +100 kts. After entering value, menu 100 is dis-
played.
2. HDOP: Horizontal Dilution of Precision. A mea-
surement of accuracy for geometric GPS calcula- 3. 24: Identifies this display as menu 24.
tions. Values less than 8 are considered good (1 =
best).
Heading
3. 200: Identifies this display as menu 200. Heading = 109.2
Enter Heading =
4. COG: Indicates ships course over the ground in 25
degrees. This parameter is derived by the
MX-1105B from a series of GPS position fixes,
and may differ from the ships heading due to cur- 25 - HEADING
rent set and drift.
1. Heading: Indicates heading entered previously in
5. SOG: Indicates ships speed over the ground in this menu.
knots. This parameter is derived by the
MX-1105B from a series of GPS position fixes, 2. Enter Heading: Allows user to manually enter cur-
and may differ from the ships speed through the rent ships heading. An invalid value will display
water due to current set and drift. 00.

6. MAG VAR: Magnetic variation for the current 3. 25: Identifies this display as menu 25.
position. This information is stored within the
GPS receiver and is not updated.
Gyro Error
Gyro Error = 15.2
Heading Mode Enter Gyro Error =
Use (-) for West
Heading Mode = (A) or (M) 35
15
35 - GYRO ERROR
15 - HEADING MODE
1. Gyro Error: Indicates gyro error entered previ-
1. Heading Mode: Selects between Automatic or ously in this menu.
Manual heading input. If Automatic, the ships
heading is obtained from the ships gyro via the 2. Enter Gyro Error: Allows user to enter ships gyro
synchronization card. If manual is selected, menu error. Error value is obtained from the ships

113 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

bridge. An east error (+) is added to current head- 1. O-9: Provides numeric entry and decimal point.
ing. A west error (-) is subtracted from current
heading. Heading entered manually (using menu 2. 0: Decimal point.
25 Heading) will not be adjusted for gyro error in-
put. 3. ENT: Typing menu number and pressing enter
will display that menu. Pressing enter by itselfdis-
3. 35: Identifies this display as menu 35. plays the main menu.

4. t: This key operates as a backspace.


Gyro Ratio
Gyro Ratio = 32 5. +: This key is not operational.
Enter Gyro Ratio =
36 6. -: This represents a negative sign when entering
numeric values. In menu 15 Heading Mode, se-
lects between Automatic and Manual.
36 - GYRO RATIO
7. CE/E: This key is not operational.
1. Gyro Ratio: Indicates gyro ratio entered previ-
ously in this menu. 11.2.1.2 Navigation Interface Status Menu. This
menu provides the operator with station coordinate in-
2. Enter Gyro Ratio: Allows user to enter the ratio formation as well as the status of the navigation
between the course and tine synchros in the ships equipment.
gyrocompass. Value is obtained from ships
bridge. This menu is required when Heading is se-
lected to Automatic.
NAVIGATION IhlERFACE STATUS Vwdon 3.1

3. 36: Identifies this display as menu 36. LONGITUDE


UlTnloE
24 B 18 E:
17 15 52 N:
247m1
412M66
GRID: 35
GUP l(:Y:11
FAULT nyE
oo:oo:oo

IZ-%Y:ifi4
GCS POLLINO: Posmotd xrwz
100 - NAV 15 - Heading Mode 35 - Gyro Error WSNd NAUV: UNAVAILABLE
BACKUP NAVz YAGNAVOX GPS
200 - SAT 24 - Speed 36 - Gyro Ratio .

25 - Heading COGZ
48.8
ROLL: 0.0 SOGZ 10.4
FWOREL: 2.0

MAIN MENU
I AJTREL
MASTER:
2.0
Fwo

1. This menu is displayed when the user has entered


an incorrect menu number or when ENT key is 1. LONGITUDE/LATITUDE: Represents the most
pressed. recent coordinate update (degrees, minutes, sec-
onds) from the MX-1105b. The coordinates are
KEYPAD updated once every 2 seconds. If communication
is lost with the navigation unit, the coordinates re-
main at the most recently updated coordinates un-
til the link is restored and new coordinates are
received from the navigation unit.

2. E, N, and GRID: Representsthe easting, not-thing,


and grid zone for the UTM coordinate system, re-
spectively. The grid zone displayed is the pre-
ferred grid zone for the current position and is
unaffected by the GRID ZONE INPUT item on
the PBY GEOGRAPHIC DATA menu (PRESET
#7). The grid coordinates correspond to the LON-
GITUDE and LATITUDE displayed on the menu.

3. GMT: Indicates current Greenwich Mean Time.

ORIGINAL 11-4
4. FAULT TIME: Indicates when the most recent 10. HEADING: Indicates ships true heading (in de-
fault occurred due to lost communications with grees).
the GCS or MX-1105b. The time is indicated in
GMT. 11. COG: Indicates ships course over the ground (in
degrees). This parameter is derived by the
5. GCS POLLING: Indicates the current information MX-1105B from a series of GPS position fixes,
being requested by the CBY. The codes are listed and may differ from the ships heading due to cur-
below. rent set and drift.

a. HEADING/P/R: Request for ships heading, 12. PITCH: Indicates ships pitch (in degrees) when
pitch, and roll. Note: ships heading is the only this data is supplied from a WSN-5 unit. Remains
parameter in this group currently used by the at 0.0 for MX-11 OSB.
system.
13. ROLL: Indicates ships roll (in degrees) when this
b. POSITION X/Y/Z: Request for ships position data is supplied from a WSN-5 unit. Remains at
in 3 axes. 0.0 for MX- 1105B.

c. -blank-: No request. This should appear for 14. SPEED: Indicates ships speed (in knots) when
brief intervals only. this data is supplied from a WSN-5 unit. The
MX-1105B is not provided with a ships speed in-
d. OFF: Communication with the CBY has been put, but the speed may be entered manually into
interrupted. The time of the fault is displayed the MX- 1105B via its keyboard. If this is done, the
in the FAULT TIME column. If communica- manually entered speed will be displayed on this
tions are restored, the time ofthe fault remains, line.
indicating when the interruption occurred.
15. SOG: Indicates ships speed over the ground (in
6. WSN-5: Displays the status of the WSN-5 naviga- knots). This parameter is derived by the
tion unit. This unit is not installed on LPDs, and MX-1105B from a series of GPS position fixes,
the display reads UNAVAILABLE in this appli- and may differ from the ships speed through the
cation. water due to current set and drift.

7. BACKUP NAV: Displays the status codes of the 16. FWD REL: Forward antenna relative azimuth
MX-1105B navigation units. The codes are as fol- (O-360 degrees).
lows:
17. AFT REL: Aft antenna relative azimuth (O-360
8. MX-1105B: degrees).

a. GPS: Indicates that the MX-1105B has a GPS 18. MASTER: Indicates the antenna currently se-
fix. This code indicates normal operation. lected as active in the auto-switching mode.

b. DR: Indicates the MX-1105B is in dead reck- Note


oning mode. This generatesdegraded position
coordinates and does not update the displayed In manual switching mode, the active an-
coordinates. tenna is displayed by the LEDs on the
COHU Camera Control Panel. The
c. XX: An error has occurred in communication MASTER display will always indicate the
with the MX- 1105B. antenna that would be selected if the system
was switched to auto mode.
d. FAIL: No communication with the
MX-I 105B.
11.2.2 Antenna Elevation. Both TCU dish anten-
e. LOSS: No communication with the nas are stabilized in the vertical plane of the feed horn to
MX-1105B. negate the effects of ships pitch and roll on communi-
cation and tracking. A gyro on each antenna senses
9. *: Flashes alternately to indicate the IBX is opera- ships motion and sends a signal to an Elevation Servo
tional . Amplifier (ESA), which drives a heavy-duty linear

11-5 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

actuator attached to the dish. The elevation angle (rela- for a constant high output in order to supply sufficient
tive to true level) is manually controlled by a knob on power to the PCUs in the antennas. Hi and low PCU out-
the COHU Camera Control Panel, which is mounted put power is still manually selectable on the PCD. A
just above the Observers TV Monitor Panel (the shipboard-only DC/DC converter is installed in each
COHU camera is no longer used but the control panel is antenna RF Box to provide *15 volt power to the RF
still installed in the OBY). The system automatically Plate in order to avoid the voltage drop inherent in the
maintains the selected angle, which is indicated by a long cable runs.
meter on the panel. The stabilization system may be by-
passed if desired by means of a switch on the panel. 11.2.6 PCS. The shipboard PCS is installed in a
drip-proof cabinet instead ofthe three EDAK casesused
11.2.3 Antenna Azimuth. Dual Triac Power Am- on a land-based system. PCS horn antenna coverage on
plifiers are installed in the 221 Integrator. These allow the LPD is currently limited due to obstruction by the aft
driving the antenna pedestal motors at up to 5 de- stack and the telescoping helo hangar. With the hangar
greeslsec,which is a higher rotation speedthan that pos- fully retracted the coverage is approximately from 103
sible with the standard azimuth drive. This may be to 282 degrees relative. With the hangar fi~lly extended
required if the ship changes course rapidly while the the coverage is from 090 to 282 degrees relative.
system is tracking. In a land-based system, the antenna 360-degree rotation pedestals are available for ship-
drive amplifiers are installed in the MCAT (Micropro- board use, but these are not required since the PCS an-
cessor Controlled Auto Tracker). The shipboard MCAT tenna does not have 360-degree coverage.
is modified to be compatible with the external
amplifiers. 11.3 SPARS Ill

11.2.4 Antenna Switching. Only one antenna at a The SPARS III net recovery system consists of three
time is transmitting to and receiving from the UAV. An- vertical poles used to support a 29-f? high by 39-e wide
tennaselection is controlled by the Antenna Resolver PCB recovery net. The net traverses on a V-shaped slipper
(not installed in land-basedsystems) in the IBX. The card cable with two energy-absorbing water twisters damp-
receives antennaazimuth data and controls the switching ening the force applied by the UAV on net impact. Slip-
points basedon parameterscoded on the IBX floppy disk. per cable tension is applied by way of a tensioning cable
On the LPD installation, the switching points are 080 and running from a winch located at the base of the forward
330 degreesrelative when rotating clockwise, and 070 and pole, through a boat block at the top of the forward pole
320 degreesrelative when rotating counterclockwise. The and attached to the apex of the V-shaped slipper cable.
switching commands are sentto the 22 1 Integrator (which When fully rigged, the system is tensioned to 4000
performs the actual switching of the power and signal pounds with the net located 40 ft forward of the at-tpole
lines) and to the RF Switch Box (where the RF paths are at its static (rigged) position. During UAV recovery the
switched). When placed in auto mode (via a switch on the net will travel forward a maximum of 30 fi (Figure
COHU Camera Control Panel), the slave (deselected)an- 1l-2).
tenna is driven so that it is always pointing in the samedi-
rection as the master (selected) antenna,and is thus ready The aft poles are approximately 69 fi apart and lo-
to assumecommunications when the UAV enters its cov- cated in the catwalks at the after comers of the flight
eragearea.Whenthe switch is placed in MANUAL mode deck approximately 204 ft from the forward pole. The
only the selectedantennais driven, which will result in the forward pole is mounted at the aft port comer of the han-
two antennascoming to rest at different azimuths. Before gar. All poles are raised by means of electric mo-
selecting auto mode, the antennas should be aligned man- tor-driven hydraulic systems. The aft poles use sliding
ually as closely as possible to the same azimuth. forward braces and pivoting inboard braces for support
when fully rigged.The forward pole is supported against
11.2.5 RF System. The primary shipboard change slipper cable tension by means of guy wires attached to
to the RF system is the addition of the RF Switch Box in the top forward edge of the hangar and on the inboard
the TCU. This unit contains the coax relays that route side of the port stack. When not in use the poles are low-
the RF signals to the forward or aft antennaIt also con- ered into horizontal resting positions so as not to inter-
tains amplifiers to boost the uplink and downlink sig- fere with helicopter flight operations.
nals. These boosters are required because of losses in
the shipboard antenna cables, which are much longer In addition to the main recovery net, a barricade net is
than a land-based systems due to the remotely mounted installed between the aft poles to prevent a UAV from
antennas.Additionally, external amplifiers are installed undershooting the main recovery net and causing
on each TCU RF Plate to further boost the downlink sig- damage or injury to helos, vehicles, or personnel on
nal. The TCU C-band uplink transmitter is hard-wired deck. The barricade extends up from the deck to a height

ORIGINAL II-6
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

Tension Cable

AR C-Band Antenna

Main Recovery Net

Underrun Barricade

Figure 1l-2. Shipboard Pioneer Arrestment and Recovery System (SPARS) III Installation

approximately four feet below the bottom of the main net is then lowered to the flight deck by easing tension on
net. Due to its rigid attachment to the aft poles there is no the slipper cable. Once on the deck the UAV is removed
provision for energy absorption other than net stretch on from the net and a post flight inspection is completed.
UAV impact.
11.4 UAV FLIGHT DECK OPERATIONS
Note
11.4.1 Organization. When operating UAVs aboard
Upon impacting the barricade net, there is a LPD class ships, a UAV detachment will be embarked
good chance the UAV will either land in the with an Officer in Charge (OIC). Additionally, various
deck edge netting or fall off the fantail into test personnel and technical representatives may also be
the water. embarked. Duties and responsibilities are assigned as
follows:
During SPARS III operations, the upper comers of
the main recovery net are attached to the slipper cable 11.4.1 .I UAV Detachment Oflicer in Charge.When
via nylon ropes attached to energy-absorbing straps. embarked, the UAV Detachment Officer in Charge re-
The straps are wound on drums axially mounted within ports to the Executive Officer and Commanding Officer
the energy-absorbing water twisters. The lower comers for all matters involving UAV operations and UAV De-
of the main net are then attachedto gathering lines. Upon tachment personnel. Specifically, the UAV Detachment
UAV impact the recovery net slides forward on the slip- OIC will be responsible for the following (when
per cables applying tension to the attaching strap allow- embarked):
ing the UAVs forward energy to be absorbed by the
water twisters. As the net slides forward on the slipper ca- 1. Maintenance and operation of UAVs, UAV stor-
bles the lower comers are drawn up into a U shape age containers, recovery net and associated equip-
around the UAV. Once coming to rest the UAV is sus- ment, AVGAS bladder and fuel fittings, hoses,
pended in the recovery net over the deck. The recovery and pumps, Ground Control System (GCS), Porta-

11-7 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

ble Control System (PCS), and associated UAV RAT0 bottle storage magazine, ready service locker,
control equipment and the security of the magazine. When the UAV de-
tachment is not embarked, the Weapons Officer is also
2. For all UAV fueling operations responsible for the safe handling and storage of RAT0
bottles.
3. For rigging and breakdown of the UAV recovery
net and launch platforms 11.4.1.7 Navigator. The ships Navigator will pro-
vide an appropriate flight weather briefing 2 l/2 hours
4. For safe and proper handling of Rocket Assisted prior to the scheduled launch time. Information will be
Take Off (RATO) bottles provided on the ships intended movement and naviga-
tion information in preparation for UAV missions.
5. For maintenance and cleanliness of assigned com-
partments while embarked. 11.4.1.8 TAO/CIC Watch Officer. The TAO or
CIC Watch Officer will provide a tactical mission brief
11.4.1.2 Air Officer. The ships Air Officer is re- to the UAV Mission Commander approximately two
sponsible for overall flight deck operation and safety. hours prior to a scheduled UAV launch.
He reports directly to the Commanding Officer for oper-
ations involving the flight deck. In addition, he is re- 11.5 UAV PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES
sponsible for the maintenance and operation of all flight
deck equipment and for the direction of all flight deck Chapter 10 provides detailed preflight procedures for
personnel. He will provide the following support for UAV systems. The following are supplemental proce-
UAV operations: dures for operating UAVs from LPD class ship flight
decks:
1. Man all designated flight quarters stations as
amended for UAV operations. 11.5.1 TCU PREFLIGHT INSPECTION

2. Provide designated spaces to the embarked UAV 1. UPS PANEL


detachment for their maintenance and administra-
tive support, and maintain those spaceswhen de- BatteryVoltage ................................96Vdc(*lO)
tachment personnel are not embarked. OutputVoltage ............................... 1lOVac(*lO)
Charge Current ........................................FLOAT
3. Maintain, with ships force technical assistanceas AC utility power on light ......._...ILLUMINATED
required, the recovery system, UAV control sta- Inverter bypassed light ...............ILLUMINATED
tions, UAV fueling station, and all associated Inverter on light. .............................................OFF
equipment when UAV detachment personnel are
not embarked. 2. AC DISTRIBUTION PANEL

11.4.1.3 Operations Officer. The ships Opera- 115 Vat light.. ............................ILLUMINATED
tions Officer will oversee contractor maintenance of Circuit Breakers ..............................................ON
UAV electronic control systems and designated mainte-
nance functions when the UAV detachment personnel 3. DC DISTRIBUTION PANEL
and technical representatives are not embarked.
Battery Warning Light ...................................OFF
11.4.1.4 Engineering Officer. The ships Engi- PS Fail Light ..................................................OFF
neering Officer is responsible for providing maintenance DC Main Light ...........................ILLUMINATED
and technical support for the proper upkeep of installed DC Main Indicator ..............................28 Vdc (*2)
UAV mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical systems. Circuit Breakers ..............................................ON
DC Main Selector Switch ................................ON
11.4.1.5 Damage Control Assistant (DCA). The Buzzer ................................................ENABLED
ships DCA is responsible for fire safety and firefighting
equipment in support of flight operations per NWP-42 4. IBX POWER SWITCH .............._....................ON
and NAVAIR OO-80R-19, and for training of fire and
crash crews. 5. UHF TRANSMITTER

11.4.1.6 Weapons Officer. The ships Weapons Channel Selector Switch .....................................2
Officer is responsible for the maintenance of the Power Switch .....................................................H

ORIGINAL 11-8
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

XMTG Light.. .............................. ON (IF XMTG) 4. All Stations Activated.. ............................ CHECK
Power Failure Light ....................................... OFF
VSWR Failure Light.. .................................... OFF 11.5.4 GCS PBY ELECTRICAL PANELS
XMTG/STBY Switch ............................... XMTG
Channel 2 Frequency Selector .............. AS REQD I. DC CONTROL PANEL
Main Power Light.. .................... ILLUMINATED
Remote Light.. ........................... ILLUMINATED Warning Panel
ON/OFF Switch .............................................. ON Main Light .................................................. ON
Local/Remote Switch ........................... REMOTE All Other Lights ......................................... OFF
28 Vdc Switch.. ................................................ UP
6. 221 INTEGRATOR RDC Power
Current.. ......................................... < 30 AMPS
Fwd and Aft ANT. Switch ............................... ON Voltage.. ....................................... .28 Vdc (A 2)
Local/Remote Switch ........................... REMOTE Video Retrans. Switch.. ................................. OFF
Bay Switches.. ................................................. ON
7. HORIZON POWER SUPPLY (CPS 253A)
2. AC CONTROL PANEL
DC Ampere Meter.. .......................... .25 AMP (&2)
DC Voltage Meter ............................. ..28 Vdc (&2) Current Meter (all 3 phases)................ CHECKED
Power Indication Lights.. ........... ILLUMINATED Voltage Meter
Power Circuit Breaker. .................................... ON (all 3 phases) .................................. 1 15 Vat (* 10)
Frequency Meter ................................ ..60 Hz (* 2)
8. CCB - COMMUNICATION PANEL Circuit Breakers.. .................................. AS REQD

All Warning Lights ........................................ OFF 3. MAIN AC PANEL


Power ON/OFF Switch.. .................................. ON
Test Push-button Light .............. ILLUMINATED Generator Selector Switch.. ........................ GEN 1
Three-Phase
9. MX 1IOSB-GPS (As Required) Indicator Lamps.. ..................... ..ILLUMINATE D

Power .............................................................. ON 11.5.5 PCS INTEGRITY CHECKLIST. See


Setup.. ........................................... COMPLETED 10.5.2.4.1.

11.5.2 GCS ELECTRICAL PANELS 11.5.6 PILOT BAY


1. Shelter Circuit Breakers.. ...................... AS REQD 1. TV Monitors .................................... ON/Adjusted

2. Power Supply Panel Switch.. ........................... ON 2. Pilot Display Panel

Frequency Meter ................................. .60 Hz (*2) a. Warnings


Voltage Meter (in all
3 phases) ......................................... 1 15 Vat (f 10) LOW IAS.. ................................................. ON
LOW ALT ................................................. ON
3. UPS Switch ..................................................... ON LOW FUEL .............................................. OFF
PLT BOX ................................................. OFF
Input Present Light .................. ..ILLUMINATE D COPLT BOX.. .......................................... OFF
Inverter On Light ..................... ..ILLUMINATE D VTR INACTIVE ....................................... ON
Output Present Light.. ................ ILLUMINATED PWR FAIL ............................................... OFF
GCS FAIL ................................................ OFF
11.5.3 INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM TEST MODE ........................................... OFF
PROG FAIL ............................................. OFF
1. Mode Select Switch ....................................... INT RI-I FAIL ................................................. .OFF
ENG TEMP ............................................. ..ON
2. Volume.. ............................................... AS REQD BATT FAIL.. ............................................. ON
EPS FAIL ................................................ .OFF
3. Impedance Select.. ................................ AS REQD GEN FAIL ................................................. ON

II-9 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

ENG CUT .................................................. ON 3. PILOT CONTROL DESK


SEC LINK: RPV RCVR,
ADDR MODE, LINK LOSS .................... OFF DISENG / AUTOPLT.. .................................. OFF
NO REPORT ............................................ OFF MASTER CAUTION .................................... OFF
RTN HOME ........................................... ..OFF FLT-TO/LD .............................................. TO/LD
GLIDE .................................................... .OFF GEN RESET.. ................................................ OFF
A-PLT MAL ........................................... .OFF REPORT INHIBIT.. ...................................... OFF
A-PLT FAIL ........................................... .OFF ON/LIGHTS ................................................ OFF
PRIM LINK: RPV RCVR, LAUNCH MODE .......................................... OFF
ADDR MODE, LINK LOSS .................... OFF PROG CONTROL ......................................... OFF
COMD INHIB.. ........................................ OFF NAV TO COOR ............................................ OFF
AUTO LAND /GO AROUND ..................... .OFF
b. RPV System Data CAMERA GUIDE.. ....................................... OFF
KNOB CONTROL ....................................... .OFF
ENGINE RPM.. ............................................ .O STICK CONTROL ......................................... ON
ENGINE TEMP ................ INDICATES OAT PLT BOX ....................................................... .ON
FUEL .......................................... ..CHECKE D COPLT BOX ................................................. OFF
BUS VOLTAGE. ........................ ..28 Vdc (*2)
a. PROGRAMMER CONTROL ................ .OFF
c. RPV Flight Data STEP # ...................................................... SET
REMAINING STEP/TIME.. ......... VERIFIED
ATTITUDE RUN/PAUSE ................................ .BOTH ON
INDICATOR ..................... -0 PITCH/ROLL SSA .......................................................... OFF
PROGRESET ......................................... OFF

b. KNOB CONTROL

ROLL.. ........................................................ .O
The attitude indicator shall be confirmed for ROLL READY ................... .ILLUMINATED
correct launch attitude as follows: IND AIRSPEED ................................ ..70 KTS
IAS READY ....................... .ILLUMINATED
For RAT0 Launch ................. +14&2pitch HEADING.. .................................... AS REQD
ForPneumaticLaunch. ..+10.5+6or-2pitc h ALTITUDE.. ...................................... 1000 FT
ALT READY ....................... ILLUMINATED
IAS.. ................................................. O-20KTS
RATE OF TURN ........................................ .O C. RPV XMTR
TRACKING
AZIMUTH .......................... REFLECTS TCD ON/OFF .................................................... .ON
AZIMUTH DISPLAY HIGH/LOW ........................................... LOW
RPV HEADING .......................... REFLECTS TRANSP .................................................. OFF
UAV HEADING RH DELAY.. ............................................ OFF
ALTITUDE (METER/ SECURE/CLEAR., ........................ ..SECU RE
NUMERICAL DATA). ........... VERIFIED AT LONG/SHORT.. ............................. AS REQD
SEA/FIELD LEVEL
RATE OF CLIMB ........................................ .O d. COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL
RANGE ............... REFLECTS UAV RANGE
FIELD LEVEL/ PRIME UPLINK: OVERHEAT,
SEA LEVEL SWITCH ........... FIELD LEVEL HI RFL PWR, LOW PWR.. ...................... OFF
DOWNLINK: RCVR FAIL ................... ..OFF
d. Time Data SEC UPLINK: OVERHEAT
HI RFL PWR, LOW PWR ................... OFF
MISSION TIME.. ......................................... .O RPV# (display) ......................... VERIFIED
LOCAL TIME ............................. REFLECTS STATION#/RPV#
CURRENT TIME (thumbwheel) .......................... ..VERIFIE D
COMMANDING
STATION (arrow) ....................... SEC UPL

ORIGINAL 11-10
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

STATION# (displays). .............. VERIFIED


XMTR POWER TAPE TRANSPORT INDICATORS ...........OUT
and STATION RCVR
SIGNAL STRENGTH (meters). ............. ~6 3. ANTENNA CONTROL
HIGH/LOW ...................................... LOW
PRIM UPL and AUTO/MANUAL SWITCH ..................... AUTO
SEC UPL ................. STATION XMTR ON AUTO LIGHT.. .............................................. .ON
TEST Push-button ...................... PRESSED FWD/AFT LIGHT.. ......................... FWD or AFT
ALL PBY lamps, FWD/AFT Switch ................................ AS REQD
push-buttons, GCS CONTROL LIGHT ................................ ON
enunciators, meters, ELEVATION CONTROL Switch ...... .NORMAL
and digital displays ................ ..CHECKE D DISH ELEVATION.. ........................... AS REQD

Note 4. OTMP .............................................................ON

All meters should be pegged except for the OBSERVER VIDEO CONTROL
fuel meter, which will read 30 liters. All digi-
tal displays should read 8 except for mission LIGHT PEN ................................. .CONNECTED
time and local time readouts. All light and DIMMERS ....................................... ADJUSTED
push buttons should be lit. VIDEO GRAPHIC
PUSHBUTTONS.. ......................... AS DESIRED
e. PILOT CONTROL TABLE VTR RECORD / INACTIVE ............ INACTIVE

READY LIGHT ........................................ ON OBSERVER CONTROL DESK


RUDDER, AILERON,
THROTTLE, ELEVATOR LIGHTS.. ....... ON AUTOMATIC
ENGINE ON/OFF SWITCH ..................... ON LANDING .............. ALL PUSH-BUTTONS OFF
RUDDER TRIM.. ..................... ..CENTERE D
ELEVTRIM.. ................................... MAXUP MKD 200 PAYLOAD
AILERON TRIM.. ...................... CENTERED VIDEO.. .......................................................... ON
THROTTLE.. ........................................ .IDLE IRIS ........................................................... AUTO
IRIS MANUAL KNOB .................. ..CENTERE D
11.5.7 OBSERVER BAY FOCUS ......................................................... .SET
ZOOM ................................................ MAX OUT
1. OBSERVER CONTROL TABLE
MKD 400 PAYLOAD
PRESET MENU ........................... COMPLETED VIDEO ................................................ AS REQD
MULTIFUNCTION MENU.. .......COMPLETED LEVEL ...................................................... AUTO
TARGET ACQUISITION DATA ............................................................ .ON
MENU .......................................... COMPLETED HEAT POLR ........................................ AS REQD
FIELD OF VIEW .......................... SUPER WIDE
2. Video Telemetry Recorder FOCUS .......................................................... SET

POWER ........................................................... ON PLATFORM CONTROL


TAPE .............................. LOADED/REWOUND ON PUSH-BUTTON ...................................... ON
TIME COUNTER POSITION/RATE
DISPLAY SW .................................... COUNTER CONTROL.. ....................................... POSITION
TIME COUNTER DISPLAY ................... RESET BEARING DEGREES.. ..................................... .O
LOCAL/REMOTE .................................. LOCAL DEPRESSION DEGREES ................................. 0
AUDIO LEVELS .... ..ODB(EXCEPTPCMCH- 3 PAYLOAD SHIELD.. ................................... OFF
(VOICE) ADJUST TO LEVEL 2)
PHONE LEVEL.. ............................ MIDRANGE 7. OBSERVER CONTROL TABLE
MODE SELECT.. ................................ NORMAL
METER SELECT.. ............................... AS REQD All Push-buttons ............................................OFF
ASSEMBLE .................................................. OFF BEARING TRIM and
INSERT INDICATIONS .............................. OFF DEPRESSION TRIM ...........................AS REQD

II-11 ORIGINAL
Al SRRPV-NFM-000

11.58 TRACKING BAY TRACK ............_............................................OFF


WIDE /NARROW ........................................OFF
1. PLOTTER PANEL SCAN ..........................._................................ OFF
MAPS.. .......................................... POSITIONED DISH /OMNI ............_................................ OMNI
RPV ANT ...................................................OMNI
2. PRESET MAPS TEST (push-button) ..................................PRESS
TO PLOTTER .............................. .COMPLETED LAMPS / METERS ..................._....._..CHECKED

Note 11.59 UAV Preflight/Engine Turn Procedures.


Approximately two hours prior to a scheduled launch
Refer to Tracking Bay PRESETS in the (or any time a UAV engine will be operated), the UAV
PRESET Section of this checklist. Crew Chief will muster the UAV Launch/Recovery De-
tail to conduct preflight system checks. At this time,
3. TRACKER CONTROL DESK communications will be established on the (ICS) circuit
PLOTTER CONTROL between the Ground Control Station (GCS), the Crew
Chief located on the flight deck, and the Portable Con-
MAP # ............................................ VERIFIED trol Station (PCS). The following are UAV Launch/Re-
EAST/NORTH.. ............................. VERIFIED covery Detail Stations:
UTMGEOGR ......................................... UTM
RESET ...................................................... ..ON 1. The ships Helicopter Control Officer, Flight
PRESET, DIAGN, MAP ORIENT Deck Officer/GPO, and Flight Deck LPO will
TCU COVR, TCU ALT.. ........................... OFF oversee all flight deck evolutions.
DATA LOSS ........................................... ..OFF
OVER RANGE ......................................... OFF 2. UAV Crew Chief on the flight deck is responsible
TRACK TARGET .................................... OFF for UAV launch preparations on the flight deck.
MARK TARGET ...................................... OFF
OVER FLOW ............................................ OFF 3. GCS/PCS station personnel as required for
CONTSTEP.. .................................. AS REQD preflight checks.
COARSE/FINE ......................................... OFF
LOCAL ....................................................... ON 4. The Flight Deck Officer/GPO will ensure a FOD
TRACK.. .................................................. .OFF walkdown is completed in the immediate vicinity
AUTO/MANUAL ........................... AS REQD prior to turning up the UAV. He will also ensure
L/R PEN SELECTION ......................... ..LEF T that a 15-lb CO2 bottle and one PKP bottle are
present and manned prior to starting a UAV en-
Note gine.

Verify 1eA pen light illuminates on tracker 5. The Crew Chief will obtain permission from the
arm. Tactical Action Officer (TAO) or CIC prior to ac-
tivating transmitters and from the Officer of the
RUN.. ........................................................ OFF Deck (OOD) prior to conducting engine turns (re-
MAP#. ...................................................... OFF quires an AMBER DECK).
PEN UP ..................................................... OFF
11S.10 Preflight Briefing. Whenever practical and
Note operational considerations permit, a UAV preflight
briefing should be held at least 2 hours in advance of the
Verify pen in up position on tracker. scheduled launch time.

STOP ......................................................... OFF 11.5.11 Recovery Net. If flight deck operations al-
low, the UAV detachment should commence rigging the
4. TRACKER CONTROL recovery net one half hour prior to the setting of UAV
flight quarters or one and one half hours prior to the
AZIMUTH DEGREES ........................ AS REQD scheduled launch. The latest the net should be raised is
ANT PWR .................................................... .OFF 45 minutes prior to the scheduled launch. Prior to com-
TRACKER FAIL ........................................... OFF mencing rigging:
TRACK LOSS.. ............................................. OFF
MANUAL ....................................................... ON

ORIGINAL 11-12
1. The UAV Crew Chiefwill obtain permission from b. Fire and Crash Crew manned per NAVAIR
the OOD and inform him that the flight deck will OO-80R-19. When UAVs are the only aircraft
be fouled for all helicopter operations at least 15 operating, LPD crash crew minimum require-
minutes after the net is fully rigged. ments may be amended at the ships Com-
manding Officers discretion to delete the
2. The OOD will ensure relative winds are less than requirement for a Twin-Agent Unit (TAU) op-
30 knots from any direction and that weather con- erator and Hotsuit men.
ditions are safe for men working on the flight
deck. 5. Portable Control Station (PCS). Manned by one
UAV detachment Internal Pilot.
3. The OOD will minimize ships maneuvering con-
sistent with operational and safety considerations. 6. Ground Control Station (GCS). Manned by UAV
detachment personnel to include the Mission
11.512 Flight Quarters for UAV Operations. Commander, Internal Pilot, and Payload Opera-
If not already set, approximately one hour prior to the tor. The Mission Commander is responsible for all
scheduled UAV launch the ship will set flight quarters UAV operations.
for UAV operations. The following flight quarters sta-
tions will normally be manned for UAV operations: 11.6 UAV FLIGHT DECK LAUNCH
PROCEDURES
1. Bridge: In addition to the normal watch standers,a
sound-powered phone talker will augment the The following step-by-step procedures will be fol-
bridge team to provide communications between lowed during UAV launches:
the bridge, Combat Information Center (CIC), Pri-
mary Flight Control (PRIFLY), and the GCS. 1. If not already set, the OOD will have the word
passed to set flight quarters for UAV operations
2. Combat Information Center: The CIC watch sec- and for all unauthorized personnel to remain clear
tion will be augmented as necessary by a sound- of the flight deck while conducting UAV flight
powered phone talker and an Air Controller. operations.

Note 2. Upon the setting of flight quarters UAV detach-


ment and flight deck personnel will conduct a full
The Tactical Action Officer (TAO) retains FOD walkdown of the flight deck.
the authority and responsibility for overall
ships operations and employment of ship- 3. The Mission Commander will complete the UAV
board systems. He will be fully informed of flight operations checklist up to Request for AM-
all UAV operational requirements, includ- BER DECK no later than 40 minutes prior to
ing communications, EMCON, area clear- scheduled launch time. When all stations are
ance, flight plan, flight profiles, and test manned and ready, and the UAV flight operations
procedures. checklist has been completed, the Mission Com-
mander will request an AMBER DECK for
3. Primary Flight Control (PRIFLY): Manned by the RAT0 upload from the Air Officer.
ships Air Officer and, as required by the ships
Watch, Quarter and Station Bill, a sound-powered 4. Upon setting AMBER DECK, a hose team will
phone talker. The Air Officer will ensure all items man their hose on the side from which the UAV is
on the UAV Tower Operator Checklists (para- to be launched, and the ordnance-man will draw a
graph 11.2 1) are completed for all launch and re- RAT0 bottle from the magazine or ready service
covery operations. The Air Officer is responsible locker and connect it to the UAV for final launch
for all flight deck activity. preparations. The hose team will remain stationed
at their hose until the UAV engine has been
4. Flight Deck Crew. The flight deck crew consists started.
of the following:
5. Following final RAT0 checks and engine start,
a. Flight Deck Officer/GPO and Flight Deck only the Flight Deck Offcer/CPO and UAV
LPO to ensure the safe conduct of all flight launch crew will remain on the flight deck. Fire
deck operations. and crash crew personnel will take cover.

II-13 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

6. Upon successful completion of the UAV Auto- 11.7.2 RED DECK. The OOD, TAO, HCO/UAV
matic Test Sequence,the Crew Chief and the Ex- Tower Operator, FDO, MC, IP, EP, or Flight Deck Crew
ternal Pilot (EP) will make a final check to ensure Chief may all direct a RED DECK if any unsafe con-
no unauthorized persons are on the flight deck and dition exists with regard to UAV flight operations. A
report to the Mission Commander (MC) that the RED DECK will be ordered if all criteria for either
flight deck is ready for a GREEN DECK. GREEN or AMBER DECK are not met. The OOD
is the only person with authority to grant a GREEN or
7. The OOD should turn to FOXTROT CORPEN no AMBER DECK after a RED DECK has been or-
later than five minutes prior to launch and will dered. Any station directing a RED DECK will im-
complete the OOD Checklist for UAV Operations mediately report it to the OOD via the sound-powered
(paragraph 11.20). phone circuit with the reason for a RED DECK. The
following are possible reasons for directing a RED
8. The Mission Commander will request a GREEN DECK:
DECK for UAV launch from the OOD via the Air
Officer approximately two minutes prior to 1. The ship must maneuver outside ofthe wind enve-
launch. lope for launch or recovery of UAVs after a
GREEN DECK is ordered.
9. Upon meeting all launch preparations the OOD
will authorize a GREEN DECK for UAV 2. The TAO or OOD reports another aircraft or ship-
launch. ping in the area that may interfere with, or be en-
dangered by, UAV flight operations.
10. The EP will position himself for UAV launch.
3. Unauthorized personnel are observed on the flight
11. When directed by Mission Commander, the EP deck or other unsafe location.
will countdown the UAV launch on the UAV ICS
system. The EP countdown will be relayed to the 4. Failure of UAV control functions or equipment at
OOD via the primary sound-powered circuit. The either PCS, GCS, or by location.
Crew Chief will direct the ordnance-man to fire
the RAT0 bottle when the EP commands launch. 5. Loss of phone communications at any station.

12. Upon gaining normal flight, the EP will control 6. Loss of radio communications with any external
the UAV, maintaining its position aft ofthe ship in stations required for UAV operations.
sight until ready to pass control to either PCS or
GCS Internal Pilot (IP). In the event of RAT0 7. Electromagnetic interference observed by the
misfire, the procedures contained in paragraph CIC, PCS, EP, or GCS that would preclude posi-
11.23 will be executed. tive control of the UAV during launch, recovery,
or in flight.
11.7 DECK STATUS CRITERIA/AUTHORITY
11.7.3 AMBER DECK. AMBER DECK will be
The following is the criteria and authority for grant- requested by the Mission Commander for uploading or
ing a GREEN, AMBER, or RED DECK: downloading RAT0 bottles to the UAV, and whenever
operating the UAV engine.
11.7.1 GREEN DECK (launch or recovery of
UAVs). The OOD will set GREEN DECK only after 11.8 UAV INFLIGHT PROCEDURES
the following criteria are met:
After a successful UAV launch, the following proce-
1. Mission Commander has reported all stations for dures and general guidelines for UAV operations apply:
UAV operations are manned and ready for UAV
launch and that the sound-powered telephone 11.8.1 UAV Control. After the EP has positive con-
communications have been established. trol of the UAV in flight and is maintaining the aircraft
in visual sight, control may be passed to the IP as re-
2. The ship is on FOX CORPEN and wind over deck quired by the MC. The TAO in CIC retains responsibil-
is within approved parameters. GREEN DECK ity for employment of the ship and its systems, and is
will be maintained until UAV inflight control therefore responsible for UAV operations when under
checks are reported complete and satisfactory by the control of any of the shipboard stations (PCS or
the Mission Commander. GCS), or until operational control is assumed by

ORIGINAL II-14
another controlling authority. He is authorized to direct d. Any flight profile that brings the UAV closer
the operations of inflight UAVs when under ships con- than 0.3 km to the ship during recovery maneu-
trol, but will immediately inform the Commanding Of- vers, unless an actual recovery is to be con-
ficer and the UAV Detachment OK if he directs any ducted, is prohibited.
UAV operations that deviate from the flight plan or mis-
sion. The Mission Commander will advise the TAO on e. All wave-off maneuvers shall be conducted so
aircraft limitations or capabilities that will inhibit/pre- that the UAV makes its wave-off turn in a di-
vent successful completion of the assigned mission. rection away from the ship and proceeds out-
bound on a 1go-degree relative bearing.
11.8.2 Securing Flight Quarters. Flight Quarters
for UAV operations will be securedby the OOD only af- 11.I0 PRACTICE/SIMULATED UAV
ter the Mission Commander reports successful comple- RECOVERY PROCEDURES
tion of UAV inflight checks.
Both day and night practice approaches are required
11.9 UAV FLIGHT OPERATIONS WITHIN to train new EPs and to maintain EP proficiency. Prior to
VISUAL RANGE OF SHIP conducting practice approaches, the MC will inform the
OOD and TAO of the number of approaches required
Minimum criteria for UAV flight operations within and the expected duration of the evolution.
visual range of the ship are as follows:
1. The OOD will pass the word that the flight deck is
11.9.1 UAV Operation Above 1000 ft MSL. The closed to all unauthorized personnel and, if possi-
ships UAV directional tracking antenna is unable to ble, will maneuver the ship to provide suitable re-
maintain track of the UAV within 0.5 NM of the ship. covery winds. Flight quarters need not be set until
Additionally, the ships UAV antenna has blind zones time for the final net recovery.
directly above the ship. Therefore, no UAV will be
flown above 1000 ft MSL within 0.5 NM (0.93 km) of 2. UAV launch and recovery personnel shall ensure
the ship. that the flight deck remains clear of all unautho-
rized personnel during practice approaches.
11.9.2 UAV Operations Below 1000 ft MSL
3. The Crew Chief shall verify the recovery net is
1. PCS Control. No UAV flight operations will be rigged and ready and report such to the Mission
conducted below 1000 MSL under PCS control Commander.
without the specific permission of the Mission
Commander. Requests to operate the UAV below 4. The Mission Commander shall ensure all ap-
1000 ft MSL should only be for emergency recov- proaches are waved off outside 0.3 km and that
ery situations. proper wave-off procedures are followed.

2. External Pilot UAV Control. External Pilot (EP) 11.11 UAV FLIGHT DECK RECOVERY
control of the UAV is done only for launching and PROCEDURES
recovering the UAV. Maneuvers of any type other
than those required to launch, recover, conduct At least 30 minutes prior to the scheduled recovery of
controllability checks, and maintain currency are a UAV, the OOD will station flight quarters for UAV re-
strictly prohibited. Additionally, the following re- covery operations. All stations will be manned as for
strictions shall be applied: UAV launch with the single exception that an ord-
nance-man will not be required. The following proce-
a. No overflights of the ship for any purpose. dures for recovering a UAV apply:

b. All UAVs shall remain beyond 0.5 NM (0.93 1. The Crew Chief will verify the recovery net is
km) of the ship when conducting control rigged and ready and report such to the Mission
checks. Commander. Both the main net and the under-run
net are required for all UAV recoveries.
c. Any flight profile that points the UAV directly
at the ship while the UAV is within 0.5 NM 2. The Mission Commander will complete applica-
(0.93 km) of the ship is prohibited, unless per- ble portions of the UAV recovery checklist.
forming recovery maneuvers.

II-15 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

3. The Air Officer will complete the UAV recovery 3. The OOD shall be prepared to maneuver the ship
checklist (paragraph 11.21.3) and, following con- as required.
currence with the Mission Commander, will re-
quest a GREEN DECK from the OOD. 11.12.2 A Crash on the Flight Deck

4. When within visual range, control of the UAV will 1. Air Officer shall announce CRASH ON THE
be passed to the EP. The EP will report positive FLIGHT DECK, over the 5MC, and report the
control to the Mission Commander prior to clos- emergency to the OOD.
ing the ship with the UAV.
2. Fire and Crash Crew shall respond to the emer-
5. The OOD will complete applicable portions ofthe gency per NAVAIR 00-80-R- 14. Additional hose
OOD UAV recovery checklist, and will order a teams and assistance shall be brought to the scene
GREEN DECK for UAV recovery when appro- as required by the Crash and Salvage Scene
priate. Leader.

6. After the UAV has landed in the recovery net, the 3. In the event of tire, the OOD shall maneuver the
Air Officer will notify all stations that the UAV ship per ships doctrine to minimize the winds and
has been recovered and announce on the 5MC the spread of fire.
UAV IN THE RECOVERY NET, ENGINE
STOPPED. UAV RECOVERY PERSONNEL 4. Corpsman shall immediately respond to any
MAN THE NET. on-scene injuries.

7. TheFire and Crash Crew will man their hoses dur- 5. Master-At-Aims personnel shall be summoned to
ing the UAV lowering operation. keep the flight deck clear of non-essential person-
nel.
8. When lowering the net and UAV, the Air Officer
will announce on the 5MC ATTENTION ON 11.I 2.3 Crash and Sahrage Scene Leader. When
THE FLIGHT DECK, ALL UNAUTHORIZED a crash occurs, the overall supervision and direction of
PERSONNEL REMAIN CLEAR OF THE salvage operations is the responsibility of the Crash and
FLIGHT DECK WHILE LOWERING UAV Salvage Scene Leader. In the event of a crash mishap,
AND RECOVERY NET SYSTEM. At this time, the UAV Detachment Maintenance Officer should be
the UAV Detachment will man the net and lower available to provide technical assistance to the Crash
the UAV to the deck. and Salvage Scene Leader.

9. When the UAV recovery net is stowed and the Note


UAV has been refueled, the UAV Crew Chief will
request permission from the OOD (via the Air Of- Only the Commanding Officer may autho-
ficer) to secure from UAV flight quarters. rize jettisoning of aircraft.

11.12 FLIGHT DECK CRASH PROCEDURES 1. Ships photographer shall be tasked with photo-
graphing the crash scene and the remaining
If a UAV crash on the flight deck is possible or has al- wreckage.
ready occurred, the following procedures shall be
followed: 2. No actions shall be taken to move or tamper with
the wreckage without the Crash and Salvage
11.12.1 A Problem Exists and a Crash Is Likely Scene Leaders approval.

1. The Mission Commander shall notify the CO, 3. Before removal, all wreckage should be inspected
OOD, Air Officer, and TAO (CIC Watch Officer) to determine possible cause of mishap.
that control problems exist and that a crash is pos-
sible. 11.12.4 UAV Mishap Reporting. UAV Mis-
hap Reporting Procedures contained in OPNAVINST
2. Air Officer shall declare an emergency on the 3750.6 shall be followed to report safety investigation
flight deck and clear the deck of all personnel. findings. In the event that the UAV enters the water near
the ship, UAV water recovery procedures contained in
this chapter shall be followed.

ORIGINAL II-16
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

11.13 UAV POST FLIGHT PROCEDURES the bladder and the UAV will be disconnected from the
pump and the AVGAS bladder, drained of all fuel, and
Upon successful recovery of the UAV, the following stored in their brackets. Valves on two sample lines on
procedures will be followed: either side of the hand pump will be closed when not
drawing samples and will be checked closed prior to
1. The UAV recovery net and equipment will be connecting rubber hoses to the AVGAS Bladder and
thoroughly inspected for damage by the net repair pump.
personnel.
pq
2. Unless otherwise directed, the Crew Chief will
have the net system disassembled and stored for
sea.It is important to note this should be expedited Smoking is prohibited within 50 feet of the
to provide a clear deck for helicopter operations fuel bladder at all times.
and should normally be completed within 30 min-
utes of recovery for full disassembly, and within 11.14.2 AVGAS Storage Bladder Jettison Pro-
ten minutes if only partial disassembly is needed cedures. In the event of a fire within 50 feet of the
to clear the flight deck in the shortest time possi- AVGAS bladder, it will be jettisoned. The jettison pro-
ble. cedures should normally be conducted by the Fire and
Crash Crew, but this does not preclude its jettison by any
3. All UAVs should be fully fueled immediately crewmember if the situation dictates.
upon recovery and cleared from the flight deck
forward of the foul line for helicopter operations 11.14.3 UAV FuelinglDefueling. All UAV fuel
within 15 minutes of recovery. tanks will be maintained filled to capacity at all times
(on deck or stowed) unless delivered to the ship with the
4. The Fire and Crash Crew will remain on station for fuel tank emptied and certified gas free. If a UAV with
fueling and will be secured by the Air Officer an empty tank cannot be certified gas free, it will be im-
when all UAVs have been fueled. mediately fueled to capacity. The following procedures
will be followed when fueling UAVs:
5. If any UAVs are required to be left on deck and not
stowed in their container, the OOD will be notified 1. The flight deck will be secured and the
for approval. The OOD will be notified when all SMOKING LAMP out in all topside spaces dur-
UAVs are stowed. ing all UAV fueling/defueling operations.

11.I4 UAWAVGAS FUELING AND 2. Hotwork, grinding, or the use of spark-producing


DEFUELING PROCEDURES or electrical tools within 50 feet of AVGAS shall
be prohibited.
The fuel used by UAVs is lOO-octanelow-lead AV-
GAS, a gasoline that is highly flammable and explosive 3. Immediately upon removing a UAV from its stor-
in the light fuel-to-air mixture. Special procedures and age container, the fuel tank will be inspected to en-
safety precautions are required when working with sure it is full. If it is not full, it will be refueled to
UAVs or AVGAS. Permission to conduct AVGAS fuel capacity without delay, provided there is no evi-
transfer will always be obtained from the OOD while dence of a fuel tank leak.
underway, and the Command Duty Officer (CDO) in
port. The following procedures apply to all AVGAS 4. Immediately upon recovering a UAV it will be fu-
transfer operations: eled to capacity.

11.14.1 AVGAS Storage Bladder. This rub- 5. Prior to fueling, UAV Detachment personnel will
ber bladder is located forward on either the starboard or connect the rubber transfer hoses to the AVGAS
the port catwalk, semi-fixed to ajettisonable trolley. An bladder and hand pump. They will ensure the fuel
emergency jettison lever is located on the catwalk sample line valves are closed.
across from the accommodation ladder winch. A wire
strap retaining pendant is provided to prevent inadver- 6. When the above is accomplished, they will fill the
tent jettisoning during bladder fueling or PMS on the UAV fuel tank to capacity.
quick releasesystem. This pendant WILL ALWAYS BE
DISCONNECTED when the bladder has fuel in it.
When not in use, the rubber fueling hoses for refueling

II-17 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

7. Prior to UAV demeling, permission will be ob- lamp will be out throughout the ship, all hot work,
tained from the OOD to ensure the ship is outside grinding, and spark-producing work will cease,
50 NM from land. and the BRAVO flag will be closed up.

8. The UAV will be positioned at the port or star- 8. A MAA will be posted on the flight deck to ensure
board aft deck draining and two fire extinguishers all unauthorized personnel stand clear.
(CO? and PKP) will be readily available.
9. The truck fuel hose will be connected to the blad-
9. A hose approximately six feet in length will be der and verified secure.
routed overboard in combination with a funnel
and will be used to drain the fuel from the UAV. 10. Commence fueling until the bladder is sufficiently
filled.
10. Upon completion of UAV defueling, the entire
area will be thoroughly flushed. 11. Ensure the bladder indicator/strike plate is no
closer than l/4 inch to the grating above it.
11. The UAV fuel tank will then be purged using LP
air. 12. Ensure the bladder fill valve is closed, then dis-
connect the hose.
12. After being purged, the fuel tank will be inspected
and certified gas free. 13. AVGAS fueling operations are not complete until
the hose is returned to the pier. When stowed, per-
11.14.4 AVGAS Bladder FuelinglDefueling. sonnel may be secured from AVGAS fuel-
Fueling or defueling of the AVGAS bladder will gener- ingdefueling operations.
ally be accomplished in port and is the responsibility of
the Air Officer. The following procedures shall be Note
followed:
Fueling of UAVs will not commence until
1. At least one hour prior, permission will be ob- the proper fuel to oil mixture of 50: 1 is ob-
tained to commence AVGAS fueling or defueling tained by mixing fuel from the AVGAS
operations from the Naval Base Fire Marshall on bladder with oil in the receiving bowser.
the pier and from the CDO.
11.15 OBSERVATION OF UAV OPERATIONS
2. The securing pendant will be attached to the blad-
der and the ship. UAV launch and recovery operations may be ob-
served in any area not otherwise restricted. Restricted
3. A UAV Detachment Officer or Chief Petty Offi- areas for UAV operations are the flight deck, catwalks,
cer will be present to ensure fuel quality and sign and the vicinity of the EP when UAV Flight Quarters
for fuel received. are in effect.

4. The DCA will have the Fire and Crash Crew per- 11.16 MISSION COMMANDER CHECKLIST
sonnel man the flight deck AFFF hoses and AFFF (SHIPBOARD)
stations and have the Rescue and Assistance De-
tail man one charge 2-l/2 inch saltwater hose on 1. Air tasking order/flight times
the pier at the fuel truck.
2. Maintenance prep/hrs to launch
5. The fuel truck operator will inspect and verify the
proper material condition of the trucks fueling 3. Mission tasking/Brief/preparation/weather Air
hose and equipment and report the same to the space coordination
ship.
4. Crew Brief 2 HRS PTL
6. A salt and pepper line will be strung between the
AVGAS bladder on the ship and the fuel truck and 5. Comm Checks
be manned by fueling detail personnel.
6. Deck clearance/net rigging
7. Prior to the hose being passed to the ship from the
fuel truck, the CD0 will be notified, the smoking 7. Flight Quarters 1 HR PTL

ORIGINAL II-18
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

8. AMBER DECK/RAT0 c. Request amber deck/clearance to upload


upload clearance 45 MIN PTL RAT0

9. Engine Start 20 MM PTL d. Conduct RAT0 bottle pre launch inspect IAW
NA A 1-SRRPV-RATO-820
10. Take-off Winds 5 MIN PTL
e. Flight deck clear of unauthorized personnel
11. Airspace Clearance 5 MIN PTL
f. Check VGU, COMM, ERC, and BATT
12. Take-off clearance/GREEN DECK switches off

13. IFF Checks g. Secure power to UAV

14. Update Position and RETURN HOME - Coordi- h. Disconnect external power
nates at IO min intervals
i. Upload RAT0 IAW NAVAIR Al -
15. Return clearance/MOCA/altimeter setting SRRPV-RATO-280

16. Net rigged for recovery j. RAT0 upload final checks complete

17. Recovery winds k. Apply external power

11.17 CREW CHIEF PRE-TAKEOFF 1. VGU and comm switches on.


CHECKLIST (SHIPBOARD)
4. 20 min prior to launch
1. NLT 2:00 hrs prior to launch
a. IP commences Engine Start Checklist
a. Comm check with GCSiPCS
b. Follow IP checklist for remainder of start and
b. Clearance to rig the net launch sequence.

c. Inspect net assembly and poles 11.18 INTERNAL PILOT PRE-TAKEOFF


CHECKLIST (SHIPBOARD)
d. Rig the net
1. AC CONTROL PANEL
e. UAV configured and daily completed
GENERATOR ........................................... GEN 1
f. Launch stand into position VOLTAGE ........................................... 1 15 *5
FREQUENCY.. ..................................... .60 HZ
g. Techs conduct interactives MAIN POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER.. ......... ON
RDC CIRCUIT BREAKER ............................ ON
h. Conduct FOD walkdown. 28V DC CIRCUIT BREAKER ....................... ON
OBY, PBY, 115 Vat CBs ............................... ON
2. NLT 1:15 hrs prior to launch OBY, TBY, PBY
PLP, INT CIRCUIT BREAKERS ................. ..ON
a. Perform Pre RAT0 Checks IAW NA EXT&INTSOCKETS 1,2,&3.. .................... ON
Al -SRRPV-RATO-820
2. DC CONTROL PANEL
b. Commence FOD walk down.
RDC CURRENT ............................. .25 AMPS *5
3. NLT 1:00 hrs prior to launch VOLTAGE .......................................... .28Vdc *2

a. UAV flight quarters set 3. FAILURE WARNING PANEL ....TESTLAMPS

b. Crew chief pre-launch checks complete 4. PILOT BAY LAMP TEST ,.._.,.,....TEST LAMPS

11-19 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

5. OBY & PBY MONITORS ........ .ON/ADJUSTED a. WARNING LIGHTS

6. VIDEO TELEMETRY RECORDER LOW IAS.. ................................................. ON


LOW ALT ................................................. ON
POWER .........................................................
. ON BATT FAIL.. ............................................. ON
TAPE .............................. LOADED/REWOUND GEN FAIL ................................................. ON
TIME COUNTER ENG CUT ................................................. .ON
DISPLAY SWITCH .......................... COUNTER
TIME COUNTER DISPLAY ................... RESET All other caution/warning lights ............. .OUT
LOCAL/REMOTE .................................. LOCAL
AUDIO LEVELS .... ..ODB(EXCEPTPCMCH- 3 b. UAV FLIGHT/SYSTEMS DATA
(VOICE) ADJUST TO LEVEL 2) ENG RPM .................................................... .O
PHONE LEVEL .............................. MIDRANGE ENG TEMP.. ........................................... OAT
MODE SELECT .................................. NORMAL FUEL ............................................ CHECKED
METER SELECT ................................. AS REQD BUS VOLTAGE ............................... 28V (+2)
ASSEMBLE .................................................. OFF ATTITUDE INDICATOR ........... CHECKED
INSERT INDICATIONS .............................. OFF IAS ........................................................... O-20
TAPE TRANSPORT INDICATORS ........... OUT RATEOFTURN ........................................... 0
TRACKING AZIMUTH
7. PANEL INTERACTIVE NEEDLE .......... CHECKED UAV HEADING
NEEDLE.. ...................... VERIFY HEADING
STEPS 7 (CBX) & 8 (PBX) ........... COMPLETED FL/SL SWITCH .......................................... FL
RATE OF CLIMB ......................................... 0
8. ELECTRICAL POWER TO UAV .................. ON MISSION TIME .................................. RESET
UAV COMM & VGU SWITCHES.. ............... ON LOCAL TIME.. ........................................ SET
ERC & BAIT SWITCHES.. .......................... OFF
STATION # .................................... ..SELECTE D 11. PILOT CONTROL DESK
UAV # .............................................. .SELECTED
FREQUENCY SELECTION DISENG/AUTOPLT.. ..................... ..ENGAGE D
THUMBWHEELS ........................................ SET MASTER/CAUTION ................................... OFF
STATION XMTRS.. ............................. ON/LOW FLT TO/LD.. ............................................. TO/LD
REFLECTED POWER.. ...................... ..TESTE D GEN RESET.. ................................................ OFF
UAV XMTR ......................................... ON/LOW REPORT INHIBIT ........................................ OFF
TRANSP ....................................................... OFF LIGHTS ........................................................ OFF
RI-I DELAY ................................................... OFF LAUNCH MODE ......................................... .OFF
PRI UPL .................................. SHORT/SECURE PROG COUNTER.. ...................................... .OFF
RCVR SIGNAL STRENGTH .......................... >6 NAV TO COOR ........................................... .OFF
NO REPORT LIGHT .................................... OFF AUTOLND GO ARND ............................... ..OFF
PRI/SEC LINK LOSS LIGHTS.. ................... OFF CAMERA GUIDE ........................................ .OFF
COMMANDING LINK ............... SECONDARY KNOB CONTR ............................................. OFF
STICK CONTR ............................... .SELECTED
9. PRESET ............................................ SELECTED PLT BOX.. ........................................ SELECTED
COPLT BOX ............................................... ..OFF
a. ALTIMETER CAL AND WARNING SET KNOB CONTROLS
ROLL ............................................................ .O
(1) SEA LEVEL (FT) ................................ 40 IND AIRSPEED.. ................................ .60 KTS
HEADING ....................................... AS REQD
(2) FIELD LEVEL (FT) .............................. 4 ALTITUDE ......................................... 1000 FT
ROLL/READY ........................................ .OFF
(3) SEA LEVEL QNH.. ................. RECORD IASREADY.. ..................................... READY
HDG/READY.. ......................................... OFF
(4) FIELD LEVEL QNH ............... RECORD ALT/READY ..................................... READY

10. PILOT DISPLAY PANEL 12. PILOT CONTROL TABLE

PILOT BOX (PBX)

ORIGINAL 11-20
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

READY LIGHT .......................................... ON b. PRESSURE TABLE


FLIGHT CONTROL
SURFACE LIGHTS ................................... ON c. WIND TABLE
ENGINE SWITCH .................................... .ON
TRIM WHEELS.. ........................ CENTERED d. TEMP TABLE
THROTTLE.. .......................................... IDLE
6. CAMERA GUIDE (PRESET 6)
11.19 PRESETS (SHIPBOARD)
SET DEFAULT VALUES
1. ALT CAL & WARNING (PRESET 1)
a. CIRCLING RADIUS .......................... 1.OKM
a. SEA LEVEL (FT) ...................................40 FT
b. CIRCLE-TARGET DISTANCE ........ .OKM
b. FIELD LEVEL (FT) .................... ............4 FT
c. CIRCLE-TARGET AZIMUTH.. ...... .ODEG
c. SEA LEVEL QNH ..........................RECORD
7. GEOGRAPHICAL DATA (PRESET 7)
d. FIELD LEVEL QFE ........................RECORD
a. TARGET ALTITUDE ....................AS REQD
e. LOW AIRSPEED LIMIT (KTS) .........60 KTS
b. STATION COORDINATE
f. LOW ALTITUDE WARNING (FT) ....300 FT (Update every 10 minutes during flight)
(Set AUTO POSITION UPDATE to NO to up-
g. LOWFUELWARNING(LTRS)......lOLTRS date the station coordinates.)

2. RETURN HOME (PRESET 2) c. STATION ALTITUDE.. ................. AS REQD

a. CRUISEALT . ..........................3,6,9,12KFT d. AUTO POSITION UPDATE ................... YES

b. CRUISE SPEED ......................60, 70,80 KTS e. GRID ZONE INPUT .................................NO


(YES if system will not set grid zone)
c. FINAL ALTITUDE ...,..............- 1, 1, 3, 5 KFT
f. GRID ZONE ...................................AS REQD
d. CLIMBING SPIRAL ..................YES OR NO
g. MAG DECLINATION ...................AS REQD
e. RETURN HOME
COORDINATES .._....._...._....
SHIPS COORD 8. TRACKER CALIBRATION (PRESET 8)
(Update every 10 minutes during flight)
a. AZIMUTH ................................................NA
f. NAV PROGRAMMER. .....RETURN HOME
(Same as last active nav prog way point) b. CORRECTION OFFSET ............................. .O

3. NAVIGATION PROGRAMMER / MISSION c. MASKED ZONE A.. .......................... AS APP


COMPUTER (PRESET 3)
d. MASKED ZONE B ............................AS APP
Complete after RAT0 Upload
e. AUTO SHIP HEADING UPDATE .........YES
4. RANGE CALIBRATION (PRESET 4)
f. OWN SHIP TRUE HEADING .......AS REQD
Complete after RAT0 Upload (Use if heading input is unavailable)

5. METEOROLOGICAL DATA (PRESET 5) 9. RETRIEVAL NET DATA (PRESET 9) .. ..........N

UPDATE AS AVAILABLE 10. RPV DATA (PRESET 10)

a. MODE SELECTION a. ZERO FUEL WEIGHT ..................... KG

11-21 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

b. RPV MODEL .................................AS REQD not to be greater than 30 KTS from any direc-
tion during net erection. Advise MC if winds
c. PAYLOAD ........................................AS APP cannot be brought below 30 KTS relative.

d. CAMERA CONTROL ......................... 1 OBY c. Determine relative winds and ships course/
speed for launch and pass to mission com-
e. MISSION COMPUTER ..........................YES mander whether port or starboard side launch
is prepared.
11. NAVIGATION DATA
(PRESET 11) ........................................AS REQD 2. Approximately 60 min. prior to launch (or when
requested), if flight quarters not already set:
12. GPS INITIALIZATION
(PRESET 12) .....................................NOT USED a. Sound flight quarters, announce:

13. MISSION COMPUTER (PRESET 13) Flight quarters, flight quarters, all hands man
your flight quarters stations for UAV opera-
a. GENERAL ......................................UPDATE tions. All hands remain clear of the flight deck
while conducting UAV operations. Remove
14. MULTIFUNCTION TEST POINTS all hats topside. Now flight quarters for UAV
(MULTIFUNCTION 4) operations.

a. 51 (FOXTROT at the DIP)

b. 52 b. Man the sound-powered phone circuit to coor-


dinate with the Mission Commander in the
c. 53 GCS and the Air Officer in PRIFLY.

d. 56 c. Establish sound-powered phone communica-


tions with:
e. 01
Note
11.20 OOD CHECKLIST FOR UAV
OPERATIONS (SHIPBOARD) STATION MANNED READY

1. Approximately 1.5 hours prior to launch (or when (1) GCS (MC)
requested): (2) HELO
CONTROL
a. Grant permission to UAV Det to erect recov-
(3) CIC
ery net.
(4) BRIDGE
Note
Notify the MC (GCS) and PRIFLY of all
The flight deck will be fouled until the UAV course and speed changes during final
recovery net is derigged.The UAV recovery launch procedures and at all times when the
net can be derigged in under ten minutes to EP is controlling the UAV (immediately af-
clear Spot One in the event of an emergency ter launch and during final approach for
involving AH/UH-1 or H-46 helos. Full recovery).
derigging will take approximately 20-30
minutes after notification to clear Spot Two 3. Approximately 45 minutes prior to launch:
or after UAV launch.
a. Verity FLT QTRS manned and ready with MC
b. Minimize ships maneuvering consistent with (GCS).
safety while erecting net. Relative winds are

ORIGINAL 11-22
b. Authorize Amber Deck when requested by 7. 30 minutes prior to UAV recovery:
MC via Air Officer (required for RAT0 load-
ing). a. If helo operations are not in progress, pass,
Re-man all flight quarters stations for UAV
c. Confirm FOX CORPEN/Speed (See launch operations.
wind charts).
b. Determine FOX CORPEN/Speed for recovery:
FOX CORPEN for launch T
Speed: KTS FOX CORPEN for recovery T
Speed: KTS
Note
Note
Verify desired relative wind against UAV
wind envelopes and with Mission Com- Verify desired relative wind against UAV
mander. wind envelopes and with Mission Com-
mander.
d. UAV Launch Angle-90 deg. relative
port/starboard. 8. NLT 10 minutes prior to recovery:

e. MC reports commencement of RAT0 upload. a. MC will verify UAV recovery net rigged/
flight deck crew ready.
4. 5 minutes prior to launch:
b. MC will request GREEN DECK via
a. Turn to FOX CORPEN/Speed for launch. PRIFLY.

b. Grant GREEN DECK when requested by c. Turn to FOX CORPEN for recovery.
MC via PRIFLY and when ship is on FOX
CORPEN. d. Close up FOXTROT.

c. Close up FOXTROT, e. Grant GREEN DECK to MC when on re-


covery course/speed.Verify winds are within
5. Just prior to launch: recovery envelope.

a. GCS relays 10 set launch count down via 9. Recovery/Post Recovery:


sound-powered phone.
a. At recovery PRIFLY will announce UAV re-
Note covery over 5MC.

If RAT0 misfires, maintain course and b. Post recovery/refueling:


speed. MC shall execute RAT0 Misfire
Checklist. (1) After recovery, while UAV is being fu-
eled/refueled, announce over the IMC,
6. Post launch: The Smoking Lamp is out Main Deck
and below, afl of frame 120 while con-
a. MC will report status of launch (RAT0 ducting UAV fueling operations.
clear/Aborted).
(2) Upon completion of UAV fueling/refuel-
b. Remain at FOX CORPEN (if possible) until ing operations relight the Smoking Lamp.
UAV control checks are complete and MC re-
ports Good Flyer. (3) Consistent with helo flight operations, se-
cure from UAV flight quarters.
c. If helo operations are not scheduled following
UAV launch, pass, Stand down from UAV
flight quarters. Expect to re-man at short no-
tice.

11-23 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

11.21 PRIFLY CHECKLISTS (SHIPBOARD) buckled, goggles down, sleeves rolled down and
buttoned. Stand clear while loading RATO.
11.21.1 PRIFLY UAV Pre-launch Checklist.
Commence NLT 60 minutes prior to scheduled UAV 3. Crew Chief will report RAT0 uploaded, all hands
launch: clear, and ready for engine start.

1. Establish comms with: 4. When permission is given to start engine, an-


nounce on the 5MC:
a. Bridge
Stand by to start UAV.
b. CIC
5. After engine start and all post-startchecks complete,
c. Flight Deck Crew MC will requestGREEN DECK for UAV launch.

d. Mission Commander (GCS). 6. When OOD grants GREEN DECK, announce on


the 5 MC:
2. Test 5MC.
GREEN DECK. On the flight deck, stand by to
3. Test deck status lights and rotary beacon. launch UAV.

4. Test flight deck crash alarm. 7. After UAV launch report RAT0 clear.

5. For Night Operations: 8. After Good Flyer report from MC, set RED
DECK and, if no helo operations scheduled,
Test amber floodlights. stand down from flight quarters as required.

6. PRIFLY/Flight Deck Manned and Ready: 11.21.3 PRIFLY UAV Pre-Recovery Checklist.
Complete NLT 30 minutes prior to recovery:
a. Phone Talker (as required)
1. Establish comms with:
b. Flight Deck CPO/LPO
a. Bridge
c. Fire Party
b. CIC
(1) Scene
c. Flight Deck Crew
(2) Five hose team members.
d. Mission Commander (GCS).
d. Corpsman.
2. PRIFLY/Flight Deck manned and ready:
7. Report to the OOD and MC:
a. Phone Talker
PRIFLY Pre-launch Checklist complete.
b. Flight Deck CPO/LPO
11.21.2 PRIFLY UAV Launch Checklist
c. Fire Party
1. Approximately 45 minutes prior to scheduled
launch, MC should request AMBER DECK for (1) Scene
RAT0 upload.
(2) Five Hose Team Members.
2. When the OOD grants AMBER DECK, an-
nounce on the 5MC: d. Corpsman.

AMBER DECK. Clear the flight deck of all un- 3. Verify recovery net is rigged andready for recovery.
authorized personnel. Flight deck helmets on and

ORIGINAL 11-24
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

11.21.4 PRIFLY UAV Recovery/Post 7. Man appropriate flight quarters stations, including
Recovery Checklist Air Controller and JA phone talker.

1. Approximately 10 minutes prior to recovery MC 8. Test intercom and sound-powered phonecircuits.


will request GREEN DECK for UAV recovery.
9. Report Manned and Ready to OOD.
2. When OOD grants GREEN DECK, announce on
the 5MC: 10. Coordinate control of UAV in accordance with
desired tactical employment and safety of flight
Green Deck. All unauthorized personnel clear the considerations.
flight deck. Flight deck helmets on and buckled,
goggles down, sleeves rolled down and buttoned. 11. Plot UAV positions and tactical information and
Stand by to recover UAV. make recommendations when appropriate.

3. After UAV is in the net: 12. Keep Bridge informed of progress of flight.

a. Announce on the 5MC: 13. Update MC on weather, EMCOM, and changes to


flight requirements as appropriate.
UAV in the net. RED DECK.
11.23 RAT0 MISFIRE PROCEDURES
b. Engage RED DECK light.
In the event of a RAT0 misfire during the launch se-
4. While UAV is lowered to flight deck, announce on quence, the MC will announce misfire and relay such
the 5MC: over the sound-powered phone circuit. Refer to emer-
gency procedure 13.2.1, RAT0 MISFIRE.
On the flight deck, all unauthorized personnel re-
main forward of Spot 1 while lowering UAV and 11.24 UAV WATER RECOVERY PROCEDURES
Recovery Net System.
In the event that an unmanned air vehicle enters the
5. Inform OOD, UAV fueling in progress. water within visual sight of the ship, the following ac-
tion shall be taken for the safe and speedy recovery of
6. When fueling/refueling is complete, and no helo the air vehicle.
operations are scheduled, inform the OOD to se-
cure from flight quarters. Note

11.22 CIC UAV CHECKLIST Safety of personnel is paramount. Abort the


evolution if at any time safety of personnel is
1. Prepare a written tactical flight brief utilizing the in jeopardy.
appropriate portions of the designated format
(Figure 1l-3) approximately two and one-half 11.24.1 UAV Mission Commander
hours prior to the scheduled launch.
1. Inform the bridge that the UAV has entered the
2. Check air-plan for any changes. water, the approximate time of water entry, and
approximate location relative to the ship.
3. Check message traffic concerning operations
area. 2. Monitor the progress of the recovery evolution.

4. Brief aircrew and TAO on tactical data and pro- 11.24.2 OOD
vide a copy of the briefing sheet to the aircrew,
TAO, and OOD. 1. Maneuver the ship in order to position the UAV on
the starboard side.
5. Check wind repeaters for proper operation.
2. Inform the First Lieutenant that a UAV is in the
6. Check all radio, sound-powered phone, and radar water, and direct him to prepare the recovery boat
equipment for proper operation and frequencies and the B&A crane.
(EMCON permitting).

11-25 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

MISSION:
Type/Purpose (NGFS, SURV, RECON, VID, SSC, TRNG)
Date Duration Payload (D/N)
Operation area
Other Ship evolutions
FLIGHT DATA:
Launch time Land time
Altitude assigned Altitude restrictions
Targewaypoint coordinates
Search Sector
Controlling Agency Controlling frequencies
Airspace restrictions

Other known air traffic


WEATHER: (attached weather brief sheet)
Special instructions (ROE, Over-flight Guidance, Sensitivity, etc.)

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: (alert status, deck coord., gun firing, etc.)

Figure 1l-3. CIC UAV Operations Brief Sheet

11.24.3 Master-At-Arms Division w i 11 e n sure possible. The straps will then be attached to the B
proper crowd control and that only official Navy photo- & A crane hook.
graphs are taken.
7. When the air vehicle hasbeenraiseduntil noseland-
11.24.4 UAV Crew Chief will take hoisting strap as- ing gear has cleared the water, attach a tending line
sembly and tending lines to the Boat Crew. around the port or starboardtail boom and one tend-
ing line around the nose landing gear. A salvage
11.24.5 Boat Crew diver, when available, will accompany the recovery
boat to assist in positioning the straps and links.
1. Under the direction of the Boat Officer, position
for UAV recovery. 11.24.6 B 8 A Crane Deck Crew

2. Upon arrival at the UAV, evaluate the condition of 1. When given the signal f?omthe Boat Officer, misethe
the UAV and determine if it can be safely retrieved. air vehicle while the Boat Crew keepstension on the
tending lines, keeping air vehicle in a flat attitude.
3. Attach one strap around the nose landing gear.
2. Once the air vehicle reaches the B & A crane, the
4. Ifwell deck is available, tow UAV into well deck. Deck Crew will position the air vehicle over the
deck and lower the air vehicle to the deck.
5. Ifwell deck recovery is not available, tow air vehi-
cle to the ships B & A crane. 3. When safely on the deck, disconnect the hoisting
straps and tending lines.
6. When alongside and under the B & A crane, attach
a second wire strap around engine. Once the sec- 4. Turn the UAV over to UAV Maintenance Chief
ond wire strap is attached, the first strap around for emergency reclamation.
nose landing gear will be loosened and reposi-
tioned around tiselage as close to the wings as

ORIGINAL 11-26
1124.7 Ship Lookouts shall relay any sightings of
the UAV, green dye marker, or debris to the OOD via
any means available. Should the ship pass close aboard
the UAV prior to boat launching, a visual marker such as
float coat with strobe should be thrown in the water to
mark the UAV position.

Do not use a smoke or flare to mark the UAV


position due to the presence of AVGAS.

11-27 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL


Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

PART IV

Flight Characteristics

Chapter 12 - Flight Characteristics

35 (Reverse Blank)
CHAPTER 12

Flight Characteristics

12.1 TAXIING computed rotation speed (but not less than 58 KIAS),
light back-pressure on the elevator stick should be ap-
The UAV is taxied with engine running and the throt- plied to lift the aircraft off the runway. Too much back
tle at idle. Three people are required to taxi the aircraft, a stick will result in the tail section impacting the runway
crew chief and two handlers. Ground handlers should as the nose of the aircraft comes up.
guide the UAV during taxi by holding the leading edge
of the vertical stabilizers.
(,,,,,,I
Do not use rapid or abrupt movement of the
nosewheel steering during takeoff roll. This
Do not put excessive force high on the verti- could result in over control, and could create
cal stabilizers. Turns should be accom- an extremely hazardous condition to the
plished by pushing down on the booms, flight crew and UAV. Rudder effectiveness
raising the nosewheel to avoid damage to the also increases as airspeed increases.
nosewheel linkage.
Engine or propeller malfunction during takeoff can
12.2 TAKEOFF cause directional control problems as well as have an
adverse effect on acceleration and climb. Utilization of
12.2.1 Rolling Takeoff. Lineup should be accom- the abort procedures will enable the pilot to maintain di-
plished using the crew chief to align the aircraft on run- rectional control of the UAV while a safe stop is accom-
way centerline, making sure that sufficient straight roll plished. An abort decision should be based on available
is allowed. When the checklist is complete and clear- runway length, rotation speed, environmental condi-
ance for takeoff has been given, the EP will announce tions, obstruction clearance, and takeoff ground roll.
going to max power. The IP will announce max RPM.
A minimum of 6700 must be reached before the aircraft 12.2.2 Crosswind Takeoff. Directional control is
is released for takeoff roll. The EP will ask for a second more urgent at the early part of the takeoff roll, and at
call to verify sufficient RPM. Full throttle should not be times holding the correct amount of rudder will be nec-
maintained for more than 10 secondsduring this period. essary. As acceleration increases, easeout of the exces-
If the RPM is insufficient, the EP will bring the throttle sive rudder as necessary to maintain centerline and
back to idle, and the crew chiefwill taxi the aircraft back directional control.
to the maintenance line.
12.3 CLIMB AND CRUISE
When the EP has received the second RPM call (min-
imum 6700), he will announce release. During the 12.3.1 Climb Procedures. When the aircraft is
takeoff roll, directional control of the aircraft will re- definitely airborne, the remaining length of the runway
quire gentle and smooth application of control inputs. in use will determine if an abort can be executed safely.
Very small inputs will result in smooth corrections to Be sure to discuss this possible situation in the preflight
yawing tendencies caused by low speeds and cross- brief. Climb to 300 ft AGL or 1.2 km before attempting
winds. From the start of the takeoff roll, until the aircraft to execute the crosswind turn.
is airborne, the IP will announce airspeeds in 5 kt incre-
ments only. As the aircraft accelerates and reaches

12-I ORIGINAL
Al SRRPV-NFM-OOO

Note 12.3.3 Stall Recovery. The optimum method of


stall recovery in sticks is the application of forward stick
300 A. gives the EP enough altitude to at- (down elevator) to reduce the angle of attack and the ad-
tempt a safe return to the runway in case of dition of power as necessary to maintain angle of attack
engine failure. 1.2 km gives the EP good vi- in the normal flying range. Aileron and rudder may be
sual, at low altitude, to make the crosswind used as necessary to maintain balanced flight or reduce
turn safely. yawing motions.

12.3.4 Changing Flight Modes. When changing


from sticks mode to knobs mode, match the control
knobs as closely as possible to the UAVs current alti-
tude, airspeed, and heading to avoid abrupt UAV
If 300 ft. has not been accomplished at the movements.
1.2~km point and the crosswind turn is exe-
cuted, local terrain must be observed for 12.3.5 Autopilot Disconnect (DISCO) Flight.
UAV clearance. Experience in autopilot disconnect (DISCO) flight over
the history of the airframe reflects a severe departure
Hold the aircraft in a steady turn through the from controlled flight. Depending on entry attitude the
crosswind, and maintain airspeed of 60-70 kts, climbing operator should anticipate a departure from wings level
into the downwind to a minimum altitude of 500 ft and nose low spin if corrective action is not taken. Trim
AGL. Once a safe altitude for controllability checks has positions should be set in level, controlled flight to elim-
been reached, the EP will notify the IP to standby for inate unwanted changes in UAV attitude. All control in-
controllability checks. puts should be small and made gradually. The operator
should anticipate extreme attitudes while in DISCO and
With an airspeed of 70 kts, the EP will pull full up must be ready to make immediate corrective inputs to
for maximum climb until the IP states the degree of the controls.
pitch, maintaining greater than 60 kts. The EP will bring
the throttle to idle and at the same time nose the UAV Although practicing DISCO flight regularly is highly
forward full down until a reading of negative pitch encouraged, consideration must be given to local
has been observed by the IP. If the UAV has increased weather conditions and visibility, and should be thor-
its airspeed above 70 kts, be sure to slow the UAV to a oughly discussed during briefing. DISCO training
safe airspeed of 70 kts before attempting the next con- should not be attempted by the IP if he does not have a
trol check. With wings level, move the ailerons full discernible horizon with the video platform caged.
right until a reading of maximum right roll has been DISCO should not be practiced by IPs or EPs in high
observed, then level the wings and move the ailerons wind conditions,
%ll left until a reading of maximum left roll has been
observed. Either direction may be flown first depending 12.4 LANDING
upon UAV position near runway and EP discretion.
Once again level the wings and maintain controlled air- 12.4.1 Normal Landing (See Figure 12-l). Nor-
speeds.A low-level pass down the runway may be nec- mal landing at sealevel with no wind and warm temper-
essary for an altitude check. atures should be executed at a safe airspeed. Use
elevators and throttle control to settle the UAV into the
landing zone. The UAV should be landed main gear
first, with the nosewheel held off with elevator control.
As the nosewheel touches the runway, be prepared to in-
put smooth steering corrections as required to maintain
All stick movements should be gentle and runway centerline. Engine cut should be performed af-
smooth. Rapid and abrupt movements could ter the UAV has settled onto the runway, at idle power, to
have adverse effects on the performance of eliminate the possibility of becoming airborne again.
the UAV. Maintain directional control of the UAV until engage-
ment of the arresting gear.
12.3.2 Maneuvering. The UAV was not designed
for acrobatic maneuvers. The maximum allowable ma- 12.4.2 Crosswind Landing. The EP may land the
neuvering load factor is +3g/-1.5g. Large abrupt control UAV by either of two methods. The first is to adjust
movements must be avoided. heading into the wind, maintaining wings level (crab-
bing). This method can be used until just before

ORIGINAL 12-2
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

CROSSWIND

Pattern aftitude

Conbd transfer fmrn


IPtoEP

7tMokts
loo0 ft AGL

DOWNWIND
70-6okta at touchdown
a500 AGL

1. Pattern may be ac@sted for geography or obstrwtions near runway.


2. Minimum recommended runway length is 30cC1k
3. kvbgss for pattern differ dopendIng upon placement of TCU. 300-500 AGL
4. Croswlnd turn executed above 300 ft. AGL.
5. IP calls airspeed, altitude and range throughout pattern on ICS.
6. EP cuts engine after landing and engages arrentlng gear.

Figure 12- 1. Typical Landing Pattern

touchdown, when the UAV heading must be corrected A tighter pattern should be flown to enhance visual ref-
to runway centerline. The UAV can also be flown with erence of the UAV, at an airspeed that is 3-5 knots above
one wing slightly down into the wind and opposite rud- normal. This altitude is contingent on geographical fea-
der applied (slipping). This results in an increased rate tures of the area of operation.
of descent, but the UAV can be flown to landing with the
heading of the UAV on runway centerline. Enter the downwind leg maintaining a slight nose
low attitude with wings level. Adjust all flight inputs
12.4.3 Autopilot Disconnect (DISCO) Landing smoothly to avoid over-control of the UAV. Begin base
turn, avoiding excessive bank angles through wings
level on final. Continue on final approach utilizing
power as necessary to control the aircraft rate of de-
scent. Input any required corrections to maintain the
UAVs orientation to the runway centerline. At approx-
During actual DISCO EMERGENCY, the imately five (5) feet AGL, begin to flare aircraft to
controlling and backup stations IPs should touchdown.
have payload caged and DISCO selected in
the event either is required. In the event of a missed approach, apply full power
and rotate the air vehicle once at rotation speed. Repeat
Once in DISCO, adjust trim for level flight. Traffic the traffic pattern until a smooth, safe landing is
pattern entry should be from a lower than normal altitude. attained.

12-3 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL


-----------------------
7
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

PART V

Emergency Procedures

Chapter 13 - Emergency Procedures

3 7 (Reverse Blank)
a---------------------

Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

CHAPTER 13

Emergency Procedures

Emergency procedures are presented by flight phase.


Those emergencies that are executed identically, re-
gardless of phase, are only listed once, generally in the
INFLIGHT section. If RAT0 bottle is on fire, it may explode. Do
not approach the bottle for 30 minutes after
Although the primary method of recognizing a fail- fire and flames have been extinguished.
ure or malfunction is the associated warning lamp, some RAT0 Safety Officer shall take control of
emergencies can occur with no such indication. The de- the area and accomplish the post-shut down
cision to execute a particular set of emergency proce- checks on the UAV. EOD shall safe the
dures may not be based solely on the illumination of a rocket bottle for disposal.
warning lamp but will include analysis of all indicators,
such as instruments, warning lamps, and payload video.
In the event of more than one warning lamp being lit, 1WARNING 1
those lamps that are red in color shall be reacted to prior
to yellow warning lamps.
If the fire occurs while positioned on the
Finally, emergency procedure checklists cannot pneumatic launcher, all personnel shall re-
cover every possible contingency. Compound emer- main behind the wing line while fighting the
gencies have not been addressed. Execution of any fire.
emergency procedure shall be conducted using all
available knowledge and experience. 13.1.2 ENG FAILS TO CUT ON COMMAND

Note Note

For all emergency procedure checklists, an The ENG CUT switch will not work in
asterisk (*) denotes those items that shall be mixed mode flight. Full sticks must be se-
performed from memory. lected to cut the engine from that control
box.
13.1 GROUND EMERGENCIES
* 1. ATTEMPT A GO AROUND .........IF ABLE (EP)
13.1.1 FIRE ON DECK

* 1. NAV LIGHTS .........................................ON (EP)

* 2. ENG ......................................................CUT(EP)
Do not attempt a go around unless the ENG
* 3. FIRE CONTROL BOX .........................OFF (CC) CUT switch has remained on for at least 2
sets (approx 230 fi).
* 4. SAFE/ARM Switch ...................SAFE/OFF (CC)
* 2. FULL STICKS .............................CONFIRM (IP)
5. Fire ....................................EXTINGUISH (ALL)
* 3. S TURNS ................................EXECUTE (EP)

13-l ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

This should be considered if the UAV is be-


yond 100 km from station.

Although S turns will help slow the vehicle, 9. PCS/GCS(Non-controlling)......ASREQD(MC)


ensure the UAV engages the arresting gear
perpendicular and as close to centerline as Note
possible.
The unused control station may be powered
* 4. ENG CUT SWITCH ..............REMAIN OFF (EP) down in the event the controlling station bat-
tery power is the only source of power. Pre-
13.1.3 POWER FAILURE (CONTROL STATIONS) sets must be re-entered before control is
transferred.
This emergency procedure should be utilized for
power failure warnings in GCS, PCS and TCU. 10. CONTROL STATION
TRANSMITTER ......LOWPWR/ASREQD(IP)
*1 POWER DISTRIB. VERIFY SWITCHES/
PANEL ..................................WARNINGS (MC)
w
Note

If the power failure is to one of the bays or The UAV may execute Return Home if the
TCU, the affected bay or component wam- UAV is at extended ranges once Low Power
ing lamps will be illuminated on the PDP. If on the transmitters is selected.
power to the shelter is affected, the interior
lights, OBY monitors, and the plotter are au- 11. CONTROL STATION
tomatically disabled. For UPS configured TRANSFER ................................._AS REQD (IP)
GCS, this condition is not applicable.
12. LAND ...................AS SOON AS POSSIBLE (IP)
*2 UAV CONTROL .......................VERIFY (IP/EP)
13.2 LAUNCH AND RECOVERY
Note EMERGENCIES

Payload controls will still function. The Pay- 13.2.1 RAT0 MISFIRE
load Operator may use the PTMP to view the
video. * 1. THROTTLE ........................................IDLE (EP)

*3 FAIL CHECK ...................................CHECK(IP) * 2. CBX ..._........................................ MANNED

4 ALTERNATE PWR SOURCE ............USE (MC)

5. UAV HEADING ....................................RTB (IP)

If an alternate power source is not immediately The EP shall remain at his station until en-
available: gine shutdown. In the case of inadvertent
launch, immediately select full throttle.
6. AIRSPEED .................................INCREASE (IP)
Fire Control Box ....................................OFF (CC)
7. PILOT TV MONITORS ................AS REQD (IP)
SAFE/ARM Switch ............................SAFE (CC)
8. OBY Secure .................................AS REQD (PO)
Fire Line Cable W 1 .............DISCONNECT (CC)
Note
Shorting Jack Jl ...........................INSTALL (CC)
The Mission Commander may wish to turn
the monitors off to conserve battery power. Nav Lights ...............................................ON (EP)

ORIGINAL 13-2
--B---B-------B-B-----B
7
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

8. ENG ......................................................CUT (EP) 6. Arresting Gear .........................._...ENGAGE (EP)

13.2.4 HUNG RAT0 BOTTLE


(w,,,,,,I
1. Hdg to Hung
Ordnance Jett Area ............................SET (IP/EP)
If RAT0 bottle is on tire, it may explode. Do
not approach the bottle for 30 minutes after 2. High G Maneuvers .................EXECUTE (IP/EP)
fire and flames have been extinguished.
RAT0 Safety Officer shall take control of Note
the area and accomplish the post-shut down
checks on the UAV. EOD shall safe the Attempt to dislodge bottle by entering a shal-
rocket bottle for disposal. low dive, not to exceed 20 pitch down or 90
KIAS. Smartly pull positive gs by bringing
13.2.2 PNEUMATIC LAUNCHER FAILURE nose up to the horizon. Repeat a maximum of
three times.
* 1. THROTTLE ...........,............................IDLE (EP)

* 2. CBX ............................................MANNED (EP) w

m Do not get nose high as bottle may impact


prop on release.

The EP shall remain at his station until en- If RAT0 fails to jettison:
gine shutdown. In the case of inadvertent
launch, immediately select full throttle. 3. Land ..........................................AS REQD (ALL)

3. Launching Control
Box S2 switch ........................................OFF (CC) piiE-1

4. V6 Valve .......................................CLOSED (CC) Hung RAT0 bottle may jettison on landing


or net recovery. Clear projected flight path
of non-essential personnel. Plan touchdown
(,,,,,,
at or beyond the EP position to minimize po-
tential danger from RAT0 bottle releasing
When closing the V6 valve, personnel must from UAV during landing. Arresting hook
stay clear of the UAV launch path in case of could miss arresting gear cable due to RAT0
inadvertent launch. bottle obstruction.

5. Nav Lights ...............................................ON (EP) 13.2.5 LOSS OF VISUAL CONTACT

6. ENG ......................................................CUT (EP) * 1. NOTIFY CREW ...............................a....ALL (EP)

13.2.3 ROLLING TAKEOFF ABORT * 2. KNOBS CONTROL


(ROLL 0) .......................................SELECT (IP)
* 1. THROTTLE ........................................IDLE(EP)
3. Steer UAV
* 2. NAV LIGHTS .........................................ON (EP) using Roll Knob ...........................SAFE HDG (IP)

* 3. ENG ......................................................CUT (EP)

4. FLT-TO/LD .......................................TO/LD (IP)

5. Payload Shield ..._.......................... DEPLOY (PO)

13-3 ORIGINAL
----------------------- b
-----m-mm--------------

I
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO
l

If the Heading knob does not exactly match If any station has selected Autopilot Disen-
the current UAV heading, the UAV will exe- gage (DISCO) for an emergency condition,
cute an immediate turn once KNOBS control all stations shall select Autopilot Disengage.
is selected. Therefore, to prevent inadvertent
turns into obstacles, roll control with 0 13.3.1 ENGINE CUT (IP AT THE CONTROLS)
should be readied prior to selecting KNOBS.
* 1. SAFE HEADING .........................SELECT (MC)
13.2.6 ENGINE CUT (EP AT THE CONTROLS)
* 2. OPTIMUM GLIDE ..........................._.....SET (IP)

w Note

Optimum glide is achieved at +3 pitch.


The decision to return to the runway should With the engine off, the UAV will glide 2.9
only be made if conditions allow for a safe km for every 1000 ft of altitude on a 6
recovery. Consideration shall be given to glideslope (no wind, 0 pitch). By setting the
winds, operator experience, altitude, and camera to 6 depression, the crosshairs will
distance. A safe landing can generally be at- indicate the approximate point of
tempted for UAV altitudes above 300 ft touchdown.
AGL. In all cases, the IP shall frequently
provide airspeed and altitude information to 3. Ditch heading ..........................................SET (IP)
the EP.
Note
* 1. OPTIMUM GLIDE ................................SET (EP)
Although STICKS mode will function,
Note KNOBS mode is the preferred method of
setting optimum glide (+3 pitch) and fixed
Optimum glide is achieved at +3 pitch. heading.

* 2. FLT-TO/LD .,............__.......,...............TO/LD (IP) 4. FLT-TO/LD e...................................... TO/LD (IP)

3. Payload Shield ..............................DEPLOY (PO) 5. Payload Shield ..........................DEPLOY (PO/IP)

6. UAV Location ..............................MARK (PO/IP)


m
13.3.2 ENGINE TEMP

The payload shield should only be deployed Note


if time permits, especially when engine cut
occurs under PCS command. The REPORT INHIBIT light will normally
illuminate coincident with an ENG TEMP
4. Land or Ditch in a safe area............AS ABLE (EP) warning light. This is a software anomaly
and can be ignored.
13.3 IN-FLIGHT ENGINE EMERGENCIES
* 1. EDC DNL .........................................CHECK (IP)
During in-flight emergencies particular attention
shall be given to the selected flight mode in all stations If Eng Temp >260C:
involved in the flight event. Split site operations may re-
quire communications between control stations in order * 2. RPM ..................................._.....REDUCE (IP/EP)
to properly prepare for a precautionary or emergency re-
covery of the Pioneer UAV.

ORIGINAL 13-4
LB-------------------,-,
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

If Eng Temp <llOC: If sufficient altitude / RPM exists to RTB:

* 3. RPM .....................................INCREASE (IP/EP) 7. PBX/CBXWOT .......................SELECT (lP/EP)

f-----:1 8. Manual Throttle ...............................SELECT (IP)

9. Land ............. AS SOON AS PRACTICAL (ALL)


In order to minimize the potential for catastrophic
engine failure, all subsequent RPM adjustments
should be done gradually.

Note
Due to difficulty descending and landing
The most practical method for controlling with high RPM, consideration should be
RPM is to select STICK Throttle. given to securing engine in overhead pat-
tern (with landing assured) or on short fi-
If Eng Temp >230C but ~260C: nal.

4. RPM Adjust .................AS NECESSARY (IP/EP) A transient non-responsive throttle may


indicate impending throttle servo failure.
If Eng Temp indicates 0C: If transient non-responsive throttle condi-
tion occurs, execute Stuck Throttle Emer-
5. Land ..............AS SOON AS PRACTICAL (ALL) gency Procedure without delay.

Note Note

A reading of 0C indicates a circuit failure. If landing at runway, it may be necessary to


Actual engine temp cannot be determined. turn on NAV lights and cut engine on short
Avoid max or min RPM for extended final or overhead.
periods.
13.3.4 HIGH IDLE (ABOVE 4800 RPM) WITH
6. Airspeed Increase .....................AS ABLE (IP/EP) MIN THROTTLE

7. Land .................AS SOON AS POSSIBLE (ALL) 1. NAV Lights .............................................ON (EP)

13.3.3 STUCK THROTTLE 2. Pattern (for shallow approach).......EXTEND (EP)

* 1. RTB/SAFE Heading ....................SELECT (ALL) 3. Maximum electrical load set ............VERIFY (IP)

2. Sufficient Altitude / RPM 4. Land ..............AS SOON AS PRACTICAL (ALL)


to RTB ..................................DETERMINE (MC)
Note
If insufficient altitude / RPM to RTB:
Be alert to go around in the event of bounce
3. Full Sticks ..................................SELECT (IP/EP) at touchdown. If unable to land after several
attempts, it may be necessary to turn on
4. Throttle (Idle to WOT) .................CYCLE(IP/EP) NAV lights and cut engine in flight on short
final or overhead.
5. Abrupt Flight Maneuvers .......PERFORM (IPEP)
13.3.5 HIGH FUEL CONSUMPTION
6. DITCH ...........................IF NECESSARY (ALL)
1. Heading ................................RTB/LAND (IP/EP)

2. Airspeed .............._........................... MAX (IP/EP)

3. EDC DNL/Fuel Gauge ................COMPARE (IP)

13-5 ORIGINAL
-------mm-m

Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

4. Climb .............................................AS REQD (IP)

Note

Calculate time required to land vs. time to At this point, further attempts to reset the
fuel starvation. Climbing may provide more generator should not be conducted. A safe
time and range after ENG CUT. RTB or landing shall be made as soon aspos-
sible since battery life is limited. The pre-
If unable to safely return: ferred method for a rapid RTB is to select
KNOBS control for heading and max air-
5. Ditch ...........................................SAFELY (ALL) speed, and deselect altitude. However, since
any combination of flight modes can be
13.4 ELECTRICAL EMERGENCIES used, care should be taken to choose that
mode which can be most easily
13.4.1 GENERATOR FAILURE. A GEN FAIL accomplished.
light does not in and of itself indicate a catastrophic fail-
ure. It does, however, require the UAV to maintain all 9 RPVXMTR .................................._ASREQD(IP)
electrical requirements from the onboard backup bat-
tery. Depending on the charge of the battery and UAV Note
power requirements of the UAV, this can amount to as
much as 40 min. (5AH battery) or 20 min. (4AH bat- The decision to turn the RPV XMTR off
tery), or as little as 2-3 min. for either. It is therefore im- should compare the benefits of increased
perative that the electrical load be reduced by the battery life to the ability to monitor UAV re-
greatest amount possible and land as soon as possible to sponse to flight control inputs.
limit the possibility of a mishap. In addition to the
checklist procedures, the flight crew should determine 10. NVC operating mode DR/GPS .........VERIFY (IP)
if recovery at the GCS or an alternate control site is fea-
sible. Ifglide range and battery life charts indicate insuf- 11. Test Point 53 ................................_....CHECK (IP)
ficient battery life for safe recovery at these sites, then
an alternate landing site must be selected. 12. ETE and Battery Life e..............DETERMINE (IP)

* 1. GEN.. ................................................. RESET (IP)

* 2. NAV LIGHTS.. ................................. OFF (IP/EP)

* 3. RPV XMTR .......................................... LOW (IP) Below 24 Vdc (TP 53 = 3.0), the servos be-
come unreliable. Therefore, the decision to
* 4. KNOBS/STICKS ............................ SELECT (IP) continue flight below that voltage should
consider terrain, proximity to population and
* 5. PLATFORM/VIDEO ....................... OFF (PO/IP) distance to a safe landing area. If the UAV is
fast or high on the approach and battery volt-
* 6. HEADING ........................... RTB/LAND (IP/EP) age is 25 Vdc (3.125) or less, you should
consider cutting the engine in flight.
* 7. AIRSPEED ..................................... MAX (IP/EP) Go-around decision should be based on bat-
tery life remaining.
Once Payload Platform has caged and video is off:
If unable to RTB:
8. Gen ...........................................,.,......RESET (IP)
13. Airspeed .........................OPTIMUM GLIDE (IP)

ORIGINAL 13-6
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

Note slowly increasing value of TP-53 is normal


following a discharge. In this case, the
Optimum glide is achieved at +3 pitch. BATT FAIL light will normally extinguish
within minutes.
14. FLT-TO/LD .......................................TO/LD (IP)

15 Video ........................................................ON (IP)


Note
16. Landing or Ditching Site ..................SELECT (IP)
This table is only valid for the 4AH battery
Note packs. Battery life values for the 5AH pack
should be as good or better.
Although caged, the payload in combination
with a nose down attitude can be used to se-
,TIME TP-53 85 kts 95 kts 105 kts
lect an appropriate landing or ditching site.
(Min) Vdc No Wind Dist (km) Traveled
17. Controlled Landing
1 2.6 2.9 3.2
or Ditching ...................................ATTEMPT (IP)
2 3.08 k .I2 5.3 5.8 6.4
13.4.2 BATTERY FAILURE. Increase of battery
voltage at TP 53 to 4.00 does not mean that the battery is 1 3 1 3.20? .I2 1 7.8 1 8.7 1 9.7 1
fully charged. Battery may be cumulative and any con- ~l1.10 1 10.4 1 11.7 1 12.9 1
sumption ofbattery life must be monitored closely. Bat-
tery use during preflight should be avoided. If the BATT
FAIL lamp is illuminated on deck but TP-53 is reading
2 3.62V and increasing, takeoff is permitted with the
BATT FAIL lamp illuminated. Given a fully charged
battery, a battery discharge for more than 1.5 mins will
8 3.44 k .08 20.9 23.4 25.9
require immediate replacement of the battery prior to
takeoff. Test points are not accurate at any time when 9 3.48 k .04 23.5 26.3 29.1
program mode is in GCS mode.
IO 3.48 f .04 26.2 29.3 32.4
1. NVC Operating Mode 11 3.48 + .04 28.8 32.2 35.6
DR/GPS .......................................CONFIRM (IP)
12 3.50* .04 31.4 35.1 38.8
2. Test Point 53 .....................................CHECK (IP) 13 3.52 k .04 34.0 38.0 42.1

Note p14 1 3.52*.04 1 36.6 1 41.0 1 45.3 1

15 3.56k.04 39.3 43.9 48.6


The following test points can be used to fur- I I I
ther analyze the status of the battery pack: 16 3.60 f .04 41.9 46.8 51.8

TP STATUS 17 3.6Ozk.04 44.5 49.8 55.0


53 Battery Voltage
52 One side of 4AH BEU
I 18 1 3.62+.06 1 47.1 1 52.7 I 58.3 I
56 Charger Output I 19 1 3.642.08 1 49.7 1 55.6 1 61.5 1

01 Bus Voltage 20 52.4 58.6 64.8

25 65.5 73.2 81.0


If TP-56 is 0 Vdc then the charger is not
working and the decision to continue the 30 78.6 87.9 97.2
mission should be based on whether or not 35 91.7 102.5 113.4
TP-53 indicates a fully charged battery (at or
near 4.0 reading). If TP-53 shows a steadily 40 104.8 117.2 129.6
decreasing value with no other indications,
then a shorted battery should be suspected.A

13-7 ORIGINAL
----------------------- b
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

If BATT FAIL remains lit:

3. Land .............. AS SOON AS PRACTICAL (ALL)


EM1 or proximity to another control station
13.51 NO REPORT may cause intermittent loss of command.

* 1. UAV IN SIGHT.. ...................... LAND AS SOON Uplink XMTR indicators ..................CHECK (IP)
AS POSSIBLE (ALL)
a. PRIM/SEC XMTR ...............................HIGH (IP)
2. Tracking ........................................... CHECK (IP)
4. UPL Code.......................................... SHORT (IP)
3. RPV ANT.. .......................................... OMNI (IP)
5. Fail Check ........................................ .CHECK (IP)
4. KNOBS Control .............................. SELECT(IP)
6. TCU Warning Panels ..................... CHECK (MC)
5. Heading.. ................................................ RTB (IP)
Note
6. Present location/Time .................. .REcoRD (PO)
At a minimum, check the DC Distribution
7. RPVXMTR ...................... .CY CLE OFF/ON (IP) Panel, UHF Xmtr Power, VSWR warning
lamps, and the CCB.
8. RPVXMTR ................. CYCLELOW/HIGH(IP)
If unable to regain RPV control:
9. Dish Elevation .............................. ADJUST (MC)
7. Emercontrol station XFER.. ........ AS ABLE (MC)
10. UAV Position ....................... DETERMINE (MC)
8. Controlling agency .................. .CONTACT (MC)
Note
13.53 SINGLE UPLINK FAILURE
All available resources shall be used to de-
termine the UAV position and ground track. 1. CODE PRIMUPL ........... SHORTAS REQD(IP)
This will include but is not limited to FAA or
ATC, ships radar, visual sighting, DR cal- 2. RPV ANT.. ......................... OMNI AS REQD (IP)
culations, etc.
3. RH Delay ......................................... SELECT (IP)
11. Fail Check.. ....................................... CHECK(IP)
4. Affected XMTR ................................... HIGH (IP)
Note
5. GCS/PCS/PWR Fail, Low Pwr .............. OUT (IP)
This step will identify TCU problems.
6. Dish Antenna Elevation .............. AS REQD (MC)
12. Alternate station .............. CHECK & XFER (MC)
7. Heading ....................................... ..CHANG E (IP)
13. Notify Ground Crew ............... COMPLETE (MC)
Note
If unable to locate:
UHF Uplink loss may occur at extended
14. Orbit/Ditch .................. AS APPROPRIATE (MC) ranges due to the relatively low signal
strength of the UHF transmitter. Changing
13.52 DUAL UPLINK FAILURE UAV heading and altitude may unmask the
antenna and restore uplink.
1. Control station indicators .................. CHECK(IP)
8. UPL Code short/long ..................... AS REQD (IP)

ORIGINAL 13-8
----------
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

Note

If C-Band uplink is lost for an extended pe-


riod, sync can only be accomplished in If the heading knob does not exactly match
SHORT. the current UAV heading, the UAV will exe-
cute an immediate turn once KNOBS control
9. Climb .............................................AS ABLE (IP) is selected. Therefore, to prevent inadvertent
turns into obstacles, the roll loop should be
Note readied and set to 0 prior to selecting
KNOBS.
Continued flight with only a single uplink
may be conducted if operationally required. * 3. RCV STATION
However, loss of the other uplink will cause PRIM/SEC XMTRS... ...................ON/HIGH (IP)
the UAV to enter RI-I flight mode.
4. Steer UAV using
13.5.4 UAV FAILURE TO RESPOND (GCS Roll Knob ....................................SAFE HDG (IP)
LOCKUP). This checklist is executed whenever the
UAV fails to properly respond to UPL commands. Other 13.5.6 PROG FAIL LIGHT ILLUMINATED
symptoms may include keyboard lock-up, inability to (-30 CONFIGURED NVC)
change flight modes, frozen instruments, or inaccurate
system calculations. Note
1. Fail Check ......................................._.CHECK(IP) The PROG FAIL Light will illuminate if the
current waypoint is in the same grid zone,
2. Bays PBY Switch ............CYCLE OFF-ON (MC) but is an excessive distance away (300 or
400 km). This warning is cleared by reload-
3. UAV Responseto Flt Cmds .........CHECK (IP/EP) ing General Data (thereby changing current
position), or by selecting a different way
If problem continues: point (program leg). With the updated -30
configuration NVC card (ECNs 32055 and
4. Fail Check .........................................CHECK(IP) 32088) installed, the PROG FAIL Light also
illuminates when the NVC card processor
If no indicated GCS failures: hangs up and stops communicating. If it does
occur in flight, the operator should follow
5. COMMUNICATION PANEL the procedures below:
(CCB) PWR Switch ........................CYCLE (MC)
* 1. KNOBS/STICKS ............................SELECT (IP)
6. Ah Station Control XFER ...........AS REQD (MC)
Note
If control is established:
If the UAV was operating in PROG Mode
7. Presets.,...............,.......................RE-ENTER (IP) when the warning occurred, the UAV will
return to Knob control mode for each control
Note loop that has the appropriate READY light
already lit on the PCD. Any control loop that
Only initializing the NAV Card is required. does not have a READY light lit will default
to STICKS control mode.
13.5.5 EMERGENCY CONTROL STATION
TRANSFER 2. PRESET 3 (NPL) / MISSION COMPUTER
Menu ...............................................SELECT(IP)
* 1. XFER STATION
PRIM/SEC XMTRS ...............................OFF (IP) 3. MISSION/GENERAL
Menu ...............................................SELECT(IP)
* 2. KNOBS CONTROL
(ROLL 0) ...........................VERIFIED (RCV IP) 4. NVC Bypass (item #3) ...........SELECT +YES (IP)

13-9 ORIGINAL
a---------------------
mm---------

Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

Note If no recovery:

If the cause of the PROG FAIL light was an * 7. THROTTLE ............................__......IDLE (IP/EP)
NVC card hang-up, then the PROG FAIL
light should be extinguished. If not, cycle * 8. INSTRUMENTWUAV ............_.......MONITOW
Step 4 to - no, and back to + yes. If this does RECOVER (IP/EP)
not clear the warning light, examine one of
the other causes (listed above). Normal Note
flight operation (all modes of flight except
Program Mode) can be resumed. Monitor payload video, VSI, rate of turn to
identify direction and nature of departure.
5. NVC Bypass (item #3) .............SELECT -NO (IP)
If UAV recovers:
6. Normal Operations restored .............VERIFY (IP)
* 9. THROTTLE ................_...........AS REQD (IP/EP)
13.6 FLIGHT CONTROL EMERGENCIES
10. Land .................AS SOON AS POSSIBLE (ALL)
13.6.1 FLIGHT CONTROL MALFUNCTION.
This emergency covers any instance of anomalous UAV
responseto flight control inputs. This includes but is not
limited to A-PLT FAIL, A-PLT MAL, VGU drift or fail-
ure, and control box malfunction. Control malfunctions
may occur without illumination of an associated wam- During actual DISCO EMERGENCY, the
ing lamp. If a failure occurs with one of the control box controlling and backup stations IPs should
potentiometers, the CBX/PBX FAIL light may not illu- have payload caged and DISCO selected in
minate nor transfer to an alternate control box. In such the event either is required.
cases,only proper instrument scan will identify a possi-
ble problem. Note
* 1. CONTROL BOX .............................VERIFY (IP) Autopilot Disconnect (DISCO) Landing.
Once in DISCO, adjust trim for level flight.
* 2. FULL STICKS ........................a.......SELECT (IP) Traffic pattern entry should be from a lower
than normal altitude. A tighter pattern
* 3. PLATFORM .....................a...................OFF (PO) should be flown to enhance visual reference
of the UAV, at an airspeed that is 3-5 knots
Note above normal. This altitude is contingent on
geographical features of the area of
Do not delay steps 4 - 7 while waiting for operation.
platform to cage.
Enter the downwind leg maintaining a slight
* 4. UAV ANTENNA ..........................OMNI (IP/PO) nose low attitude with wings level. Adjust all
flight inputs smoothly to avoid over-control
Note of the UAV. Begin base turn, avoiding ex-
cessive bank angles through wings level on
If the UAV is fully controllable after select- final. Continue on final approach utilizing
ing STICKS, then it may be possible to re- power as necessary to control the aircraft
turn to KNOBS control by incrementally rate of descent. Input any required correc-
selecting one loop at a time until the problem tions to maintain the UAVs orientation to
reappears, then deselecting that loop. the runway centerline. At approximately
five (5) feet AGL, begin to flare aircraft to
If still uncontrollable: touchdown.

* 5. AUTOPILOT ............................DISENG (IP/EP) In the event of a missed approach, apply full


power and rotate the air vehicle once at rota-
* 6. CONTROL tion speed. Repeat the traffic pattern until a
BOX/TRIM .....................NEUTRALIZE (IP/EP) smooth, safe landing is attained.

ORIGINAL 13-10
--B--------w--B-----B-B
1
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO
h

13.6.2 UAV OSCILLATIONSKNTRL BOX I


FAILURE (ACFT WITHIN w
AUTOPILOT LIMITS) I
If the heading knob does not exactly match
* 1. CNTRL MODE/BOX. ...................EVALUATE/ the current UAV heading, the UAV will exe- I
CHANGE (IP/EP) cute an immediate turn once KNOBS control
is selected. Therefore, to prevent inadvertent h
* 2. PLATFORM ..............,..........................OFF (PO) turns into obstacles, the roll loop should be
readied and set to 0 prior to selecting b
KNOBS.

Note
If the UAV continues pitch and roll oscil- At this point, the problem is most likely in
lations, an impending VGU failure may the control box or it cannot be corrected. Op-
be indicated. Refer to Flight Control Mal- tions for deselecting the control box include:
function. transferring to the CBX, SBX, or PBX; or se-
lecting KNOBS; or conducting an emer-
If the UAV is operating within A-PLT gency transfer to another control station.
limits but one control axis is pegged or not
responding, then a control box malfunc-
tion should be suspected. In this case, se-
lecting A-PLT DISENG may cause the
UAV to become uncontrollable. How-
ever, if the UAV maneuvers beyond the
Autopilot Limits, immediately select
DISENG.

13-11 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL


Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

PART VI

Control/Flight Modes

Chapter 14 - Control/Flight Modes

39 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL


Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

CHAPTER 14

Control/Flight Modes

14.1 PILOT CONTROL MODES BAY AUTO TEST - COMPLETED in the steady
message field and the diagnostics for the bays tested.
The pilot control modes allow the internal pilot to
perform various computerized tests and set up proce- To view the list ofthe malfunctioning cards, enter the
dures using a menu tree system. It is made up of ten ba- FAILED bays item number into the item number field.
sic sub-functions: test mode, preset mode, calibration
mode, failure display mode, multifunction mode, target 14.1.1.2 Panel Interactive Test. (Item #2 in the
altitude mode, camera guide mode, Nav programmer Test Mode menu). It provides a selecting menu for eight
updating mode, return home and navigation to coordi- interactive functional tests for the PBY front panel.
nate mode. Each of these control modes are controlled Each functional test enables the user to check the fol-
from the internal pilot bay PCT. lowing segments:

14.1.1 Test Mode. Used to preflight test the GCS 1. Lamps and numerical displays (segment #l).
and UAV Pressing the Test Mode Push-button gener- Turns ON/OFF all lamps, including lighted
ates the Test Mode menu tree, which consists of BAY pushbuttons, and sets all numerical displays to 8.
AUTOMATIC TEST (Item #l), PANEL INTERAC-
TIVE TEST (Item #2), RPV AUTOMATIC TEST (Item 2. Lighted pushbuttons (segment #2). Turns ON
#3), DOWNLINK PLAYBACK MODE (Item #4), CA- lamps in all lighted pushbuttons. The pushbuttons
BLE/COMMUNICATION (Item #5), and TEST SUM- are pressed, one after another, to extinguish the
MARY (Item #O). lamps. When all the lamps are extinguished, the
test is complete.
VEST MODE] pushbutton
3. Meters (segment #3). Checks the indication of the
TEST analog meters on the panel in two positions and al-
1. BAY AUTOMATIC TEST
lows calibration of the meters.
2. PANEL INTERACTIVE TEST
3. RPV AUTOMATIC TEST
4. DOWNLINK PLAYBACK MODE 4. Knobs, sticks, and thumbwheels (Segment /+I).
5. CABLElCOMMUNlCATlONS Checks the response of the panel knobs, sticks,
0. TEST SUMMARY and thumbwheels and allows their calibration.

5. Switches and unlighted pushbuttons (segment


#5). Checks the responseofthe panel switches and
unlighted pushbuttons.
14.1.1.1 Bay Automatic Test. (Item#l intheTest
Mode menu). This automatic test, performed by the The Panel Interactive Test checks the following front
controller card in each bay (PBY, TBY, and CBY) panels:
checks the functional performance of the bays subsys-
tems and the peripheral communications devices. All Note
tests are controlled and monitored by the SMP subsys-
tem and test results are displayed on the PTMP. Not all five-segment tests are applicable to
each panel. When a segment test is not appli-
During test running, the system displays the message cable, the segment line is not shown.
RUNNING BAY AUTO TEST in the steady message
field. When the test is completed, the system displays

14-l ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

1. Tracker Control Desk (Item #l). Tests the TCD a. Autopilot Test checks the control loops, the
controls and indicators (applicable segments: #I, rate mode with/without autopilot and the ser-
#2, #3, and #4). vos and sensors.

2. Pilot Monitor Panel (Item #2). Test the PTMP dis- b. Programmed Sources checks the Return Home
play quality by showing a test screen. circuit and programmed navigation circuit.

3. Pilot Display Panel (Item #3). Tests the PDP con- c. Logic Module test checks flight switching
trols and indicators (applicable segments: #I, #3, modes and RF communication control.
and #5).
d. Payload Test checks operational control and
4. Pilot Control Desk (Item #4). Tests the PCD con- logic and command.
trols and indicators (applicable segments: # 1, #2,
#3, #I4, and #5). The TEST/RPV mode also allows the user to custom-
ize a preflight check and LOAD and run that custom
5. Pilot Control Table (Item #5). Tests the PCT con- check.
trols and indicators (applicable segments: #2, #4.
and #5). 14.1 .1.4 Downlink Playback Mode. (Item #4 in
the Test Mode menu). With the selection of this item, the
6. Pilot Box (Item #6). Tests the PBX controls and decoder in the EDC is locked onto the recorder
indicators (applicable segments: #l, #+I,and #5). downlink data by connecting the decoder inputs to the
cassetterecorder outputs. When the DCR is turned on to
7. Copilot Box (Item #7). Tests the CBX controls replay a recorded cassette, the flight data is replayed on
and indicators (applicable segments: #l, #4, and the station indicators, allowing the operator to review
#5). events in the flight.

8. Student Box (Item #8). Tests the SBX controls and 14.1.1.5 Cable Communication. (Item #5 in the
indicators (applicable segments: #l, #4, and #5). Test Mode menu). This function sets the communica-
tion link between the station and the UAV either via the
14.1.1.3 RPVAutomaticTest. (Item #3 in the TEST Cable or the UPL/DNL communication system.
Test Mode menu). It generates the LOAD Default Pro- When not set, the default option of this function is the
gram which loads and runs a predetined UAV preflight UPL/DNL System.
test from the system memory. The program is an interac-
tive test that checks the UAV operation. The UAV de- 14.1 .1.6 Test Summary. (Item #O in the Test Mode
fault preflight test program is based on the principle of menu). It returns the system to the last automatic
transmitting uplink frames, including commands and (bay/UAV) test result display. The system is then ready
data, while checking and evaluating data that is received to accept malfunction display requests.
and reported in the downlink channels. This preflight
test includes a voltage test of the airborne BITE subsys- 14.1.2 Preset Mode. Pressing the PRESET Push-
tem. The tests are divided into three main phases,which button allows checking and presetting all parameters re-
are carried out simultaneously: quired by the UAV system during the mission. Some of
the parameters can be viewed, changed, and/or updated
1. Electric System Test-which checks EPS and en- directly during the flight using other functional
gine cut signals. pushbuttons.

2. Communication Test - which checks address The Preset Mode Menu Tree identifies the software
and frame-sync words, and data transfer validity. version (top right comer ofthe display) and provides the
PRESET selection, which consists of ALTIMETER
3. Central Processing runs tests in the following CAL & WARNING SET, RETURN HOME DATA,
areas: NAVIGATION PROGRAMMER, RANGE CALI-
BRATION, and METEOROLOGICAL DATA.

ORIGINAL 14-2
Al-SRRPV-NFM-000

5. Low Airspeed Lim & Warn (Item #5). Sets the


level for activating the low airspeed warning lamp
PRESET MRXX
and limits the minimum airspeed command that
1
2.
UTlmTER cu a WARNING
RETURN HOME DATA
SET can be set by the control knob, in knots (kt).
3 NAWGATICU FuoGFsMuER Range: 40 to 70 kt.
4. RANGE CUIBRATY)N
s METEOROLOGlCAL DATA
0
7
CulERA
GEOGPAWK:
G,DANCE
DATA
6. Low Altitude Warning (Item #6). Sets the level for
0
0
TRACKER CUl0RATlON
RETRlEU NET DATA
activating the low altitude warning lamp in feet
10 RP DATA above sea level. Range: - 1,500 to 2 1,500 ft.
11. PolNl NAlGATlcm DATA
12. GPS DATA
13 MlsslON CaAPTER
7. Low Fuel Warning (Item #7). Sets the level for ac-
tivating the low fuel warning lamp, in liters (1).
Range: 0 to 20.0 liters.
14.1.2.1 Altimeter Cal 8 Warning Set. ( I t e m
#l). Allows the user to calibrate the altitude indicator 14.1.2.2 Return Home Data. (Item #2). Allows the
(analog and digital) in the PDP and set the warning user to set up the RH parameters. This function can be
flight/system limits for the mission. This function can entered directly by selecting the Data Change function
be entered directly by selecting the Calibration mode in the Return Home Updating Mode.
(pressing the CALBR push-button).

I CRUISE UTINDE BKFr


2 CRUISE AIRSPEED 6aKT
1. ALTITUDE ABOVE SL 2140 FT
3 FlW b+DLDlNG ALTlTDE -1 KFT
2 ALTITUDE ABOVE FL *Fr
4. FIRST CLIWING SPRAL +YES
3. PRESSURE AT St (c+4) wz7 MB
4. PRESSURE AT FL WE) MOM0
cocaD,N4lEs

5 LOW AIRSPEED LIY L WAAN 55 K-7


5 HOME E5BSCMl N379KC.3
6 LOW ALTWUDE WARNING ZUOFT
.3 NI\m?oGRAh4 END ES74000 NJ,-
7 LOW FUEL W&WING IOOLT

1. Cruise Altitude (Item #l). Sets up the RH cruise


1. Altitude Above SL (Item #l). Enters/shows the altitude in KFT. Option: 3,6, 9, 12 KFT.
UAV altitude above sea level, in feet. Range:
-1,500 to 21,000 f-t. 2. Cruise Airspeed (Item #2). Sets up the RH cruise
airspeed, in knots. Option: 50, 60, 70, and 80 kt.
2. Altitude Above FL (Item #2). Enters/shows the
UAV altitude above field level, in feet. Range:
-9,999 to 23,000 ft. 1WARNING 1
3. Pressureat SL (QNH) (Item #3). Enters/shows the
barometric pressure at sealevel, in millibars (mb). RH cruise airspeed of 50 kts. shall not be
Range 940 to 1,080 mb. entered due to aircraft stall margin.

4. Pressure at FL (QFE) (Item #4). Enters/shows the 3. Final Holding Altitude (Item #3). Sets up the RH
barometric pressure at field level, in millibars final holding altitude, in feet. Option: -1, 1, 3. 5
(mb). Range: 500 to 1,080 mb. KFT.

Note 4. First Climbing Spiral (Item #4). Enables/disables


(+YES/-NO) climbing spiral. If YES is selected,
Entering the altitudes (Items #l and #2) the UAV will attempt to do a spiral climb to cruise al-
system calculates the barometric pressures titude.
and displays them in Items #3 and #+I and
vice versa. 5. Coordinates Home (Item #5). Sets up the return
coordinates for the UAV.

143 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

6. CoordinatesMavProgram End (Item #6). the programmer mode is active). When the
NVC is operating in the programmer mode, the
Note step # is the step (waypoint) to which the UAV
is directed.
This selection not functional.
Note
14.1.2.3 Navigation Programmer. (Item #3). The
MISSION COMPUTER Navigation Programmer func- The location and grid zone displayed for the
tion is only accessible when the Mission Computer se- step are obtained from the ground program
lection on the PRESETRPV DATA menu (Preset Item (in the GCS/PC S) not from the NVC (in the
#lo) is set to + yes. With this condition set, the MIS- UAV). Thus, if the ground program has been
SION COMPUTER Navigation Programmer function changed and not loaded to the UAV, then the
is started by either selecting Item #3 from the PRESET location and grid zone displayed may not
menu tree or by pressing the NPL push-button on the correspond to the UAV flight program.
PCT. Activating the MISSION COMPUTER Naviga-
tion Programmer selection accesses the MISSION b. PRSNT POS. Indicates the present position of
COMPUTER Navigation Programmer menu branch, the UAV. These data are sent from the NVC in
which provides operational control of the NVC capabil- the UAV to the ground station.
ities for GPS navigation. The MISSION COMPUTER
Navigation Programmer menu branch (Figure 3-12) c. Range. Indicates the calculated distance from
consists of: the UAV to the waypoint.

d. ETA. Indicates the estimated time required to


arrive at the waypoint (not including any hold-
ITEM 23
ing time at the waypoint).
PRESETN&VGATlW PROGRAMMER ,MISSKW()
1 CURREKl REPORT
2 GENERA. e. Operation Mode. Indicates the current mode of
3 GROVND PROGPJMYER
4 DUERY operation for navigation.
5. RP PROGRAMKR
8 hi4sK
7. COMMAND (1) GPS mode. Navigation uses GPS satellite
0 LOAD PRffiWER
fixes.
0. CLEAR RP PROGRAUMER

I
10 RESET PRffiRbJdYER
(2) GCS mode. Navigation uses the GCS
tracking information.

(3) DR mode. Navigation uses dead reckon-


ing calculations. This mode is active
1. Current Report (Item #l). Displays current when GPS or GCS mode is selected, but
NVC/RPV/GPS status information, which is up- conditions (such as satellite coverage,
dated approximately every second. PDOP, etc.) are not suitable to allow GPS
or GCS solutions. DR mode uses the last
usable solution to calculate flight to the
waypoint. When conditions improve to
PRESETMSSIDWCURREKT R-T allow GPS or GCS solutions, DR mode
STEPS 1
El23458 N1224587 automatically changes to the selected
GRID ZONE
PRSN-T POS
12
EWSC.8 N12Y5.3
mode.
GRK) ZONE I?
RANGE OOOOKM
ETA m.C, W7h.N f. GPS Status. Provides text message of the sta-
OPERATION MODE
GPS STANS
DR
GPS IS NOT MST&LED
tus of the GPS sensor and its ability to provide
WC STATUS mMyao0 location fixes.
NVC FAUBES axQmm0
W&WINGS MOWCW
g. NVC Status. Indicates status of the navigation
programmer card in an 8-bit format.

a. Step #. Indicates the current (active) program h. NVC Failures. Indicates failure detections of
step of the NVC (regardless of whether or not the navigation programmer in an 8-bit format.

ORIGINAL 14-4
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

i. Warnings. Indicates warning flags status ofthe


navigation programmer card in an 8-bit format.

2. General (Item #2)

PRESETsWlSSlOHIGENER

2 CRlTICALFVEL (2 LT

2. OPERATIONS LI)DE COMWD ACNN


0.GPS 2 2
I-DR
2.GCS

3 hvcEwPAs-5 -NO

Note

This menu accesses the ground program


memory in the GCS/PCS only. It does not
access the flight program in the UAV air ve-
a. Critical fuel. Allows the fuel level to be speci- hicle. The ground program is loaded to the
tied below which the low fuel flag on the MIS- air vehicle (option 0) for execution.
SION/CURRENT REPORT menu is set.
a. Advance step (Item #l). Used to display/incre-
b. Operations mode. Defines the operation mode ment the program step.
for the NVC.
b. Step # (Item #2). Used to display/select a spec-
(1) GPS mode. The NVC uses the GPS satel- ified step.
lite fixes for navigation.
c. Active (Item #3). Allows steps to be specified
(2) DR mode. The NVC uses dead reckoning as enable (+ active) or disable (- inactive). ln-
calculations from UAVs altitude, speed, active steps are not executed by the UAV.
and heading inputs.
Note
(3) GCS mode. The NVC uses the position
data provided in the uplink. When the ground program is loaded to be-
come the flight program, at least one step
c. NVC Bypass. Allows the NVC to be taken must be active to maintain communications
out of the loop. When set to + yes, the NVC is between the NVC and the GCS/PCS (the
reset and routes certain control signals directly clear/reset commands leave step 1 active
through the card without processing them. with zero data). If a manual change of the
program forces all steps inactive and com-
munications are lost, making a step in the
ground program active and loading it to the
UAV should remedy the condition.

d. Coordinates (Item #I). Allows the waypoint to


A power fluctuation on the UAV with NVC be specified in UTM coordinates.
Bypass -NO may cause an unrecoverable
NVC hang. NVC Bypass +YES should be e. Grid zone (Item #5). Allows the waypoint grid
selected for all UAV operations except Dual zone to be defined.
UAV control from one controlling station.
f. Holding time (Item #6). Specifies how long the
3. Ground Programmer (Item #3). Used to define and UAV should circle the waypoint (indefinite
load navigation programs (ground programs) us- holding time: 8 hr: 3 1 min: 0 set).
ing the GPS navigation capability of the NVC.

14-5 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

Note n. Program (Item #14). Controls the execution of


the program. Selection of + continue branches
If the holding time is zero, the UAV will fly the program to the next active step for execu-
to within 1,000 meters of the waypoint and tion. Selection of - end stops the program and
either proceed to the next active program exits from the program mode.
step or exit the NavProgrammer mode (Item
#4, Program defines). If the holding time Note
is non-zero, the UAV will fly to within 2,000
meters of the waypoint before leaving its The load step cannot be selected if none of
track to establish a 1200 meter circling ra- the items have been modified or reentered.
dius about the waypoint for the designated Items that have not been downloaded are
holding time. Upon completion of the hold- marked by an asterisk on the left of the
ing time, the UAV will either proceed to the display.
next active program step or exit the
NavProgrammer mode (Item #14, Pro- o. Load step (item #O). Performs a download of
gram defines). the displayed step to the UAV. A load in prog-
ress message is displayed until a successful
g. Altitude (Item #7). Specifies UAV flight alti- load is completed. An error message is dis-
tude per programmed step (Options: 1 to 20 played if a load failure is detected.
KFT in 100 ft. increments).
4. Query (Item #4). Allows monitoring of NVC
h. Airspeed (Item #8). Specifies UAV airspeed sensed conditions. The options for the submenu
per programmed step (Options: 50 to 80 kts in branches are:
1 knot increments).

i. Command (Item #9). This option, which nor-


mally is used to permit command inhibit, is
currently not allowed by the software. This op- PRESETrMSSIOWDERY

tion should be set to + receive. 1 MIGATY)N


2 GENERAL
3 GPS
j. Transmitter (Item #lo). Commands the UAV
transmitter during the step. The options are +
on and - off.

k. Beacon (Item #ll). Commands the beacon


mode if the transmitter is off. If the transmitter a. Navigation (Item #l). The Mission/Query/
(Item #lo) is commanded - off during a step, Navigation menu provides various navigation
+ on in this item commands the UAV transmit- related data reports:
ter to beacon mode (8 seconds on, 8 seconds
off). If Item #lO is + on, this Item has no effect.
If a failure occurs on the UAV with Items # 10
and #l 1 - off, the UAV transmitter will come
on in beacon mode. The options are + on and - I DISRAYWDE + CONTINUOUS
Off.
TIME 0O:OO 00 HR MN SEC

1. Film camera (Item #12). Selects the GR- SPEED OXKT


GROVH) TRACX 000 EG
lFF/Strobe Light mode of operation during the GPS ALTITUDE ASL mccoFl

step. The options are + on and - off. WlNO CC-3 OEGmMlN


TEMPERATURE Ooo DEGC

m. Video camera (Item #13). Selects the video


camera operation mode during the step. The
options are + on and - off.

ORIGINAL 14-6
Al -SRRPV-NFM~OO

(1) Display mode. Controls the refresh/up-


date rate of the Mission/Query/Naviga-
tion menu data. Selection of (f
continuous) causes the data to update ev-
ery few seconds. Selection of (- once)
causes the data to update once (upon ini-
tial menu entry).

Note

Changing the display mode does not have an


immediate effect. The command is not exe-
cuted until the menu is exited. Thus, the se- (1) Display mode. Controls the refresh/up-
lected display mode will not be observed date rate of the Mission/Query/Naviga-
until the menu is re-entered. tion menu data. Selection of (+
continuous) causes the display to update
(2) Time (GMT). The time reported via GPS every few seconds. Selection of (- once)
in terms of GMT. causes the data to update once (upon ini-
tial menu entry).
(3) Ground speed. The calculated current
ground speed of the air vehicle as derived Note
by the NVC from GPS or GCS inputs.
Changing the display mode does not have an
(4) Ground track. The calculated current immediate effect. The command is not exe-
heading of the air vehicle as derived by cuted until the menu is exited. Thus, the se-
the NVC from GPS or GCS inputs. lected display mode will not be observed
until the menu is re-entered.
(5) GPS altitude ASL. The height above the
WGS-72 datum as determined by the GPS (2) Time (GMT). The current time (in GMT)
sensor. as received by GPS satellites.

(6) Wind. The direction from which the wind (3) Date. The current date as received by GPS
is blowing, and the speed of the wind as satellites.
calculated by the NVC from GPS or GCS
inputs and the airspeed sensor inputs. (4) Hemisphere. The hemisphere of opera-
tion as defined by GPS.
(7) Temperature. The air temperature is the
same as the data sent to the NVC from the (5) Grid Zone. The current grid zone number,
GCS. either that defined for the current step or,
if none, the area defined on MIS-
b. Genera1(Item #2). Provides information rele- SION/GENERAL menu.
vant to the entry of Preset/Navigation Com-
puter general data as stored by the NVC: (6) Magn declin. The magnetic declination
sent by the GCS to the NVC.

(7) Pressure at SL. The sea level air pressure


sent by the GCS to the NVC.

14-7 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

c. GPS (Item #3). The MissionJQuery/GPS menu (d) Positional Dilution of Precision
allows the selection and display of GPS satel- (PDOP). Identifies the precision
lite data through a branch to a submenu. factor of the positional calculations.

(e) Horizontal Dilution of Precision


1 (HDOP). Identifies the horizontal
component of the PDOP.
1 S SEECTlON
2 SVSNR (fl Vertical Dilution of Precision
(VDOP). Identifies the vertical
component of the PDOP.

(2) Space Vehicle Signal-to-Noise Ratio


(SNR). Calls up a submenu, which dis-
plays the satellites available for GPS solu-
tions and their SNRs.

. , Space Vehicle (SV) Selection. Calls up a


(1)
I
submenu which displays the satellites
currently in use for positional solutions:
I PRESETMISSIOW,ERY,GPS,S SNR

(a) Display mode. Controls the


refresh/update rate of the Mission/
Query/Navigation menu data.
Selection of (f continuous) causesthe
data to update every few seconds.
Selection of (- once) causesthe data to
update once (upon initial menu entry).

(a) SV #. Lists the satellites currently


PRLSETMISSlOHIWERIGPSlSV SELECT received by the GPS sensor and
identifies them by their space vehicle
number.

(b) SNR. Lists the signal-to-noise ratio


for the signals received from each
satellite.

5. RPV Programmer (Item #5). Similar to the Mis-


sion/Ground Prog menu in that it is used to control
the navigation program used during GPS naviga-
Note tion. The difference is that the MissionRPV Prog
menu displays data directly from the UAV flight
Changing the display mode does not have an program as opposed to the ground program resi-
immediate effect. The command is not exe- dent in the GCS or PCS. Changes made on this
cuted until the menu is exited. Thus, the se- menu do not affect the ground program until they
lected display mode will not be observed are loaded (Item #O)to the UAV, at which time the
until the menu is re-entered. change is also copied into the ground program. If
changes are made, but not loaded, they are lost
(b) Mode. Identifies the current operating when the menu is exited.
mode of the GPS sensor.

(c) SV in use. Lists the identification


numbers for the satellites currently
being used by the GPS sensor.

ORIGINAL 14-8
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

track to establish a 1200 meter circling ra-


dius about the waypoint for the designated
holding time. Upon completion of the hold-
ing time, the UAV will either proceed to the
next active program step or exit the
NavProgrammer mode (Item #14, Pro-
gram defines).

g. Altitude (Item #7). Specifies UAV flight alti-


tude per programmed step (Options: 100 FT to
20 KFT in 100 ft increments).

h. Airspeed (Item #8). Specifies UAV airspeed


per programmed step (Options: 50 to 80 kts in
a. Advance step (Item #1 ). Used to display/incre- 1 knot increments).
ment the program step.
i. Command (Item #9). This option, which nor-
b. Step # (Item #2). Used to display/select a spec- mally is used to permit command inhibit, is
ified step. currently not allowed by the software. This op-
tion should be set to + receive.
c. Active (Item #3). Allows steps to be specified
as enabled (+ active) or disable (- inactive). In- j. Transmitter (Item # 10). Commands the UAV
active steps are not executed by the UAV. transmitter during the step. The options are +
on and - off.
Note
k. Beacon (Item #ll). Commands the beacon
When the ground program is loaded to be- mode if the transmitter is off.
come the flight program, at least one step
must be active to maintain communications 1. IFF/Strobe (Item #12). Selects the IFF/Strobe
between the NVC and the GCS/PCS (the operation mode during the step. The options
clear/reset commands leave step 1 active are + on and - off.
with zero data). If a manual change of the
program forces all steps inactive and com- m. Video camera (Item #13). Selects the video
munications are lost, making a step in the camera operation mode during the step. The
ground program active and loading it to the options are + on and - off.
UAV should remedy the condition.
n. Program (Item #14). Controls the execution of
d. Coordinates (Item #4). Allows the waypoint to the program. Selection of + continue branches
be specified in UTM coordinates. the program to the next active step for execu-
tion. Selection of - end stops the program and
e. Grid zone (Item #5). Allows the waypoint grid exits from the program mode.
zone to be defined.
Note
f. Holding time (Item #6). Specifies how long the
UAV should circle the waypoint (indefinite The load step cannot be selected if none of
holding time: 8 hr.: 31 min.: 0 sec.). the items have been modified or re-entered.
Items that have not been downloaded are
Note marked by an asterisk on the left of the
display.
If the holding time is zero, the UAV will fly
to within 1,000 meters of the waypoint and o. Load step (Item #O). Performs a download of
either proceed to the next active program the displayed step to the UAV. A load in prog-
step or exit the NavProgrammer mode (Item ress message is displayed until a successful
#14, Program defines). If the holding time load is completed. An error message is dis-
is non-zero, the UAV will fly to within 2,000 played if a load failure is detected.
meters of the waypoint before leaving its

14-9 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

6. Mask (Item #6). GPS sensor control parameters. than the PDOP mask above (Item #3). Default
value is 12.

e. Dynamics Code (Item #5). Not currently used.


PRESETMSSIO-K Intended for future expansion.
1 ELEvATlON 0 DEG
2 SNR 0 f. Set default (Item #6). Allows the default val-
3 PDW u1
4 PDwswmCn m
ues for each menu item to be selected.
5 DYHUrllCSCODE C-3

8 SETDEFAULT Note

The load mask cannot be selected if none of


the items have been modified or reentered.
Items that have not been downloaded are
marked by an asterisk on the left of the
a. Elevation (Item #I). Allows the minimum an- display.
gle (in degrees above horizon) for satellites
used in GPS solution to be set. Satellites below g. Load mask (Item #O). Performs the download
this angle will not be used by the air vehicle of the mask entries to the UAV GPS sensor. A
GPS system. Default value is 5 degrees. load in progress message is displayed until a
successful load is completed. An error mes-
b. SNR (Item #2). Allows the minimum sig- sage is displayed if a load failure is detected.
nal-to-noise ratio (SNR) for satellites used in
GPS solution to be set. SNRs below this level 7. Command (Item #7). Allows entry of navigation
will not be used by the air vehicle GPS system. control commands to the NW.
SNR levels below 5 are not generally visible to
the GPS system. SNRs from 5 to 7 are gener-
ally sporadic in nature. SNRs of 8 or better
should provide reliable results. Default value
is 0. 1 GOTONW POINT El23456 N12Y5e7

ALTlNRSPEED mom DKT


c. PDOP (Item #3). Allows the positional dilu- GRID ZONE 12
tion ofprecision (PDOP) for the GPS system to 2 JUMP TO STEP 1 IS

be set. This factor is a measurement of accu- 3. DIMNSIONS MODE + *To


DIkEENSIONS SET 2
racy for the geometric GPS calculations.
4 RESET OSClLlArOR ,OFFSET w Z)
Values less than 8 are considered good (1 - 5 RESET SYSTW 1 TEST

best) for GPS solution. The mask value speci- 0 CLEAR DATA & RESET SYSTEM

fies the maximum PDOP allowed. If the best


PDOP available by the GPS system is higher
than the value specified, then the GPS system a. GOT0 Nav point (Item #I). Allows the opera-
stops generating positional fixes and the NVC tor to command the UAV to go to a specific
switches to dead reckoning (DR) mode until waypoint and hold there (in a 1200 meter ra-
the PDOP improves. Default value is 40. dius orbit) until commanded to another active
program step, (via line 2, Jump to Step #) or
d. PDOP switch (Item #4). Allows the PDOP until taken out of the NavProgram mode. The
value for switching between 3- dimensional waypoint coordinates, UAV airspeed and alti-
(3D) and 2-dimensional(2D) GPS solutions to tude, and the grid zone are all entered in se-
be defined. When the GPS system is operated quence.
in auto mode, it automatically switches be-
tween 3D and 2D modes depending on the Note
number of satellites it can receive. The PDOP
switch mask specifies how good the PDOP When Item #I is entered, the data is down-
must be for using 3D solutions over 2D solu- loaded as program step 0 (only accessible
tions. If the solution for a 3D fix is higher than through this option) with indefinite hold
this value (less accurate), then the GPS system time (8 hr., 3 1 min., 0 sec.). The command is
uses 2D solutions. This value should be less

ORIGINAL 14-10
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

then executed upon placing the UAV into the f. Clear data & Reset system (Item #O). Allows
NavProgram mode. the operator to force a reset to the GPS sensor
as well as clear the battery backup memory.
b. Jump to Step # (Item #2). Allows the operator This is not normally required unless the sensor
to specify a particular program step to be exe- is suspected to be malfunctioning.
cuted in the flight program. If the UAV is not
currently in program mode, then the specified 8. Load Program (Item #8). Used to load groups of
step becomes the first waypoint when the UAV navigation program steps to the NVC
is placed in program mode.

Note 1

Ifthe step specified in the Jump to Step # op-


tion is not an active step, then the first active
step number greater than the specified is
selected.

c. Dimensions Mode/SET (Item #3). Allows the


operator to define how the GPS sensoruses the
GPS satellites for positional fixes.

(1) Dimensions Mode. Automatic mode (f


auto) cause the GPS sensor to calculate a. Load prog. Performs the download of a group
3D solutions using four satellites when of ground program steps (from step # to step #)
possible. If four usable satellites are not to the RPV flight program. A load in progress
available, the system reverts to 2D fixes message is displayed until a successful load is
until 3D solutions become possible. completed. An error message is displayed if a
When 3D solutions are possible, the sys- load failure is detected.
tem automatically switches to 3D mode.
Manual mode (- manual) causes the GPS Note
sensor to obtain fixes only in the specified
mode (2D or 3D). If the single step load option (Option #0 on
the Ground Program and/or RPV Program
(2) Dimensions SET. Allows the operator to menus) is used, then the group loading
specify 2 or 3 (2D or 3D) for - manual di- method is not required.
mension mode.
b. Load all steps. Downloads all possible ground
d. Reset oscillator (Item #4). Allows the operator program steps (I to 96) to the UAV flight pro-
to manually force a reset to the GPS sensor os- gram. A load in progress message is displayed
cillator. This is not normally required unless until a successful load is completed. An error
the sensor is suspected to be malfunctioning. message is displayed if a load failure is de-
tected.
e. Reset system & TEST (Item #5). Allows the
operator to manually force a reset to the NVC Note
and start an NVC and GPS sensor selftest. This
also results in a display ofthe test results. Reset This process is time consuming and could
system and test is only possible when NVC take 20 minutes or more to complete.
Bypass -NO is selected.

14-11 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

14.1.2.4 Range Calibration. (Item #/4). Allows the


user to obtain accurate data from the communica-
tionsystem by trimming away lags generatedby the sys-
tem units.

RANGE

1 PRlM#lYLM( 0047KM
2 SECONDARY LINK OMIKM

WIsP.AltoN OFFSET

1 PRIMARYLINK 35.010 KM
1. Mode Selection (Item #l). Allows the user to se-
2 SECONDARY LHlK 32 570 KM lect one of the following updating modes:

a. Alti/pres. table data (+YES/-NO) if yes is se-


lected computer uses tables for informa-
I. Range/Primary & Secondary Link (Items #l&2). tion/data update. If no is selected computer
Enters the actual range, in kilometers (km), be- uses standard day values.
tween the station and the UAV, for the primary
communication link and secondary link. The two Note
parameters entered in Items # 1 and #2 enable the
station system to calculate the calibration offset The barometric pressure is required in the
required by each communication link (pri- target coordinates and artillery adjustment
mary/secondary) for a specific stationA-JAV con- calculations. Using the pressure table is
figuration. These offset factors are valid as long as more accurate, but it requires constant fol-
no changes/replacements have been made in the low-up and updating of data entered in the
system units and are updated automatically in table, as well as constant updating from me-
Items #3 and #4 during the calibration process. teorological sources.

Note Automatic Wind Updates. Activates


(+YES) or deactivates (-NO) the wind calcu-
Range calibration using Items # 1 and #2 can lation program. For wind updates to be accu-
be performed only when the UAV is on the rate UAV must be flown straight and level
ground, near the station. When conducting for two minutes.
range calibration do not switch control link
until calibration is completed. b. Data Entry/Pressure Table (Item #2). Allows
updating of the barometric pressure table, in
2. Calibration Offsets (Items #3 and #4). When the millibars (mb). Entering empty table automati-
range to the UAV is not known or not fixed (as for cally sets Alti/pres table data to no.
an airborne UAV), but the calibration offsets
(Item #3 & #4) for the UAV and the station are c. Data Entry Wind table (Item #3). Allows up-
known and valid (no changes/replacements have dating of the wind direction and speedtable, in
beenmade in the station or UAV), the range can be degrees and knots.
calibrated by entering the calibration offsets in
Items #3 and #4. Items #l and #2 (and the digital d. Data Entry/Temperature Table (Item ##4).Al-
range display in the PDP) are updated automati- lows updating of the temperature table, in de-
cally. grees Celsius.

14.1.2.5 Meteorological Data. (Item #5). Allows Note


the user to preset the meteorological data supplied to the
system. The Meteorological Data menu branch consists Each table consists of I5 entries (Items #2 to
of mode selection, pressure table, wind table and tem- #16) providing the table data at a specific al-
perature table. titude (2,000 to 16,000 ft). Item #Oin each ta-
ble erases all entries in the table. The user

ORIGINAL 14-12
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

can enter or change part of the 15 entries.


The remaining entries are either estimated
by the system using available data or calcu-
lated from real-time data collected by the
UAV when flying at the specified altitude. 2
3
CoDRDINAlES
MllnJDE
E574299
716 M
NW92030

An In is found beside the values if the data 4 AUTO WSlTlON PDATE Ho


5 GRID ZONE INPUT No
was user input. An Est is found when the 6 GRIDZONE 12

system calculates the data. 7 MAGNDECLIN 14 DEG 23 MN

NOTE l UAGN EAST TO W GRID


MAGN MST TOW GRID
14.1.2.6 Camera Guidance. (Item #6). Allows the
user to set the parameters for the Camera Guided Flight
Mode. Changed parameters take effect upon menu exit.

1. Target Altitude (Item #l). Sets the target altitude


ITEM *
above sea level in meters. The data is required for
target coordinates and artillery adjustment calcu-
lations. This function can be entered directly by
pressing the TARGET ALT push-button.

2. Station Data/Coordinates (Item #2). Sets the TCU


station coordinates relative to map working coor-
NOTE CHANGED PAQAUElER.5 TAKE EFFECT PON MENU EXIT
dinates, in E/N UTM coordinates. Valid only
when auto position update (Item #4) is disabled.
0 DEFAULT PARALlETERS

3. Station Data/Altitude (Item #3). Sets the station


altitude above sealevel in meters. The station data
1. Circling Radius (Item #l). Sets the radius, in km, is required for RH data, target coordinates, UAV
of the flight circle that the UAV has to follow coordinates, GPS input data, and other calcula-
while the camera is locked on the target. The cir- tions.
cling radius can be set from 1.Oto 9.9 km.
4. Auto Position Update (Item #4). Used to en-
2. Circ-Target Distance (Item #2). Sets the distance, able/disable automatic updating of the station co-
in km, between the target and the center of the ordinates from data received from the Global
UAV flight circle. The circ-target distance can be Positioning System (GPS) in the TCU. A + yes in-
set from 0.0 to 15 km. dicates that the station coordinates are obtained
from the GPS and the values in Item #2 are not
3. Circ-Target Azimuth (Item #3). Sets the azimuth, valid. A - no indicates that normal operation and
in deg., of the UAV-target line. The azimuth can station coordinates are defined in Item #2. Upon
be set from 0 to 359. loss of GPS, Item ##4is automatically changed to
- no and the messageManual Position Update is
4. Default Parameters (Item #O). Loads predefined displayed. Item #2 provides the station coordi-
parameters of 1 km, 0 km and 0. nates to the GCS.

14.1.2.7 Geographical Data. (Item #7). Allows


the user to preset geographical data and parameters in
the system.

14-13 ORIGINAL
Al-SRRPV-NFM-000

Note
I ITEMUS 1
If GPS coverage becomes sporadic, Item #2 PRESETrrRACKER

station coordinate should be updated imme- 1 AzlMLnn 355.15 DEG


diately. If there is no GPS receiver con- 2
3
CORECTlON OFFSET
MASKEDZONEA
51 OB DEG
F 351 GEG T 359 DEG
nected to the GCS, auto position update will 4 MASKEDZONE S F ODEGT BDEG

be - no and cannot be changed. 5


6
AT0 SHIP HDG UPDATE
OWN SHIP TRUE HDG
-NO
250C0DEG

5. Grid Zone Input (Item #5). Enables (+ yes) or dis-


ables (- no) the alternate grid zone entered in Item
#6 below. When the grid zone input is - no, the
GCS obtains coordinate data from either the
PRESET/GEOGRAPHIC coordinates or the Nav-
igational Data System, for selecting the source of 1. Azimuth (Item #l). Allows the user to enter the
the coordinate data. When the grid zone input is known direction between the station and the bea-
+ yes and the GCS is receiving coordinate infor- con unit, during the azimuth calibration proce-
mation from the Navigational Data System, the dure.
grid zone provided in Item #6 below is used by the
GCS instead of the calculated grid zone from the 2. Correction Offset (Item #2). Displays the offset
Navigational Data System. This data enables the between the measured direction to the beacon unit
system to work across grid zones during a mission. and the direction read by the tracking unit. Ground
based units will input the value determined by the
Note calibration procedure. This will calibrate the di-
rection read by the tracking unit true or relative de-
The grid zone can only be altered by 1 in ei- pending on selection of Item #5. Ship based units
ther direction. will input zero.

6. Grid Zone (Item #6). This item is provided so that 3. Masked Zone A (Item #3). Defines a blind area of
the operator can alter the station grid zone by I in the directional antenna caused by an obstruction
either direction from the grid zone calculated by such as the superstructure. When the antenna is
the Navigational Data System. The grid zone is pointing to the blind zone, a warning (approaching
enabled/disabled by the grid zone input (Item#5). Antenna Blind Zone) is displayed on the TV mon-
itor. The zone is defined by entering the degreesat
7. Magnetic Declination (Item #7). Sets the mag- which the blind zone starts (F-from) and ends
netic declination parameter, in degrees and min- (T-to). The From value entered must be less than
utes (deg/min), relative to the map grid. The the To value entered. Values must be less than 360
parameter compensates for the deviation between degrees.
magnetic north (read by the magnetic compass)
and the grid north (on map), and is used for target 4. Masked Zone B (Item #4). Defines a second blind
location, artillery adjustment, navigation, and RH area of the directional antenna.
data calculations. A positive angle means that the
magnetic north is east (right) of the map grid north 5. Auto Ship Heading Update (Item #5). Enables
(and vice versa). (+ yes) or disables (- no) the automatic ship head-
ing update mode. Should be set to Yes for ship-
14.1.2.8 Tracker Calibration. (Item #8). Allows board operations only. If Yes (f), antennaazimuth
the user to calibrate the tracking unit readings relative to is corrected to read true bearing, using ship head-
the map grid used. ing as provided by the navigation interface system
(IBX/Magnavox GPS). IfNo (-), antenna azimuth
is corrected to true bearing based on the ships
heading as manually entered in Item #6. Should al-
ways be set to No (-) for ground based operations.

ORIGINAL 14-14
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

6. Own Ship True Heading (Item #6). The default 14.1.2.10 RPV Data. (Item #lo). Allows the user to
value used for ships heading if the auto ship head- determine the identification data for the controlled
ing update (Item #5) is disabled (- no), or ship UAV. The following items are provided:
heading is not available from the navigation inter-
face system (IBXMagnavox GPS). This value
can only be changed when Item #5 is disabled.
ITEM t10
This value should always be set to zero for land PRESETiRP DATA
based operations. 1 WEIGHT lELlP7-Y NEL TANK) - 149 KG
2 RPvkulDEL 1807
550. OPTlON I
cm,- OFnoN II
Note 910 OPTON II +
3 PAYLOAD 1
0 -NONE
I-MKD2-30
UAV/Target coordinate accuracy is directly 2.MKD4co
3 - WI0 RELAY
dependent upon an accurate ships heading 4 - EO,?XIR
6 CAMERA CONTROL SAY
value. For example, at a range of approx. 60 I-OSY

km, 1 degree of ships heading error will re- 2.PSY


I MSSlON COMPUTER + MS

sult in a corresponding error of I km in


UAV/Target coordinates. When Item #5 is
I
disabled (- no), the manual entry of ships
heading in Item #6 should be changed as of- 1. Weight (Empty Fuel Tank) (Item #l). UAV
ten as required to maintain navigation / tar- weight in kilograms with fuel tank empty.
geting accuracy. If Item #5 is disabled and a
value of zero is entered in Item #6, antenna 2. RPV Model (Item #2). Code number for the UAV
azimuth will be relative to the ships bow. model controlled by the station. Option II UAV is
a model #907 and Option II+ is #910.
14.1.2.9 Retrieval Net Data. (Item #9). It allows
the user to enter data necessary for use of the Automatic 3. Payload (Item #3). The payload to be used in the
Landing Procedure (Autoland). Retrieval net is used UAV.
primarily by Navy units.
4. Camera control bay (Item #6). Assigns control of
the camera payload to either the OBY or PBY op-
erator position. IfPBY is selected then the student
8 CAUTION ( box is used to control payload.

5. Mission Computer (Item #7). Allows the user to


Use of Autoland mode not authorized. define the type of CPA and Navigation Card
(NVC) used in the present UAV configuration.
Note Selection of +yes indicates that the Option II con-
figuration is used (new CPA and NVC installed)
Autoland is not used. Set all values to zero. and CPS navigation capability is available for the
air vehicle. Selection of - no indicates that the Op-
tion I configuration is used (old CPA and Pro-
I ITEM
19 I grammer Card) and GPS navigation capability is
not available.
I STATIW GLIDE PATH DISTANCE - OM
2 STATION NET DISTANCE. CM
14.1.2.11 Navigation Data. (Item#ll). Allows the
NOTE: + NET IN SAW OF STATION
_ NET IN 3ONT OF STATION
user to enter up to 10 target coordinates. These targets
are used by the pilot in the nav-to-coordinates flight
3 ENG CUT POINT NET DlSTANCE -W
4 NET ALTITUDE - OM mode. In addition, the function allows the operator to
define what the UAV should do when a target is reached.

14-15 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-OOO

a. Coordinates (Item #I). The air vehicles posi-


tion.

b. Hemisphere (Item #2). The northern (f) or


Use of Nav-to-Coordinate mode not southern (-) hemisphere.
authorized
C. Grid zone (Item #3). Allows selection of UTM
grid zone.
InELl
x11
PRESETNAWGATION UPDATE
d. Critical fuel (Item #4). When the fuel level
hlsa during flight falls below this level, a warning
1
2.
EM5COO
E59Bm0
N38O.ooO
N381 low
*CONTINUE
-HmD
flag is set on the MISSION/CURRENT Report
3 E- w- -HmD menu. This fuel setting is independent of low
4 E- N- -ncul
5 E N-- -Hcul fuel set in PRESETS.
6 E- N- -HOLD
I E- N-- -ncM.D
8. E N- HOLD e. Date (Item #5). The current date set (using
9 E- N - OLD

0 DESEECT
GMT).

f. Time (Item #6). The current time (Using


GMT).

Continue (+): UAV will proceed to the next target. g. Load data (Item #O). Performs the download of
the data entries to the UAV. A load in progress
Hold (-): UAV will circle over the target using camera message is displayed until a successful load is
guide parameters until commanded to proceed. completed. An error message is displayed if a
load failure is detected. LOAD data cannot be
14.1.2.12 GPS Initialization. (Item # 12). NOT selected if none of the menu items have been
USED. modified. Items that have been entered are
marked by an asterisk on the lefl ofthe display.
14.1.2.13 Mission Computer. (Item #13). Allows
the user to set up and load NVC waypoint navigation 2. Mask (Item #2). Used to initialize GPS sensor
programs and control. The Preset/Mission Computer control parameters in the UAV.
program menu branch consists of six additional items.
a. Elevation (Item #l). The minimum angle (in
degrees above horizon) for satellites used in
ITEM
x13 GPS solution. Satellites below this angle will
PRESETMISSION
COMIWTER not be used by the air vehicle GPS system. De-
1 GENERAL
fault value is 5.
2 MASK
3 CAOUND PROGQJ,LlER
4 DATUM SELECTlON
b. SNR (Item #2). The minimum signal to noise
5 LOADPRCGRAM
ratio (SNR) for satellites used in GPS solution.
SNRs below this level will not be used by the
8. CLEAR RW PROGRAMMER
air vehicle GPS system. SNR levels below 5
7 RESET PROGRUJUERS are not generally visible to the GPS system.
SNRs from 5 to 7 are generally sporadic in na-
ture. SNRs of 8 or better should provide con-
stant reliable results. Default value is 0.
1. General (Item #l). Normally used during preflight
to initialize the UAV position, critical fuel level, C. PDOP (Item #3). The Positional Dilution of
date, and time. If operation in GPS mode is Precision (PDOP) for the GPS system. This
planned, the coordinates need not be exact. The factor is a measurement of accuracy for the
correct UAV position, date, and time are obtained geometric GPS calculations. Values less than 8
by the GPS system in the air vehicle. The coordi- are considered good (1 = best) for GPS solu-
nates should be correct to within 100 miles and the tions. The mask value specifies the maximum
time correct to within 1 hour (GMT), and the date, PDOP allowed. If the best PDOP available by
area number, and hemisphere should be correct. the GPS system is higher than the value speci-

ORIGINAL 14-16
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

tied, than the GPS system stops generating po- ground program active and loading it to the
sitional fixes and the NVC switches to dead UAV should remedy the condition.
.
reckoning (DR) mode until the PDOP im-
proves. Default values is 40. d. Coordinates (Item #4). Allows the waypoint to
be specified in UTM coordinates.
d. PDOP Switch (Item #/4). The PDOP value for
switching between 3-dimensional (3D) and e. Grid zone (Item #5). Allows selection of UTM
2-dimensional (2D) GPS solutions. When the grid zone.
GPS system is operated in auto mode, it auto-
matically switches between 3D and 2D modes f. Holding time (Item #6). Specifies how long the
depending on the number of satellites it can re- UAV should circle the waypoint. The UAV
ceive. The PDOP must be for using 3D solu- will fly to the next defined waypoint along the
tions over 2D solutions. Ifthe solution for a 3D track (straight line) from the previous
fix is higher than this value (less accurate), waypoint. If the holding time is zero, then the
then the GPS system uses 2D solutions. This UAV flies to 1,000 meters from the current
value should be less than the PDOP mask waypoint, the program step ends, and the pro-
above (Item #3). Default value is 12. gram executes the next step. Ifthe holding time
is not zero, then the UAV flies to 2,000 meters
e. Dynamic Code (Item #5). Not currently used. from the waypoint and then begins circling the
Intended for future expansion. waypoint at a radius of 1,200 meters for the
time specified.
f. Set Default (Item #6). Allows the default val-
ues for each menu item to be selected. g. Altitude (Item #7). Allows any altitude within
the UAV flight envelope to be specified for
g. Load mask (Item #O). Performs the download that step of the programmed flight.
of the mask entries to the UAV GPS sensor. A
load in progress message is displayed until a h. Airspeed (Item #8). Allows any airspeed
successful load is completed. An error mes- within the UAV flight capabilities to be speci-
sage is displayed if a load failure is detected. fied for that step of the programmed flight.
The load mask cannot be selected if none of the
items have been modified or reentered. Items i. Command (Item #9). This option, which nor-
entered are marked by an asterisk on the left of mally is used to permit command inhibit, is
the display. currently not allowed by the software. This op-
tion should be set to + receive.
3. Ground Programmer. (Item #3). Used to define
and load navigation programs. This menu ac- j. Transmitter (Item #lo). Controls the UAV
cesses the ground program memory in the transmitter during the step. The options are + on
GCS/PCS only. It does not access the flight pro- and - off.
gram in the UAV air vehicle. The ground program
is loaded to the air vehicle (Item #0) for execution. k. Beacon (Item #l 1). Controls the transmission
mode during the step. The options are + on and
a. Advance step (Item # 1). Used to displayjincre- - off.
ment the program step.
I. Film Camera (Item #12). Selects the film cam-
b. Step # (Item #2). Used to display/select a spec- era operation mode during the step. The op-
ified step. tions are + on and - off.

c. Active (Item #3). Allows steps to be specified m. Video Camera (Item #13). Selects the video
as enabled (f active) or disabled (- inactive). camera operation mode during the step. Op-
Inactive steps are not executed by the UAV. tions are + on and - off.
When the ground program is loaded to become
the flight program, at least one step must be ac- n. Program (Item #14). Controls the execution of
tive to maintain communications between the the program. Selection of + continue branches
NVC and the GPWPCS. If a manual change of the program to the next active step for execu-
the program forces all steps inactive and com- tion. Selection of - end stops the program and
munications are lost, making a step in the exits from the program mode.

14-17 ORIGINAL
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

o. Load step (Item #O). Performs a download of


the displayed step to the UAV. A load in prog-
ress message is displayed until a successful
load is completed. An error message is dis-
played if a load failure is detected. LOAD step PBY. EMERGENCY FWR FAIL
cannot be selected if none of the items have PBY. BATTERY FAIL

been modified or reentered. Items that have


been entered are marked by an asterisk on the
left of the display.

4. Datum Selection (Item #4). Selects the datumused


for Global Positioning System (GPS) position cal-
culations. WGS 84 is the default selection. 14.1.5 Multifunction Mode. (MULTIFUNCTION
Push-button). Generates the multifunction mode menu
5. Load Programmer (Item #5). Used to load groups tree, which consists of Uplink Command, GPS Data,
of navigation program steps to the NVC. and current Navigation Data, UAV Test Points, and
Uplink/Downlink Frame Check.
a. Load prog. Performs the download of a group
of steps (from step # to step #) to the UAV. A
load in progress message is displayed until a
successful load is completed. An error mes- MULTIFLINCTION
sage is displayed if a load failure is detected.
I RIM(CcBwAmu
2. WSDATA
b. Load all steps. Downloads all possible pro- 3. CURRENT NAVIGATION DATA
4 RW TEST POINT CHECK
gram steps (1 through 96) to the UAV. A load 5 ECCPANEL

in progress message is displayed until a suc- 8 PAYLOAD CONTROL

cessful load is completed. An error messageis


displayed if a load failure is detected.

6. Clear RPV Programmer (Item #6). Clears the pro-


gram memory in the NVC. All steps will change to
inactive except step one.
14.1 S.1 Uplink Command. (Item #I). The IFF/
7. Reset Programmers (Item #7). Clears the program strobe functions on the UAV can be turned on/off by se-
memory in both ground programmer and the lecting Item #l of the Multifunction menu. In addition,
NVC. the payload shield can be deployed by selecting ON.

14.1.3 Calibration Mode. (CALBR Push-button).


The Calibration Mode is started by pressing the CALBR I IrrEMXl

push-button on the PCT. It provides direct access to the LlVLTlFUNCTlOHRlPLlNK COMWD


Altimeter Cal. & Warning Set submode (Item #l in the
1 IFFISTROBE
Preset Mode). 2 PAM.- SHIELD

14.1.4 Failure Display Mode. This push-button


may be used at any time for troubleshooting or emer-
gency procedures, or to verify normal system operation.
It should be selected if the PWR FAIL, GCS FAIL or RI-I
FAIL lamps illuminate on the PDP. It can also be se-
lected if the CAMERA GUIDE lamp blinks on the PCD
to determine which parameter is out of limits. When the
FAIL CHECK button is pressed, the GCS FAIL light 14.1.5.2 GPS Data. (Item #2). This includes:
goes out (if it was on). Any new failure will illuminate
the GCS FAIL light, but will not update the message 1. Station Coordinates (Item #l). Displays the cur-
screen unless the FAIL CHECK button is cycled off and rent UTM grid map coordinates. These coordi-
on again. nates are updated by the GPS. In the event of

ORIGINAL 14-18
Al -SRRPV-NFM-000

marginal GPS coverage, manual coordinates are 0000 1000 - No usable satellite
displayed. 0000 1001 - 1 usable satellite
00001010 - 2 usable satellites
000010 11 - 3 usable satellites
m3.4
n 5. Error Code (Item #5). An g-bit binary code indi-
bLTlFVNCTlGN,GPS DATA cating the error status of the GPS. The bit values
STATION COORD1NATES W-- s- and their meanings are:
MLCCIN xkvsY--w5
GRID ZONE
STANS CODE 0tmwoo
llW1111
00000001 - Battery backup failed
ERRW CODS
SHIP TRUE HDG WWDEG 000000 10 - Signal Processor error
Si-llP PITCH OOWDEG
SHIP ROLL ODODEG 00000 100 - Alignment error, channel 1
0000 1000 - Alignment error, channel 2